In this article, I’ll guide you through a step-by-step process to harness the power of Canva for quickly and easily making quality, effective worksheets. Whether you’re new to this platform or looking to refine your skills, you’ll learn how to design worksheets that are not only visually appealing but also pedagogically sound, enhancing the learning experience for your students. Don’t worry, you don’t need any technical knowledge because Canva does the hard work for you.

Don’t Have a Canva Account Yet?

The first thing to do, if you don’t already have a Canva account is to make one. This will allow you to make and save your projects.

Canva Pro

Canva makes it easy for anybody to create stunning visuals for a wide range of applications, including marketing materials, worksheets, presentations, social media posts, banners, and more -- no design experience required.

Try Canva Pro Free!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

It’s free to create a Canva account, but I do want to point out that with an upgraded Canva Pro account, you can take your creations to a whole new level with its unlimited features and premium content.

Once you’ve created your Canva account, the worksheet creation can begin!

You’ll sign into your account, and you’ll see a left sidebar that includes tools and options to use in your account. One of those options is projects. Clicking that will allow you to find projects you’ve made and that others have shared with you, in a neat and organized folder. Choosing “Create a Project” will allow you to create a class or even a worksheets folder, so you can begin the design process.

Step #1 – Create a Canva Design

When you’re in your Canva account you just need to find the button that says, “Create a Design.” From there, since you’re making a new worksheet, you’ll pick the worksheet option from a list of designs that are offered.

If you don’t initially see “Worksheet” in the drop-down menu, don’t worry. The list you initially see are some suggestions of things you might make from Canva. Just type “Worksheet” into the search bar at the top of the drop-down box, and you’ll receive the worksheet options instantly. There is more than one worksheet option, but the standard “Worksheet” is the standard size you’d likely use for class. Alternatively, you can choose the US Letter option, which would be the same size.

Tip – When you’re choosing the worksheet template you want to use you can use your mouse pointer to hover over the options to see the size for each option.

Step #2 – Choose Your Design Elements

Once you opt to create your new worksheets, you are going to have two options. You’ll be able to start your worksheet on a blank page to create the design you want, or you can choose from a set of Canva templates that are designed for you and ready to go.

There is no wrong answer here. It comes down to a matter of preference. The good news is that if you don’t have a design in mind, Canva has a wide selection of professional-looking templates that will be suitable for all kinds of worksheets.

Step #3 – Add the Text

Now that you have chosen a template or designed something on your own, it’s time to add the text that the students will be reading and/or the questions they will be answering. To do this, you’ll just choose the “Text” option on the sidebar. You’ll type your worksheet content right there. If you need to add headings, you can do that by choosing the “Heading” option that appears in the drop-down options.

All of your text ends up in handy boxes, which allows you to stretch or shrink text, as needed. You’ll also be able to move the text around the page so that your worksheet has all the elements you want, in the places you want them. You can change the font, font size, font color, and text elements using the bar above the design space.

If you want to change the text for example, you’d click the font drop-down to get started. This will bring up a section of the left sidebar that shows you all of the available fonts with a small preview. While some fonts are only available for Canva Pro users, there are many free options available.

After you have your font chosen, you can click the Effects button if you want to give your headers (or other text sections) some flare. Some options include turning text neon, curving your text, or creating a shadow or echo effect.

Step #4 – Add Images

If you want to add any images to your worksheet, now is the perfect time to do that. You just need to choose one of the image options (e.g. photos, charts, etc.) from the left sidebar. With Canva, you’ll have the option of adding your own images to your worksheets or you can choose from the Canva library, which currently includes more than one million stock images.

Whether you have something lesson-specific in mind or want to add something fun to your worksheets, you’ll have the chance to do that with images. If you don’t have your own, the Canva library is sure to have what you need.

At this point you’re almost done. In fact, depending on the worksheet you’ve created, you might be ready to save and begin the printing process. If it’s not perfect just yet you still have a few more options of things that you can do.

Step #5 – Add Shapes

Depending on the class, the addition of shapes could be helpful. You don’t have to worry about creating your own images – Canva has them ready to go.

So, whether this is a geometry worksheet or you’re having your class color worksheets adorned with Christmas ornaments, you’ll have what you need for your worksheet!

You’ll just need to search “Shapes” option in the left sidebar. From there, it’s as easy as choosing the shape you want to add to the worksheet and dragging it to where you want it.

Step #6 – Download and/or Print

If you’re making a standard non-interactive worksheet, it should be ready to go at this point. Keep in mind, that if something doesn’t look right you can adjust the elements so that it looks perfect. Once you’re happy with the results, you’re finished! You can download and print your worksheets and you’ll be grading them in no time!

Things to Keep in Mind

This was just a simple tutorial on how to make standard worksheets with Canva, but you can do so much more. You can make fillable or interactive worksheets if you want to share your worksheets online or virtually, as opposed to traditional in-class worksheets.

With interactive worksheets, you can go as far as adding video elements and other fun features.

If you’re adding your own pictures (on any of the worksheets) keep in mind that the final, printable product will be affected by the quality of images that you use.

In other words, if you add an image that is grainy or unclear for some reason it may be reflected in the final product.

For that reason, if you have an image you want to use that’s not good quality, you might want to consider a quick image search through the Canva library as you might find something that will work. This will help to ensure that your worksheets are the highest quality.

With Canva, you can create worksheets with anyone you want. So, if you share a classroom with another teacher or you have a teacher’s assistant, you can click the “Share” button in the top right corner to get a variety of options. You can add people or groups to share the worksheet with. You can also restrict the link so only those you want to see the worksheet or project, can see it. You can even share your worksheet on social media through the share section.

If you’re a Canva Pro user, you’ll have even more options for designing your projects.

One of the coolest features is the ability to resize your project even after you’re done. If you need a custom size or things don’t look quite right in the size you designed, you can just choose this option and put in the dimensions you want for most of the available project types.

As you can see, creating worksheets on Canva for free is simple. You only need a basic amount of knowledge and to know what you want, and you’re ready to design.

The kids in class will be sure to love the new worksheets and you can rest easy knowing you made them without spending too much time or money.

Once you make your first worksheet, you’ll see how easy it is. And once you do, you’ll see it’s so easy, you’ll be making more in no time!

Click here to try Canva Pro for free today.

Canva Pro

Canva makes it easy for anybody to create stunning visuals for a wide range of applications, including marketing materials, worksheets, presentations, social media posts, banners, and more -- no design experience required.

Try Canva Pro Free!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

The post How to Create Worksheets in Canva for Your Students appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

I don’t know about you, but I like to learn things fast. I might not be the smartest person out there, but I can learn faster than most people – maybe it’s my 20+ years of working with eLearning platforms. And if you’re reading this right now, chances are you feel the the same way.

I got some tips from Reddit on how to watch training videos, virtual conferences, online courses, and webinars faster, and that lead me to some cool hacks that I will explain. These tricks can even be used to speed up videos on streaming services like Netflix, Amazon Prime, YouTube, or anywhere else.

Here’s a quick overview of what I will cover in this article, if you want to skip ahead to the sections that most interest you:

• How Slow Videos Negatively Affect Learning
• The Advantages of Speeding Up and Skipping Through Videos
• The Simplicity of Speeding Up on Some Websites
• The Problem of “Chipmunk Voice”
• How to Speed Up and Skip Through Downloaded Videos
• How to Use Coding, Apps, or Plugins to Speed Up and Skip Through Videos
• Extra: Popular Video Players that Let You Speed Up The Video

How Slow Videos Negatively Affect Learning

Many videos are so slow-paced that viewers get bored. The viewers are easily distracted and are really just wasting time watching training videos while getting nothing out of it. The video may play all the way through, and they do not learn the content because they were not engaged.

A video with a droning, monotonous narration can put students to sleep. This is something to remember if you’re ever putting together your own videos for your training programs (check out our guide to the best video presentation software for doing this).

Remember, we’re living in the age of TikTok and Instagram, where people are used to quick, short, engaging videos. That’s not to say that your training video content needs to be the length of a TikTok, but you do have to remember that attention spans are shrinking and it’s harder than ever to keep viewers engaged for long periods of time.

Luckily, there are technology solutions that are easy to use to speed things up and save time watching videos.

The Advantages of Speeding Up and Skipping Through Videos

The one thing that a person’s most limited resource is time. Speeding up training videos increases retention because watching the faster video speed requires more focus.

Faster material is easier to concentrate on because a viewer feels more like he or she has to pay attention or they might miss something. If they do miss something, it is easy to go back to replay any part. This results in better retention overall from your online videos.

It’s possible to save about 30% of the time watching training videos while better comprehending the material.

That’s right, watching an hour video will only take 40 minutes. Thus, you can create 20 minutes of free time for every hour of video you previously watched at normal speed.

One of the best uses of these methods is to get through any mandatory video training as fast as possible to be able to take the quizzes and finish more quickly.

I used this method when I watched the training videos for how to use a document camera with Google Meet that I wrote about in this article.

The Simplicity of Speeding Up on Some Websites

Video streaming services and popular websites allow the training video playback to be adjusted. You will find the playback speed adjustment on YouTube by clicking on the tools icon at the bottom right screen of a playing video window.

YouTube allows the video playback speed to be adjusted increments of 1.25, 1.5, 1.75, and 2.0 to make it go faster and 0.75, 0.5, and 0.25 to make the video play slower.

The Problem of “Chipmunk Voice”

If you speed up the video, you may also speed up the audio, resulting in the voices sounding like a chipmunk. One solution for this problem I have found works well is a paid software program (with a free 7-day trial) called Enounce MySpeed.

The MySpeed tool can be used on websites with video playback without any built-in speed adjustment. MySpeed does not make a chipmunk sound for the voices. It just speeds up everything.

It also has a nice feature that shows how much time you saved from speeding up the videos you watched. For example, I ran it for about six months, and it showed that I saved over 100 hours watching training materials and other online videos.

This was helpful when in this article I reviewed the video presentations in the courses for those seeking a masters in instructional design.

How to Speed Up and Skip Through Downloaded Videos

Before you can speed up a pre-recorded webinar, first, you have to know how to download a webinar using a hack. Webinars may expire, and it is helpful to download a copy of the online video for personal use to watch it later or at a faster speed.

In this video, produced by KamuGenius, if the webinar was made using the Webinarjam system, you can see the steps to take to find the webinar file and download it,

Once you get the webinar downloaded, then you can speed things up.

Here is another way to do this hack using Brave, a browser that works like Chrome, but you are paid to use it. He uses the plug-in called Video Download Helper.

This method works with Webinarjam and some other webinar systems.

How to Use Coding, Apps, or Plugins to Speed Up and Skip Through Videos

There are many ways to speed up a video and even automatically fast forward a video that won’t let you with their regular video controls.

Coding

If you are comfortable using coding, you can run the developer tools of YouTube and find the video, then run it using JavaScript in the console by using this method.

Apps

Here are some free smartphone apps you can use to edit videos. You can skip the boring parts, speed up the playback, and fast forward video easily to watch at your own pace. You can download them for Android devices at Google Play or for iOS devices at the Apple App Store.

For Android and iOS devices:

• FilmoraGo
• Vlogit
• Quik
• Vizmato
• KineMaster

For iOS devices only:

• Slow Fast Slow
• SpeedPro Slow
• iMovie

Plug-Ins

For Chrome and Firefox users, in this video produced by Ryan Moran, you will see him show you how to get an extension called Video Speed Controller to speed up video playback of pre-recorded video.

You can use this hack for webinars that are pre-recorded and also for videos on YouTube.

Another Chrome plug-in to consider is SpeedUp. There are so many ways to do this, just search for “speed up video playback” to find a solution that fits your circumstances.

Extra: Popular Video Players that Let You Speed Up The Video

As a PC user, here’s a hack I’ve found especially useful. To speed up a video, you are watching on a PC using Window Media Player, you can hit CTRL+SHIFT+G while the video is playing. This shortcut key makes the video play about 1.5 times the normal speed.

Using the popular VLC Media Player, the shortcut key used to speed up the video is simply to hit the plus key. Hit it once to speed up the video a little and twice to speed it up more.

In Quicktime, you can use CTRL+K and then set the playback speed to the speed you desire. However, many people prefer to use 1.5 to make the video playback faster and still be watchable.

Useful Resources

• Edit video playback speed on iPhone
• 50 shortcuts for Windows Media Player 11
• Adjust video speed in iMovie on iPhone
• Build a custom HTML5 video player

Conclusion

Once you start to enjoy the benefits of watching videos at faster speeds, you will understand the psychological benefits of this process. If you make training videos, you can keep an audience’s attention more focused by teaching them how to save time.

If you are interested in learning more about how does virtual learning work to engage students, read my article here. In the meantime, you can have your viewers more engaged with the material if you simply suggest they speed things up while watching your training videos.

Have any questions about how to skip through online training videos and fast forward videos that won’t let you? Comment below for help.

The post How to Skip Through Online Training Videos & Fast Forward Videos That Won’t Let You appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Using games, puzzles, the alphabet, phonics, and sight words, Reading Eggs increases reading proficiency, comprehension, fluency, and pronunciation. But while Reading Eggs is primarily an innovative reading app that is split into levels to keep children engaged and enriched constantly, there’s also a math program available in the app called Mathseeds that’s adds math into the learning equation.

I know there’s a lot going on with the app and its offerings, which is why this guide will take you on a deep dive into Reading Eggs pricing and plans, and we’ll discuss whether or not I believe it’s a worthwhile program. This guide has been fully updated for 2024 to include the latest details so you can be confident you’re getting current, accurate info to help you make an informed buying decision.

How Much Does Reading Eggs Cost in 2024?

When it comes to pricing, Reading Eggs is admittedly one of the more complex apps out there.

If you’re just interested in accessing their reading program, you can subscribe to Reading Eggs for either $9.99 a month or $69.99 a year (works out to $5.83 a month when billed annually, a 41% savings).

Where things get unique and a bit confusing for some is you also have the option to combine your Reading Eggs subscription with access to Mathseeds (the brand’s terrific math program) for $13.99 a month or $99.99 a year (works out to $8.33 a month when billed annually, a 40% savings). This subscription gives you access to two different programs, covering a full range of curriculum for young kids.

You can try Reading Eggs free for 30 days.

Reading Eggs App Subscription – $9.99/monthly or $69.99 a year

If you’re only interested in subscribing to the Reading Eggs app, this is the plan for you. The annual subscription option will cost more upfront, but with a savings of 41%, it’s definitely worth it for the long-term savings.

Both plans give complete access to the app for teaching kids to read. The only difference is just in how much and how often you pay.

Some of the features of a Reading Eggs subscription include:

• Access for up to 4 kids
• Lessons match each child’s reading ability
• Fun rewards to keep kids motivated and engaged
• Reports to track progress
• Thousands of interactive lessons, printable worksheets, and children’s books to help your kid become a confident and fluent reader
• Available on mobile devices and desktops

Click here to try this plan free for 30 days.

Reading Eggs & Mathseeds – $13.99/monthly or $99.99 a year

If you’re also looking for a math app for your kids, Reading Eggs has a plan that includes access to the Mathseeds program which is also highly effective.

I was impressed by how Mathseeds combines solid pedagogical principles with engaging, interactive content to make learning math both fun and effective for children. The app’s strength lies in its ability to tailor the learning experience to each child’s individual level, ensuring that concepts are neither too challenging nor too simplistic. The lessons are thoughtfully structured, progressively building mathematical skills through interactive activities, games, and rewards that keep children motivated.

What sets Mathseeds apart in my experience is its ability to make abstract mathematical concepts tangible and understandable for young learners.

The app also provides valuable feedback and progress tracking, which is incredibly useful for parents and educators in monitoring a child’s development and identifying areas for further support.

The annual plan for the combined apps is the far better value as it offers a 40% savings, but it does require a larger payment up front.

Both plans give complete access to the two apps. The only difference is just in how much and how often you pay.

A Reading Eggs + Mathseeds subscription allows parents/caregivers to set up profiles for up to four children.

• Create profiles for up to 4 children
• Access all award-winning learning programs
• Access Mathseeds
• Lessons match each child’s skill level
• Detailed reports are sent to parents weekly
• Access to a library of 3000 e-books
• More than 500 printable activity sheets

Click here to try this plan free for 30 days.

All About Reading Eggs Award-Winning Programs

As someone passionate about eLearning technology, I’ve had the opportunity to thoroughly explore Reading Eggs, and I can confidently say it’s a remarkable resource for both parents and educators.

The app stands out for its engaging, interactive approach to teaching reading skills. Its intuitive design caters to children’s diverse learning styles, making it an effective tool for fostering literacy from a young age. The lessons are thoughtfully structured, progressively building on each skill in a way that’s both challenging and accessible.

What really impresses me is how Reading Eggs makes learning to read a fun and effective experience for kids, incorporating games, songs, and colorful animations that keep them motivated and engaged. A lot of apps lean so much into the fun side of things that they end up not being very effective, but that’s not the case here.

The app also offers excellent tracking features, allowing parents and educators to monitor progress and identify areas where a child might need additional support. I like that they send email updates when your child reaches new levels in the program, offering insights into how they’re doing.

The Reading Eggs programs are split into levels to ensure children are constantly challenged and thriving. This way encourages curiosity, growth, exploration, and the desire to learn. Reading Eggs programs have earned many awards and improved children’s academic performance and confidence.

Reading Eggs Junior (suitable for ages 2-4)

The beginning Reading Eggs program is an excellent introduction to pre-reading. The program encourages phonemic and alphabet awareness using fun games, interactive activities, and read-aloud books. In addition, the Reading Eggs Junior program is ideal for building strong pre-reading skills.

Reading Eggs (ages 3-7)

This program sets the core foundation for children to start understanding Phonics, exposes them to sight words, builds strong spelling skills, and widens their vocabulary.

Fast Phonics (ages 5-10)

The Fast Phonics program gives children everything they need to build critical and essential phonics skills.

Reading Eggspress (ages 7-13)

The Reading Eggspress program encourages and fosters a true love of reading. It teaches the true joy of reading and how to incorporate it into daily living and so much more.

Mathseeds (ages 3-9)

The Mathseeds program is a strong, academic program with a mix of strictly structured lessons, motivation, rewards, and more. In addition, it teaches core math skills that are integral to children’s success. Mathseeds is engaging and fun. Children will enjoy playing and learning without even realizing it.

How Does Reading Eggs Pricing Compare to Its Competitors?

I’ve tested a lot of different reading apps, and here are the prices of some of the other ones I feel are best:

• ABCmouse pricing – $12.99/month
• Epic pricing – $11.99/month or $79.99 annually
• Homer pricing – $12.99/mo or $79.99 annual plan
• Noggin pricing — $7.99/mo or $69.99/year
• Starfall pricing – $35/year

Reading Eggs, in comparison, offers competitive pricing that aligns well with its comprehensive, engaging content and user-friendly experience. Its cost-effectiveness is even more apparent when you factor in the depth of its curriculum and the breadth of its interactive activities.

From a personal and professional standpoint, I believe that Reading Eggs strikes a good balance between quality and affordability, making it an attractive option for parents and educators seeking a robust, engaging learning tool for their children.

Reading Eggs Cost Q&A

Does Reading Eggs offer a free trial?

Yes, Reading Eggs does offer a 30-day free trial that unlocks everything.

Can Reading Eggs be used on more than one device?

Reading Eggs can be enjoyed on a desktop browser, iOS, and Android devices. The app is award-winning and uses proven methods to teach.

How many children can be registered with one membership?

With one Reading Eggs membership, parents/caregivers can set up four children’s profiles and track each of their learning journeys.

Does a child require reading skills to use Reading Eggs?

No, not at all. Reading Eggs begins right at the start. It sets strong pillars for confident readers. Lessons are well structured and can be replayed repeatedly to further learning. The lessons match your child’s current skill level. The best part? Reading Eggs is fun, engaging, and fantastic! Children will have a simple time navigating the app and enjoy earning rewards.

Are there supplemental worksheets/books that can be purchased to extend the Reading Eggs program?

Reading Eggs offers many different workbooks to extend and enhance reading and comprehension. The Reading Eggs books can be purchased in a 10-pack in levels 1 and 2. In addition, the essential reading skills workbooks can be purchased for grades Kindergarten through grade 5. Finally, for additional math support, caregivers can purchase Essential Math Skills Workbooks for levels Kindergarten through grade 2. The Reading Eggs program is unlike any other!

What is it about Reading Eggs that children love?

There are many things about Reading Eggs that children fall in love with. It’s a simple, easy-to-use platform that has everything needed for fun. Reading Eggs offers games, music, songs, activities, read along, and an enormous library of captivating books.

Is Reading Eggs Worth It?

With Reading Eggs’ success rate, I definitely think it’s a great program for all kids ages 2-13. Personally, I’ve tried a number of different reading programs with my own kids, and Reading Eggs got some of the best results in the shortest amount of time.

The app is very accessible and affordable. It features well-structured lessons that can be watched as many times as needed, a user-friendly app, and games and activities to teach the core literacy skills needed for academic success.

Don’t forget that Reading Eggs has a 30-day free trial. The platform gives children all the tools to learn how to read and develop terrific comprehension skills. Reading Eggs is compatible with iOS, browser, and Android. It is an award-winning program that sets children up to be confident and successful readers.

Click here to learn more about Reading Eggs.

The post Reading Eggs Pricing: Plans, Free Trial Info, More (2024 Guide) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

ABCmouse’s fun, gamified curriculum was designed in collaboration with experts in the early childhood education field, and I can tell you firsthand, every kid I’ve seen who tries ABCmouse is immediately hooked. It’s a great tool for parents with busy preschoolers at home and is trusted by countless teachers for in-class learning as well. In fact,  of over 14,000 young children found that using ABCmouse helped close educational gaps between peers, improve learning motivation, and increase overall educational outcomes.

The guide below takes a detailed look into ABCmouse’s pricing and payment terms in 2024. It will give all the info you require to decide which membership plan (if any) is best for you. It’s also worth noting that ABCmouse offers a one-month free trial for new customers if you want to check it out before paying.

How Much Does ABCmouse Cost?

ABCmouse currently offers two different payment plans for their educational program, making it as accessible as possible for all budgets. Plans include an Annual Membership at $59.99 (often on sale for as little as $45) and a Monthly Plan at $12.99 a month. All plans automatically renew at the end of their term unless you cancel it.

In the past, ABCmouse has also offered a Short-Term Plan at 2 payments of $29.99 (one payment every 6 months), but at the time of this article’s publication, that plan is no longer available.

The biggest savings come with the Annual Plan where you can save 60% off the regular price and have access to an ABCmouse account for an entire year.

It’s also worth noting that if you’re a qualifying teacher in a school, you can get an ABCmouse membership for free to use on site in your classroom. As stated on the website, “Free teacher accounts are for individual teachers and educators of public schools, private schools, and Head Start programs in the U.S. and Canada and are to be used for classroom and in-school purposes only. Homeschooling and all other uses do not qualify.”

The only difference between the plans is simply the payment terms. In addition, some of the payment plans offer savings. All that is required to access ABCmouse is a membership.

ABCmouse also offers a 30-day free trial for new members where you can test out the app at no cost for one month.

Check out the key features and prices in the table below and continue reading to learn more details about ABCmouse’s subscription options.

	Monthly – $12.99 per month	Annual Subscription – One payment of $59.99/year, save up to 60%
Access to award-winning and curriculum from education experts
Age-appropriate learning that always engages and entertains children
Access to more than 10,000 learning activities
Ad-free
Parental Controls and insight

You may find other savings opportunities throughout the year, such as Black Friday and Cyber Monday.

Curious how this stacks up to the HOMER app? Check out our HOMER pricing guide.

ABCmouse Key Features

As detailed in our ABCMouse review, the benefits the app offers are enormous.

With an ABCmouse membership, little learners have access to a broad range of learning all in one place.

In addition, ABCmouse is a safe online learning platform for children and does not have any advertisements at all.

A unique feature of ABCmouse is that the child makes their own unique avatar. This can be a very entertaining experience for children filled with laughter.

Their avatar then works through a classroom-like setting down a personalized learning path tailored to their academic needs and interest. This makes it easy to track your child’s progress as they go down the path.

Another cool thing I’ve noticed is that ABCmouse keeps its’ platform up to date and you’ll often find Holiday decorations throughout the season or pumpkins at Halloween. This is a great way to keep children engaged in the world and understand calendars and timelines.

ABCmouse is great for many learning styles as well.

It is bright, musical, bold, and clearly explains the steps to children. Learning takes place through fun games and interactive opportunities, making it exciting for kids.

I like that ABCmouse is divided into leveled learning. Each time a new level is unlocked, the child has access to new games and activities. Children are always learning with ABCmouse, and more importantly, they’re having fun while doing it.

In my experience letting multiple kids test it out, ABCmouse is easy to navigate, even for children. It’s a great tool to use to practice independence. Children use their avatars to complete activities and earn tickets. Their tickets are then used to purchase things for their virtual room. Don’t worry though. There is not ever real money involved.

Who is ABCmouse Best Suited For?

ABCmouse is a fantastic learning platform for kids ages 2-8. There are many educational games and activities at appropriate levels to encourage and continue enriching learning for this age group.

How does ABCmouse pricing compare to its competitors?

Here are some competitors of ABCmouse with their price ranges:

• Epic pricing – $11.99/month or $79.99 annually
• Homer pricing – $12.99/mo or $79.99 annual plan
• Noggin pricing — $7.99/mo or $69.99/year
• Reading Eggs pricing – $9.99/mo or $69.99/year
• Starfall pricing – $35/year

As someone who’s tested dozens of learning apps, I found that the cost of Epic is basically on par with most other popular kids educational apps.

ABCmouse Pricing FAQ

Does ABCmouse offer a free trial?

ABCmouse offers a one-month free trial for new customers. Your child will have access to everything ABCmouse offers during the trial.

How many learning activities are on ABCmouse?

ABCmouse has over 2,000 printables, more than 450 lesson plans, and over 10,000 engaging educational games and activities. There isn’t a chance for children to get bored with ABCmouse!

How many children can register with one membership?

You can register up to 3 children per account with ABCmouse. Each child has their own avatar and the parent can obtain academic insights into each one. Users can access their ABCMouse work across all different devices they’re logged into.

What kind of activities can be expected on ABCmouse?

You can expect a huge variety of activities. ABCmouse never wants children to be bored of learning! Some examples of activities are:

• Puzzles
• Dot to dots
• Paint by number
• Tracing
• Coloring pages
• Readalong books
• Learning videos
• Writing activities
• Songs
• And much more!

What academic subjects does ABCmouse cover?

ABCmouse tries to cover everything children need while keeping it interesting, vibrant, and engaging. Some subjects the platform covers are:

• Reading
• Writing
• Math
• Colors
• Shapes
• Art
• Music
• And more!

Do teachers get a discount on ABCmouse?

Yes, qualifying teachers at public, private, and Head Start schools in the US & Canada can get ABCmouse for free as long as it’s used on site in their classrooms. Homeschool educators do not qualify for this discount.

Is ABCmouse free with Amazon Prime?

No, ABCmouse isn’t free for Amazon Prime members.

Is ABCmouse Worth It?

I definitely think ABCmouse is worth it, especially if you opt for the savings of the Annual Plan. At just $60 for a yearly subscription (often on sale for $45 many times throughout the year), the cost of ABCmouse is definitely a fair value for all of its educational value. I will say, the month-to-month price is a bit steep at $12.99, so I’d definitely stick with the annual subscription as it’s by far the best value.

ABCmouse helps children learn and maintain interest in learning by making it fun and engaging. It’s a great way to promote independent learning and easy for parents to stay on top of childrens’ progress.

In addition, ABCmouse offers multiple payment plans and an outstanding customer support team!

Interested in trying something else? There are some ABCmouse alternatives out there that also offer some good features and value.

Click here to get started with ABCmouse.

Have questions about ABCmouse pricing? Comment below to let us know!

The post ABCmouse Pricing: Plans, Free Trial Info, & More (2024 Guide) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Whether you’re introducing eLearning into your institution or kickstarting a personal eLearning project, the key to success lies in a solid, high-level plan.

In this article, I’m excited to share with you a practical eLearning implementation plan checklist drawn from my own experiences. These steps aren’t just theoretical, they’re tried and tested in the real world of online education. I’ll explore the essential challenges and strategies to consider, ensuring you’re equipped to embrace the vibrant and ever-evolving landscape of eLearning.

eLearning Implementation Plan Tips

Step 1. Define your objectives

The first step to creating an eLearning implementation is asking yourself why you think eLearning is a great option for your particular environment. Are you reaching out to a wider audience? Or improving knowledge retention with engaging interactive materials?

Web-based training totally makes sense but this sense is different to different instructors, audiences and institutions. If you are introducing eLearning into an organization or bringing innovations into a traditional school, see to it that every department and stakeholder is on the same page with your concept and vision.

Faculty may disagree with your goals, so you’ll have to go the extra mile ‘selling’ your idea to a pretty tough buyer.

Corporate environments may be even more reluctant to change since training needs vary widely across an average company. Indeed, Accounting, Human Resources and IT usually end up having opposite views of the learning and knowledge transfer processes.

It’s your job to harmonize and orchestrate different outlooks and business directions to ensure a smooth kickoff.

Tip! Make sure you as instructional designer and your colleagues/peers understand how they benefit from the new learning model.

Checkpoints:

• Are you planning to switch to pure web-based teaching or considering blended options?
• How do you expect to boost recall and retention using eLearning?
• Is your audience ready for the change? Do they have the right tech infrastructure?
• Is your faculty okay with the initiative? Are they showing any active support?

Step 2. What’s your scope?

Now that you know why eLearning is better than brick and mortar in your particular case, it’s time to define the scope of your new ecosystem. How far are you taking web-based instruction in your curriculum? Don’t try to overdeliver on day one. You can’t just wave a magic wand and automate routine tasks such as grading – or turn paper lectures into beautifully crafted digital content – overnight.

Tip! Start small and expand your scope as you advance technically.

Checkpoints:

• Are you planning to automate assessment?
• Will you employ old and new tools concurrently on the primary stages?
• What educational units are you thinking of? Entire courses, particular lessons, practical jobs, seminars?
• Will online exams be equivalent to offline exams and credits?

Step 3. Choose the right software

Sadly, one-size-fits-all never works in this field, so you should start mining for your eLearning software as soon as you can, and make compromises since nothing is perfect. Some lunatics like myself keep on digging for their entire lives.

Anyway, go through the list of major authoring programs like Lectora, Articulate or Captivate, then look into the second echelon and try compiling one or two mini-courses before you settle down. Never trust your first impression – the notions of easy and sophisticated, user friendly and cluttered, basic and feature-loaded get very blurry here.

Tip! Jot down your key requirements and expectations of a decent content delivery platform. Add the budget. See what matches your criteria.

Checkpoints:

• How do you plan to publish the courses? Does the software in question support SCORM or xAPI?
• Are you going to keep things plain, or are you after the bells and whistles modern software can offer?
• Are you wary of a steep learning curve? How much time do you have to get started?
• Is mobile support one of the prerequisites? Will your audience be using their smartphones and tablets to go through your content?

Step 4. Do quality assurance

Once the course is shaped and poised for delivery, ensure there are no glitches that could pop up when you least expect. Play and replay your embedded videos, check wording, grammar and spelling. (Yes, spellcheckers may be disgustingly negligent.) Ask your friends, family or a select group of students for their judgment and fix detected inconsistencies before going live.

Tip! When converting your deck into other formats (video, PDF, LMS packages, etc.), bear in mind that some effects and transitions may be lost. Confirm the limitations with your software provider in advance before jeopardizing critical data.

Checkpoints:

• Are your ideas conveyed in a concise and clear fashion?
• Is there any misleading jargon or ‘gotcha’ questions?
• Does the content play well on all required devices?
• Is there an excess of multimedia or other data-intensive content?

Step 5. Do your marketing or end up alone

Everything is fine-tuned and off to a great start, or so it seems. However, keep in mind that students will not necessarily sign up for your course just because it’s well-built and useful. You need to raise awareness of the content, keep your target audience nurtured with updates and onboarding information, and stay social and in permanent contact with the learners.

Of course, students may just have to take your class to get credit if that’s how it works in your system – and this is perfectly fine. Otherwise, you may need to do extra research, marketing and even advertising to recruit more participants to your educational program.

Tip! Use collaboration tools in your e-Learning software and/or maintain visibility in social networks to show there is a personality behind the facts, figures and slides.

Checkpoints:

• How do your learners get to know about the course?
• Do you send out any newsletters, reminders or personal invitations?
• Do you place ads and announcements in the right place where your target audience can see them?
• Do you keep in touch with your ‘alumni’ and provide timely responses to their queries?

Final Thoughts

It’s clear that implementing an eLearning program involves careful planning and consideration. The journey, while challenging, is incredibly rewarding, and the steps outlined in this article are among the most effective strategies I’ve honed during my years in the eLearning industry. They are designed to guide you through the complexities of eLearning implementation, ensuring a smooth and successful integration into your educational framework.

If you have any additional tips from your experiences or questions about creating an eLearning implementation plan, please share them in the comments.

The post 5 Steps for an Effective eLearning Implementation Plan appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Over the years, I’ve developed a toolkit of strategies and approaches, yet I’ve found that certain foundational elements are essential in crafting high-quality eLearning content. These elements are the cornerstones of effective eLearning, regardless of the subject matter or audience.

In this article, I’ll share these key fundamentals, drawing from my extensive experience in the field, to guide you in creating successful eLearning courses.

5 Features to Consider When Building an eLearning Course

1. Navigation

Over the years, I’ve come to understand the importance of viewing your course not just as a live instructional tool but also as a valuable reference resource. To achieve this dual purpose, it’s crucial to incorporate user-friendly navigation within your course. This means integrating menus, links, and pathways that allow learners to either follow the course linearly or navigate freely to revisit sections for better comprehension.

When designing your course’s navigation, consider the following key questions to ensure clarity and ease of use:

• Logical Structure: Are the concepts and ideas presented in a logical sequence that facilitates understanding?
• Review Accessibility: Have you provided backlinks or other means for learners to easily review previous content?
• Clarity of Navigation Aids: Are your navigation tools, such as infographics or menus, intuitive and easy to understand?
• Multimedia Accessibility: Have you included captions for all multimedia elements to enhance understanding and accessibility?
• Descriptive Elements: For all non-textual elements, have you provided descriptive text to ensure that all learners, regardless of their learning style or potential disabilities, can access the information?

Remember, the goal is to create a course that is not only informative but also navigable and accessible, allowing learners to engage with the content in the most effective way possible.

2. Multimedia

Every time you ask for instructional design tips on the web, all you hear about video is pure praise. There are so many ways instructional designers can use video effectively.

Indeed, a picture is worth a thousand words, and text-based content is becoming boring. Yet you always need to understand the goals of embedding a video into your course and the expected outcome.

Needless to say, multimedia is a great way to bring home your key points in an engaging manner. Depending on the objectives, you may want to give your material a professional ‘academic’ look and feel, or keep it informal and lively to motivate a younger audience.

For a comprehensive user experience, try a mix of media elements in the right proportion and see how it works for your learners.

Audio narrations can be used as the baseline method of content delivery, or as excerpts and quotations to highlight a specific point. The role of animations is hard to overestimate – it’s one of the best options to illustrate processes and logical sequences in a multitude of educational and business disciplines. Naturally, your course will look lifeless without relevant photos, imagery and diagrams, so make sure you throw a little bit of everything into the mix.

Check a few important things before you publish the course:

• Are all your pictures/videos legally owned?
• Is it still easy to play your content on an average PC/mobile device, given the volume of multimedia content involved?
• Are your multimedia items of good quality? Do they match each other by dimensions and definition?
• Are you sure the audio and video can be managed by the learner, i.e. paused, muted, etc.?
• Can the viewer speed up the video playback if they wish?

3. Interactions

Capture your learners’ attention by introducing interactions. Modern authoring tools provide a plethora of options in this field, including live characters, animations, social elements and even games.

“Live” human characters are just fun. They help to emphasize the key concepts and add a certain undertone to your narrative, based on their personal patterns and voices. Make sure your course goes hand in hand with the latest trends and sync up the material with social networks. Provide links to Facebook, LinkedIn, Twitter, etc. so your content can go viral. Flash animations are easy to implement and extremely efficient – this is true for various ages and learner groups. Unravelling your mysteries in animated form is a witty way for your course to pick up good karma.

Some creators will probably frown at this, but games are also a great eLearning motivator. Hot stuff to include in your training material, games not only entertain but help the students understand key objectives, roles and structures associated with your particular field of studies. I absolutely love gamification in eLearning.

My personal checklist on interactions:

• Are the animations in line with your general style?
• Is the chosen live character suitable for the audience you are addressing?
• Does each interactive element have an easy-to-formulate objective? If not, don’t hesitate to wipe out the redundant bells and whistles.

4. Tests and Assessments

Intersperse your course with quick tests to measure the audience’s performance and see if you are heading the right way. Authoring tools and online quiz makers allow you to use versatile question types such as true/false, multiple choice, fill the blank, drag and drop, essay, etc. By way of formative assessment, you may throw in short quizzes in the middle of your course and gauge interim results. For knowledge summaries, add a slide or two at the end of the material.

Before you move on to some other course module, check if everything is right:

• Are the tests coherent with the layout?
• Are all questions clear and logical?
• Do you have you have robust assessment metrics in mind?
• Do the quizzes include familiar subjects only, or go beyond the studied agenda?
• Is it easy to provide feedback on the course?

5. Tracking

Though not part of the course itself, tracking is of utmost importance to instructional designers. Sending your message into a black box just won’t fly. You need meaningful insights into your course performance, and the more criteria the better. Picking up on certain learner behaviors and defining obscure notions and bottlenecks in your narrative, you can eventually target the content to specific student groups and foresee and cater to their particular needs.

See to it that you have the right data handy:

• What’s the share of learners who completed the course?
• How did they respond to triggers and animations, what was the hit ratio?
• What time did it take the students to go through this eLearning material? Are they progressing at a comfortable pace?

Final Thoughts

Creating an eLearning course involves a ton of different considerations, and over my extensive time in the field, I’ve learned that while the process can be complex, certain strategies consistently stand out for their effectiveness. The tips shared in this article are among the most impactful I’ve discovered in my career, each playing a crucial role in developing successful eLearning content.

Remember, the journey of creating an engaging and effective eLearning course is an evolving one, and these tips are just the starting point. There’s always more to learn and new techniques to explore. I encourage you to share your own experiences and strategies in the comments below.

If you have any questions or additional tips that have worked for you, please feel free to contribute to the conversation by commenting below.

The post 5 Basic Elements Every eLearning Course Must Have appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

As someone with nearly two decades in instructional design, these stats paint a vivid picture of how deeply integrated LMS has become in the fabric of contemporary education.

Below, I’m going to explore this topic from a balanced and experienced perspective. I’ll talk all about the pros and cons, examining how colleges functioned before the digital era and whether LMS adoption is now a critical component in education.

Objectives are key

A key part of any eLearning implementation plan is having a clear objective.

What are your goals for using an LMS? Managing syllabus and homework? Blended learning? Pure online learning? Answer these questions honestly and you’ll probably know if an  LMS is a good fit for your needs.

Some might argue expense is a critical factor to consider. Well, it’s not. It’s all about creating an ecosystem accepted by teachers, students, administration, technical staff and other stakeholders. Everyone is supposed to use the LMS as a lifestyle or at least as a feasible convention.

Apparently, higher education faculty will be more inclined to try online courses or blended learning when they do have an LMS in place. Is it a cure-all? Probably not. The question is, how much are the teachers willing to delegate to technology? Needless to say, every college has its opinion-makers, so there is hardly a comprehensive solution for the entire field.

Good for simple assessments, good for big institutions

eLearning is a fantastic tool, but like anything, it has its limitations. Take assessments, for example. In my years of designing eLearning courses, I’ve noticed they often rely heavily on multiple-choice questions, missing out on the diverse testing techniques we use in traditional classrooms. You’re often left with a choice: settle for this standard format or invest in costly customizations to tailor the experience.

Combining LMS-based courses with in-person sessions, however, strikes a balance that’s both efficient and cost-effective. It’s a blend I’ve seen work wonders in terms of enhancing learning outcomes.

Speaking of cost-effectiveness, it’s crucial for an LMS to onboard a sufficient number of users to make the investment worthwhile. This is especially true in larger institutions, where the administrative workload can increase significantly. It’s not just about setting up the system, it involves integrating it with existing databases, updating student IDs, and keeping track of new enrollments and dropouts.

From an organizational standpoint, this can be quite a task. Each college needs to weigh whether the benefits of an LMS justify this effort. In my experience, while some institutions find it a valuable addition, others may opt for different approaches. It’s a decision that requires careful consideration of both the educational and administrative aspects.

Need authoring, performance, and attendance tracking? Get an LMS

A learning management system includes three core features:

• Online course delivery
• Tracking of students’ individual accomplishments
• Attendance tracking, course popularity evaluation.

So, basically, it all boils down to three key benefits:

• Convenient publishing and management of e-Learning materials, live interaction between students and educators
• Granular statistics on performance and instant feedback
• Running a college with minimal administrative overhead and bureaucracy.

That’s roughly the main idea and the essence of the subject. Is your college ready to jump on the bandwagon? Three checks out of three mean it might be on the right track.

Great option for tech-savvy schools

LMSs support teachers in managing tasks, creating engaging courses, implementing gamification elements, and much more.

However, as with any sophisticated solution, it needs constant professional care. A weak technological infrastructure may be an unsurpassable barrier for introducing a learning management system. Another looming danger is students’ attitude. Even in higher education, teachers still need to disassociate computers and web-based courses with pure entertainment.

Final Thoughts

The decision to implement an LMS in a college setting is multifaceted, balancing educational benefits with logistical considerations. From my years as an instructional designer, I’ve seen how eLearning, particularly when integrated with traditional classroom methods, can really enhance the learning experience. But it’s still important to acknowledge the challenges, especially in terms of the administrative effort and cost involved in adopting and maintaining an LMS.

Each institution must weigh these factors against its specific needs and capabilities. While an LMS can offer streamlined, scalable, and diverse learning opportunities, it also demands a substantial commitment to setup and ongoing management.

As we move forward in the ever-evolving landscape of education, it’s crucial for colleges to continually assess and adapt their teaching methods to best serve their students. Whether an LMS is part of that equation will depend on a variety of factors, unique to each educational environment.

The post Should Every College Use a Learning Management System? appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

As someone with an extensive background in the eLearning industry, I’ve spent countless hours tearing apart instructional design portfolios to understand what makes them tick, click, and stick in the minds of those who see them.

In the article below, I’ll share everything you need to know to build a killer instructional design portfolio that gets noticed and gives you the best chance possible of landing your dream job. And if you need inspiration on how to create your own, I’ve also pulled together a collection of great ID portfolio examples and ideas from other pros working in the industry right now in 2024.

If you’re new to the field and need a little help finding your way, I also highly recommend downloading your free copy of An Instructional Designer’s Notebook from our friends at iSpring as it’s a great companion to this guide for those starting a career in ID.

An Instructional Designer's Notebook

Instructional Designer’s Notebook is a free collection of the most useful guides on becoming an instructional designer and creating eLearning content to facilitate every step on your eLearning trajectory. It includes lists of ebooks, YouTube channels, blogs, tips from top experts, interactive checklists, and more.

Free Download

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Examples of Great Instructional Design Portfolios

Here are a few picks from tons of instructors’ websites I found. With these examples below, I’m trying to demonstrate a multitude of styles, layouts, and approaches to building instructional design portfolios.

1. Lila Azouz →

The thing I really like about this portfolio is that all projects are conveniently grouped and labeled, drawing the line between eLearning projects, games, performance interventions, and evaluations. This instructional design portfolio includes password-protected content available upon request. Viewers have access to additional resources in PDF nicely placed under the description.

2. Corinne Fisketjon →

This is a great example of a simpler minimalistic layout, though neatly structured and logical. The content is split into multiple categories for better navigation. Embedded multimedia works fine with no broken links or outdated scripts.

3. Jackie Van Nice →

Jackie’s website is a classy representation of an eLearning professional. Every case includes the following elements: project background, course features, published sample, solution, and role description. Another thing I like is that the site employs a cloud of tags to make searching for specific topics easier.

4. Christy Tucker →

This is a well-written practical eLearning portfolio featuring this expert’s stand-outs since 2004. A simple and clear WordPress layout ensures easy reading and neatly integrated multimedia. The content is granularly organized, with large thumbnails to give you a basic idea of the contents.

5. Michael Zielinskie →

This is a really clean, easy-to-navigate instructional designer portfolio that showcases Mike’s work. It also showcases a good variety of projects to give visitors a solid overview of his capabilities.

6. Beth Myers →

Beth’s website and portfolio are a whole lot of fun. Because she’s both a game developer and learning products designer, she gave her website a video game aesthetic that’s really unique and memorable. Additionally, her portfolio page doesn’t just have pictures/screenshots of her work, it often also includes good descriptions and context to better explain the project.

7. Shalini Mathias →

This portfolio was performed in Prezi, a visual non-linear presentation service. It’s a great way to showcase one’s experience as a multi-dimensional story with a wealth of user-friendly tools. Prezi maps all key accomplishments and projects of interest, preserving timeline and logical ties. A format well worthy of attention!

8. Britt Arechiga →

A collection of eLearning courses, storyboards, and videos, this portfolio provides a smooth browsing experience and quick access to the projects. Some works are presented as screenshots, others are packed into multimedia formats. The author uses Dropbox as cloud storage.

9. Tom Washam →

This gallery features categories for the different types of instructional design work Tom has done, like Gamification, Explainer Videos, and basic eLearning. All  of thecase studies provide a project description, customer name, and details on the technology used which can be very useful information for a potential employer. More information is available in .swf format.

10. Chris Friend →

This is another ID portfolio that is both clean and includes great descriptive content. Chris does a really excellent job of showcasing his instructional designer skills across a diverse range of projects.

11. Candice Bowes →

While this is a no-frills portfolio that’s not necessarily visually stunning, it does a good job of quickly providing access to projects in PDF and PowerPoint format. Simple, clear, and to the point.

12. Jackie Throngard →

Jackie’s page displays samples of instructional designs developed for a host of educational, business, and non-profit organizations. Remember, showing diversity in who you’ve worked for and the kinds of projects you’ve done can go a long way to helping you get more jobs. The formula here is a basic test description plus a PDF to learn more. At the bottom of the page, you can find the author’s latest publications, separate CVs for academia and business, as well as links to social networks.

13. Ginger Nichols →

Ginger’s portfolio is a mix of eLearning, instructor-led training, job aids, etc. What’s peculiar in this project gallery is a category dubbed “Clicky-clicky bling-bling” where the author places experimental and incomplete jobs. For all projects, Ginger indicates the date and the technology used. The full content opens up as HTML5. Some case studies are password-protected for confidentiality purposes.

14. Chad L Smith →

When you land on this site, you’ll quickly learn about Smith’s many roles: education specialist, freelance designer, instructional designer, and curriculum developer. There’s also an instructional designer resume front and center that summarizes his experience and educational background. The portfolio includes examples and excerpts of learning objects that Smith has developed and references from colleagues. The unique feature of this site is that each time viewers click on an image to view a sample, they are taken back to Smith’s introduction, then they must scroll down to see the samples.

15. Stellar Instructional Design →

This portfolio is well organized and has some well-designed thumbnails that catch the eye and guide the visitor to the types of projects they want to see.

16. Stylelearn.com →

Clicking on this site brings a different result than some other portfolio sites. The site doesn’t appear at first to be a portfolio. The “about” tab takes the viewer to information about Alexander Salas, a designer with experience in the healthcare and IT industries. The home page features a learning game, a demo, and a training course that viewers can experience. The “sample” tab leads to several short demos created in Articulate Storyline and Rise. The demos are colorful, interactive, and a good representation of the designer’s skills.

17. Dr. Jennifer Lynn Wagner →

While this instructional design portfolio is pretty simple and plain, it gets the job done. I particularly like the category buttons at the top you can click to take you to specific types of her work.

18. Heather Willis →

Willis’s YouTube portfolio begins with upbeat music and simple visual elements that introduce her as an instructional designer with skills in Storyline, Captivate, Camtasia, Premiere, and Edge. Willis works with animation, develops presentations, and creates videos. Here, she shares demo snippets of pieces she has created. The portfolio includes statements from clients regarding Willis’s work. The video concludes with her social media contact information.

19. Tim Slade →

Tim’s portfolio is really great. Not only does it feature some big name clients, but when you click on the projects, there are supporting videos walking you through the work and lots of useful info.

20. Andre Syzmanowicz →

Syzmanowicz shares a YouTube video portfolio that highlights a training course for healthcare professionals to help patients understand the benefits of colorectal cancer screening. The video is just over two minutes, and demonstrates how learners move through a module and assessment quiz.

21. Liberate eLearning →

This portfolio is a virtual tour of the eLearning resources developed by Liberate eLearning. Set to music, the portfolio is fast-moving and technically savvy. It’s evident that this custom eLearning developer has performed work for all types of companies, including major corporations. Interested parties can visit the company’s website for more information.

22. The EduTechDiva →

Tonya V. Thomas’s Eductech Diva website describes her work in several areas, including educational technology, design, project management, and multimedia communication. Thomas’s portfolio includes a collection of work samples where the viewer can click on links to see interactive presentations.

23. The University of Hawaii →

This is how colleges display their distance learning programs and course portfolios. All programs feature an instructor, method of delivery, and description. No frills, pure information. If I had one complaint, it’s that the loading time of this portfolio is pretty slow and could definitely be improved.

24. Hemeon Learning Inc. →

Just a bunch of sample screenshots. However, this portfolio page has a disclaimer: more information will be available after registration. The projects here fall into the following categories: Health and Safety, Human Resources, Information Technology, and Policy.

Why Do I Need an Instruction Design Portfolio Site?

Your ID portfolio encompasses your past and present skills, domain knowledge, subject matter expertise, educational background, and more. It also gives your peers, employers, and students a glimpse of your creative process, methodology, teaching techniques, and past instructional design projects.

By presenting your experience in a structured, tangible fashion, you get an edge over potential competitors who don’t have a portfolio, allowing you to stand out to potential employers.

Portfolios make a recruiter’s job so much easier and provide a great shortcut to landing an interview with a hiring manager, helping you bypass ordinary selection filters. Having quality samples of your eLearning courses and academic work will catch an employer’s eye. Plus, potential clients may get a sneak peek into your pricing and terms.

That said, one of the common issues associated with portfolios is non-disclosure.

Sometimes, you have no right to share your accomplishments in proprietary work with the community at large or third-party organizations in particular. Try to find a workaround and describe a project from the perspective of your personal input, without dropping names or giving away classified information.

A well-made eLearning portfolio can also be an opportunity to show off your soft skills and personality to potential clients and employers. Don’t hesitate to throw in lively details, or an appropriate story regarding a specific instructional challenge. A personal slant will help you build a rapport with a broad audience and let people see the real author behind the courses.

Instructional Designer Portfolio Checklist

Here are some things you’ll want to make sure to include in your own portfolio:

• Clean design. Although this may not directly define you as an Instructional Designer, the look and feel of the portfolio page makes a crucial impression on your viewers. Elegant imagery and a smart layout will surely earn you a few extra points.
• Content diversity. Make sure you showcase versatile courses ranging widely by content, style, approach, year of publication, etc. Having a diverse portfolio highlights that you have a wide range of instructional design skills that make you well-suited to all types of jobs.
• Clear descriptions. You want to showcase your instructional design process and methodology and guide the viewer from challenges and requirements through the solution and up to business/academic impact.
• Employed tools/software. Don’t forget to mention your favorite eLearning tools, LMS, and authoring software to give the portfolio a professional flavor.
• Project roles and positions. Talk about your specific responsibilities within every project, and accentuate your personal input.
• Confidentiality and IP. Make sure that you’re not breaching any NDAs or confidentiality policies when you share a project in your portfolio. By the same token, protect your own intellectual property from misuse – provide screenshots or safe links rather than original files.
• Academic/business paper samples. Supplement your portfolio with examples of your writing. This can be scripts, papers, publications, etc.
• Personal details. Your mission, interests, and hobbies are an integral part of your professional brand.

Basic Tips for Creating Your eLearning Portfolio

Here are some simple tips to guide you as you create a portfolio:

1. When sharing your experience as an Instructional Designer, focus on the practical value of your activities, as well as your capabilities for problem-solving and executing complex projects from scratch. Go beyond your skills as a course author and throw strategy into the mix, matching employers’ potential needs with your battle-hardened optimization scenarios.
2. A perfect portfolio shows your prime accomplishments and the links between them – not the whole story with all its ups and downs. Choose carefully, and see if the projects on the list still comply with your active skillset.
3. The target audience is another aspect worthy of consideration. You may need to come up with a couple or more portfolios to cater to different verticals. Is this a traditional school project or an eLearning design opportunity that you have in mind? Do you need to highlight your business coaching activities? Factor this in for your portfolio.
4. If you are thinking of a platform for deploying a personal website, try WordPress. It’s a market-tested engine used by millions of people, so you can’t go wrong. WordPress encompasses a host of free and paid plugins for every taste and budget, with decent customization options. Check out this nice guide to building up a WordPress site.
5. Last but not least, always keep it up to date. Make regular updates to the description and review the portfolio based on new experiences, certificates, or challenges. Besides, educational technology evolves all the time, so you don’t want to appear out of touch by mentioning obsolete tools.

Crafting an instructional design portfolio may take up a good deal of time, but it pays off well in the long run, helping you land better jobs and grow your salary.

Mistakes to Avoid When Making Your ID Portfolio

Before we get into the step-by-step process of creating a portfolio, I want to address the stuff that often gets swept under the rug but needs to be front and center – the common blunders in crafting an instructional design portfolio. While some of the best lessons are learned by making mistakes, let me help save you some heartache by talking about some of the most common pitfalls that can turn a rockstar portfolio into a rookie one.

Overloading the Portfolio

The Mistake: Throwing in everything but the kitchen sink. Every project, every course, every tiny interaction you’ve ever designed.

The Fix: Curate, curate, curate! Choose projects that showcase your range, your expertise, and your design philosophy. Your portfolio is your art gallery – let’s keep it sleek, selective, and stunning.

Neglecting User Experience

The Mistake: Getting so wrapped up in showcasing your projects that you forget about the journey you’re taking your viewer on.

The Fix: Design for the viewer. Easy navigation, quick loading times, and a clean, intuitive layout are key. Make sure they can glide through your portfolio with zero friction and 100% immersion in your work.

Failing to Demonstrate Expertise

The Mistake: Showcasing final products without peeling back the curtain on your process, your role, and your impact.

The Fix: For each project, weave a narrative. What was the challenge? How did you tackle it? What was your role, and what were the results? Show them the wizard behind the curtain, revealing not just the what, but the how and why.

Ignoring Visual Appeal

The Mistake: Underestimating the power of aesthetics, resulting in a portfolio that might be rich in content but lacks in visual charm.

The Fix: Your portfolio is a visual representation of you. Employ a cohesive color scheme, use high-quality images, and ensure that every visual element aligns with your personal brand. Make it a feast for the eyes, not just the mind.

5 Steps for Creating Your Own Instructional Design Portfolio

Your portfolio website is the most crucial project you’ll work on. It’s your first impression, and it can determine whether potential clients or employers stay to look at your projects or leave your site. Your site needs to be outstanding, engaging, and unforgettable to succeed.

There are a lot of ready-to-go website constructors like Wix and Weebly. However, I do not recommend you use them, because they will limit your capabilities. The problem is that you cannot embed your online courses into the website via HTML5 using such constructors, and there is no point in your portfolio without “live” samples.

So what can you do?

I recommend building your portfolio with WordPress – the full-powered CMS (Content Management System).

One of WordPress’ greatest strengths is that it is easy to use and doesn’t require prior training to set it up.

You can easily add your HTML5 code to embed your courses via WordPress plug-ins. Your website with WordPress is based on your hosting, so you don’t need any other payments to maintain your website. By the way, my blog is also built on WordPress.

Here are the steps to create a great portfolio website using WordPress:

1. Create a domain. A domain is your website name, so choose it wisely. It is better (and simpler) to use your real name as the domain.
2. Choose the right hosting. You need hosting to store data on your website, so it is an essential part of your portfolio site. As for me, I highly recommend Bluehost. You can easily check your domain name on their website. You don’t even need to link a domain and hosting manually – Bluehost takes care of it for you.
3. Perform a one-click WordPress setup on your website. Again, Bluehost makes installing and setting up WordPress super fast and easy.
4. Select a WordPress theme. It will define what your website will look like. You can use free themes or make your custom theme on your own but this is a time-consuming process. Choose one of the beautiful and not quite expensive ready-made themes that WordPress offers. A portfolio website should have a modern and stylish look, so choose the right theme that works best for you. Click here to select the ready-to-go theme.
5. Install and activate a plug-in for embedding your course to your portfolio website.  A good course plugin will feature an easy-to-use interface for managing and embedding your course content within minutes. See the guide on how to do this here.

Now all that’s left is adding your courses, their descriptions, and your bio. Well, now you are all set. Congrats!

Remember, a strong portfolio website can go a long way toward promoting your skills and expertise to potential clients or hiring managers. By showcasing your best work, you can demonstrate your ability to produce high-quality results for their organization. When they see your portfolio, it should inspire them to hire you for their team.

Get the Training You Need to Take Your Instructional Design Career to the Next Level

Unlock your full potential in instructional design with the Professional Certificate in Instructional Design program from Emeritus.

Gain comprehensive knowledge ranging from instructional design basics to popular theories and practical implementation strategies for online learning environments.

Whether you’re looking to start a new career in the field or just take your skills to new heights, this course is perfect for you.

Join now to take the first step toward becoming an expert in instructional design!

You can learn more about the program and request a brochure at this link.

Best Overall

Emeritus Professional Instructional Design Certificate | Online Certificate Course

Gain firsthand expertise in instructional design principles and methodologies through this unique Professional Certificate program. Create impactful learning solutions and improve people's ability to learn.

Learn More!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Final Thoughts

I’m looking forward to your nominees for the ‘truly outstanding portfolio’ award. Found a great sample? Give me a shout in the comments, and I’ll add it to the list!

If you are on the list of award-winning portfolio authors, feel free to embed this badge on your website! To do so, just copy and paste this code in an HTML editor:

<a href="https://myelearningworld.com/instructional-design-portfolio-samples/">
<img src="https://myelearningworld.com/gold-badge.png" style="max-width: 100%;"/>
</a>

Have an interview coming up for an instructional designer job? Make sure to check out our guide to the most common instructional design interview questions.

The post 24 Model Examples of an Instructional Design Portfolio (2024 Update) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

One area where people sometimes get confused is understanding how Skillshare’s pricing works, because they do change things up from time to time. Can you buy their online courses individually? Is there a monthly subscription option? Are there any free classes? As someone who’s used Skillshare for several years now, I’m here to clear things up for you.

This guide takes a detailed look at each of the plans offered by Skillshare in 2024, including their cost, key features, and free trial information. Before I start, it’s worth pointing out that Skillshare also offers a one-month free trial, so you can fully experience the platform before making any commitments.

How Much Does Skillshare Cost in 2024?

As of early 2024, the cost of a Skillshare membership is currently $167.88 per year for the annual plan (which works out to $13.99/month averaged out) or $32 a month for the new month-to-month plan

I have noticed that this price does seem to ever so slightly change from time to time. Earlier this year, Skillshare was priced just slightly lower around $165 for an annual membership, and in the past, they’ve explored different pricing options, including sometimes offering a monthly plan and other times doing away with it. At the time of this writing, the Skillshare monthly membership is once again available for the first time in the last couple years.

Skillshare Premium membership gives you:

• Unlimited access to over 25,000 Skillshare courses in a wide range of categories
• Access to the new Skillshare Live Sessions 
• Access to the student community where you can engage in discussions with other students taking the courses you’re taking
• Download Skillshare classes for offline viewing (currently only available on tablets and phones, not available on desktops)
• Earn Badges and Class Certificates for completing classes
• Gain hands-on expertise with class projects
• Enjoy Learning Paths with curated series of sequential courses for building skills
• Discounts on other creative platforms, including SquareSpace and Adobe Creative Cloud.

You might be asking, “Is there a free Skillshare plan?”

Skillshare used to offer a free membership tier that included limited access to a small selection of classes. However, they got rid of the free Skillshare courses a year ago back in September 2021, and now, the only option is the annual premium membership plan.

Skillshare also has plans for teams. These plans are for businesses that want to subscribe with multiple users and other students.

You can learn more about the Skillshare Teams plan pricing in the chart below:

Skillshare Premium Membership- $167.88/year ($13.99/month) billed annually or $32 month-to-month

The Skillshare Premium membership gives learners access to thousands of classes taught by top experts and industry leaders.

Enjoy classes in a vast array of categories such as creative writing, music, photography, web design, and fine arts.

With a Skillshare membership, learners also have access to the student community and the Skillshare app.

Learners will be able to download and save classes for offline learning and enjoy each class completely ad-free. The ability to download classes really is a huge bonus here and is useful for so many situations, like when you’re traveling and don’t have internet access.

The annual Skillshare membership cost also gives the learner amazing discounts on other creative platforms such as SquareSpace and Adobe Creative Cloud.

The Skillshare annual membership does require a once-a-year payment upfront for the whole period, but it’s a great value for what you get, saving you more than 50% off the monthly price.

Key Features:

• Unlimited access to all of Skillshare’s classes
• Ad-free content
• Download courses for offline viewing
• Massive discounts for other creative programs
• Access to Skillshare’s online learning community
• Quick and simple to maneuver lesson plans
• Access to join Skillshare “Groups” to share work and learn from others
• Feedback and advice from teachers and classmates
• Easy-to-use platform

Who is the Skillshare Premium Membership Best Suited For?

The Skillshare Premium membership is best for anyone wanting to enhance or learn new or existing skills.

The annual subscription offers access to all of the classes available at Skillshare ranging in topics from freelance and entrepreneurship, marketing, creative writing, and fine arts. There is something for every learning with a Skillshare membership.

The Premium subscription gives learners access to essentially an unlimited amount of education.

Skillshare Pricing Q&A

Is there a Skillshare free trial?

Yes! Skillshare offers a free one-month trial.

Does Skillshare offer both monthly and annual payment plans?

Currently, Skillshare only offers both an annual membership and monthly plan as of early 2024. It’s worth noting that sometimes Skillshare only offers an annual plan and doesn’t give a monthly option.

Does Skillshare offer discounts?

During the holidays, you may be able to find Skillshare Black Friday or Cyber Monday deals. Our Skillshare discounts guide has more tips for saving.

What form of payment does Skillshare accept?

Skillshare accepts all major credit cards, PayPal, Apple Pay, and Google Pay for the annual subscription.

Does Skillshare have a refund policy?

Skillshare offers a refund on annual memberships if contacted within 7 days of purchase.

Can you cancel Skillshare?

Yes, canceling Skillshare is easy and you can do it at any time. Just log in to your account, go to the Payments tab, and click ‘Cancel Membership’ if you signed up through the Skillshare site. If you signed up for a Skillshare account via the Google Play or Apple Store, you’ll need to cancel through those methods.

After you cancel Skillshare, your account will remain active through the period you’ve already paid for.

What are some popular classes on Skillshare?

• Portrait Photography – Shoot and Edit Instagram-Worthy Shots
• Mastering Tik Tok – Stop Scrolling and Post Your 1st Tik Tok
• Easy Animation – Make Fun, Cute GIFS For Your Instagram
• Confidence for Creatives – 5 Exercises to Grow Your Confidence and Self-Care

How long are the classes on Skillshare?

Skillshare classes contain anywhere from 20-50 minutes of pre-recorded video.

Skillshare Pricing Compared to Other Online Learning Sites

You might be wondering how Skillshare’s membership fee compares to other popular course websites, like Masterclass or LinkedIn Learning.

Let’s take a look:

• Coursera pricing — $59 a month or $399 a year for a Coursera Plus subscription
• LinkedIn Learning pricing — $39.99 for month-to-month or $240 for an annual membership
• Masterclass pricing — $120-$240 a year, no monthly plans available
• Udemy pricing — Individual courses sell anywhere from $19.99 to $199 each

At $13.99/month for the annual plan ($167.88 billed annually) and $32 for the month-to-month offering, Skillshare pricing is a solid value when compared to other major players in the online course marketplace. The only cheaper option really is Masterclass, but it’s worth pointing out that they have far fewer classes and don’t cover nearly as many topics as you’ll find on the Skillshare platform.

Is Skillshare Worth It?

So, the big question is: Is the Skillshare price worth it?

We think so.

While Skillshare might not be the perfect fit for everyone, it’s a great fit for most people looking to learn new skills or pursue new hobbies and passions.

There are thousands of classes across just about every category imaginable, and the teachers are true experts in their field, so you know you’re getting good instruction. There are classes in art and design, acting, cinematography, business, proofreading, programming, voice over training, instructional design, Microsoft Office, web design, digital marketing, illustration, and more. Skillshare is a great alternative to Masterclass and other online course platforms.

Check out what these people have to say about it:

And don’t forget, there’s a one-month free trial, so you can always test it out before paying a cent to see if a Skillshare subscription is worth it for your situation.

Skillshare is an incredible online learning platform. It has thousands of classes perfect for creatives and entrepreneurs. Start your free month today!

Check out our Skillshare review for a deeper look at this platform.

Have any questions about Skillshare pricing or plans? Let us know by commenting below.

The post Skillshare Pricing: Plans, Free Trial Info, More (2024) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

In the guide below, I’ll give you everything you need to know about FutureLearn pricing, plans, and features so you can see if it’s the right choice for helping you reach your goals. I’ll also discuss how its pricing stacks up against other popular online learning sites.

This guide has been fully updated for 2024, so you can be confident you’re getting current, accurate info to help you make an informed decision.

What is FutureLearn?

FutureLearn is a fantastic platform offering online courses and degrees from top universities around the world. It was established in 2012 and is owned by the UK Open University.

FutureLearn is partnered with several well-known universities and colleges to provide high-quality education and superior job-related skills. They are also partnered with the British Council to increase accessibility to students in low and mid-income countries worldwide.

In addition, the massive learning platform does something different from others, offering accredited courses. So you can learn to develop a career, all from home with FutureLearn.

FutureLearn offers a variety of programs and degrees. The platform offers many free courses with the option to purchase to receive a certification.

All FutureLearn courses are created with high-quality content that helps to develop and grow industry-required skills.

FutureLearn courses vary in length of time they take to complete. Some short courses take a few weeks, while other programs span longer.

Students can choose to enroll in multiple online courses if they have the time to commit.

In addition, FutureLearn provides beautiful digital certificates upon completion of paid courses that can be used for career development, showcases on a resume or career profile.

Popular subjects on FutureLearn include:

• Business and management
• Healthcare and medicine
• Teaching
• Psychology and mental health

Regardless of whether you’re looking to deepen your knowledge, strengthen skills, or develop a new hobby, FutureLearn is the platform to do it with.

The platform has a massive range of subjects, categories, topics, and information suitable for all learners.

When students sign up for FutureLearn, the platform prompts them to create a profile. This is a great way to introduce yourself to other students as they come to your page to “meet” you.

FutureLearn is a great place to spend time digitally.

So what makes FutureLearn stand out? Continue reading to find out! We’re sharing all the details surrounding the fantastic learning platform. By the end of our guide, you’ll be ready to start learning!

Let’s get started with our FutureLearn pricing overview…

How Much Does FutureLearn Cost?

FutureLearn offers two different kinds of plans: Free Limited Access and Paid Unlimited Access.

Here’s a breakdown of the differences between them:

Limited Access (Free Plan)

Most of the online courses on FutureLearn can be studied free of charge. The platform does a great job at making high-quality education accessible regardless of socioeconomic status.

This plan gives you limited access to 1400+ short courses along with restricted access to course content (meaning you get lessons delivered weekly rather than all upfront).

However, you can’t access all of the course lessons up front to learn whenever and wherever, you won’t receive any certificates when you complete courses, and you won’t be able to access the course material again once you’ve completed the class.

Unlimited Access ($39.99 Monthly or $244.99 Annually)

The Unlimited Access plans from FutureLearn give you full access to everything the platform offers.

If you’re looking for accreditation, FutureLearn offers certificates that show you completed a course if you have an unlimited plan. You must complete a series of evaluations and score a particular mark to earn accreditation. For that reason, accreditations from FutureLearn mean something in the industry.

With an unlimited plan, you’ll also get immediate access to all course content, you can still access all course content after you’ve finished the class, and you can use the FutureLearn app so you can learn on the go.

FutureLearn’s Unlimited Access plans are available on a monthly or annual basis. The month-to-month plan will set you back $39.99 a month, while the annual plan is currently priced at $244.99 a year, working out to $20.42 a month.

FutureLearn for Business

This fantastic platform has an outlet for business needs as well.

Regardless of the size of the team, number of team members, or the business needs, FutureLearn has something.

FutureLearn works within the business’s budget and anticipated goals to create a high-quality training course specifically for that company. FutureLearn for Business is a great way to cultivate a learning culture, embrace new skills, and close/bridge skill gaps among employees.

It’s a great way to induce job excitement and establish common ground among teams.

FutureLearn for Business gives the admin access to track employees’ progress insights a team to establish and create relevant course content and courses that are broken into achievable steps that employees can fit into their days.

FutureLearn for business is best suited for companies who want to support and encourage a learning culture. It’s a great way to bridge gaps between teams and connect employees with each other. FutureLearn for business is a great choice for any size business.

Click here to learn more.

FutureLearn for Healthcare Providers

FutureLearn offers high-quality medical courses for those in the healthcare field. Courses come from highly regarded universities and colleges and support self-paced enriching learning. These courses can help to expand knowledge and even support education for the public to improve health.

Click here to learn more.

FutureLearn Cost FAQ

Are courses on FutureLearn really free?

Yes and no. Yes, you can take nearly any course free on FutureLearn. However, if you want the digital certificate and accreditation, then paying for the course is necessary. On the other hand, the free version is great for hobbyists or even to explore the platform.

What are the most popular courses on FutureLearn?

1. Data Analytics Using Python
2. Data Analytics For Business
3. Advanced Cyber Security Training
4. Software Development Fundamentals
5. Introduction To Psychology

What is FutureLearn Expert Track?

FutureLearn Expert Track is a great way to accelerate career development. It aims to help you master skills in a specific area. The Expert Track is a collection of in-depth courses, practical knowledge, and more. The length of time Expert Tracks takes to complete vary significantly between each.

What kind of courses can you enjoy on FutureLearn?

FutureLearn is a massive online learning platform. You can find all kinds of courses. There are short courses, programs, Expert Tracks, Microcredentials, and more. Whatever your learning goals are, FutureLearn is the platform to check out.

FutureLearn Pricing Compared to Other Online Learning Sites

You might be wondering how FutureLearn’s pricing compares to other popular course website.

Let’s take a look:

• Coursera—$59 a month or $399 a year for a Coursera Plus subscription
• LinkedIn Learning —$39.99 for month-to-month or $240 for an annual membership
• Udemy—Individual courses sell anywhere from $19.99 to $199 each
• Skillshare—$29 a month or about $165 annually
• Udacity—$249 a year

All in all, FutureLearn’s pricing is about on par with the other comparable online learning sites.

Is FutureLearn Worth the Cost?

FutureLearn is easy to use and perfect for all levels of learners. I personally think FutureLearn is worth it, and there are lots of different plans available to fit your budget (including free options).

FutureLearn has so many great courses with raving reviews. It’s great for hobbyists, entrepreneurs, students, and more.

Wondering how FutureLearn pricing compares to other online learning sites? Check out these guides:

• Brilliant.org pricing guide
• Coursera pricing guide
• CreativeLive pricing guide
• Domestika pricing guide
• Edureka pricing guide
• edX pricing guide
• LinkedIn Learning pricing guide
• Masterclass pricing guide
• Mindvalley pricing guide
• Nas Academy pricing guide
• Pluralsight pricing guide
• Skillshare pricing guide
• Udacity pricing guide
• Udemy pricing guide

Have any questions about FutureLearn pricing and plans? Leave us a comment below.

The post FutureLearn Pricing: Plans, Free Trial Info, More (2024 Guide) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

The reading program provides a personalized, age-appropriate experience, allowing children to choose from various genres and topics, and offers tools to help parents and educators track reading progress and provide targeted recommendations. Overall, Epic provides a fun, engaging, and educational app that can help children develop essential reading and learning skills while fostering a lifelong love for literature.

In the guide below, I’ll take an in-depth look at Epic pricing and plans, going into the features and benefits of each. I’ll also talk about how the price compares to other educational apps I’ve tested, so you can see side-by-side how it stacks up. By the end of this guide, you’ll be able to decide if the app is worth the cost.

How much does Epic cost in 2024?

Great Reading App for Kids

Epic

Want your kids to fall in love with reading? Epic includes a huge library of 40,000+ books and helps kids progress in their reading, making it fun and exciting.

Try It Free!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

An Epic subscription costs either $11.99 if you pay month-to-month or $79.99 for an annual plan paid upfront, which works out to $6.67 a month.

Regardless of which Epic unlimited plan you pick, you’ll get unlimited access to their complete library of 40,000+ books, audiobooks, and learning videos.

The price of Epic children’s books is one of its most attractive features. The platform offers a range of pricing options, including a free trial period, making it accessible to families and educators on a budget.

Personally, I’d opt for the annual plan since the savings are so significant and the content library is so big that I’ve found there’s plenty on the app to keep kids busy for a year or longer.

Another thing I like is that the platform offers bulk pricing options for schools and libraries, making it affordable for institutions looking to provide access to a wide range of reading materials for their students. I know of a lot of teachers who use Epic in their classrooms and have gotten good results with it.

Finally, despite the affordable price, Epic children’s books don’t compromise on quality, providing users with a vast selection of high-quality books, audiobooks, and learning videos to help children develop vital literacy and learning skills.

Overall, the pricing of Epic children’s books is an excellent value for the wealth of content and features it provides.

Key Features of Epic

• A digital library of over 40,000 books, audiobooks, and learning videos for children aged 12 and under.
• A personalized reading experience, allowing children to choose books based on their interests and reading level.
• Tools for parents and educators to track reading progress, customize reading lists, and provide targeted recommendations.
• A vast selection of high-quality books, including popular and award-winning titles.
• Resources for educators, such as lesson plans and quizzes, to support classroom instruction.
• A wide range of pricing options, including a free trial period and bulk pricing for schools and libraries.
• Accessible from all devices with an internet connection, making it convenient and flexible for families and educators.
• Multiple genres and topics to choose from, including fiction, non-fiction, STEM, and more.
• Audio support for emerging readers and those with reading difficulties.
• Engaging videos and interactive features enhance the reading experience.

Who is Epic best suited for?

Epic children’s books are best suited for children aged 12 and under and parents and educators who want to support their literacy and learning development. The platform offers various books, audiobooks, and learning videos across multiple genres and topics, making it an excellent resource for children of all interests and reading levels.

Another cool thing I found is that the personalized reading experience allows children to choose books based on their interests and reading level, keeping them engaged and motivated to read.

Parents and educators can also use Epic children’s books to track reading progress, customize reading lists, and provide targeted recommendations, making it a valuable tool for supporting academic success. Furthermore, the platform includes resources for educators, such as lesson plans and quizzes, making it an excellent option for classroom instruction.

All in all, Epic children’s books are an ideal resource for parents and educators who want to promote literacy and support children’s learning and development in a fun and engaging way.

Epic Pricing Q&A

Does Epic offer a free trial?

Yes, you can try Epic Unlimited free for 7 days to test out everything the platform has to offer at no cost!

How much does Epic cost per month?

Epic Unlimited costs $11.99/monthly or $79.99 billed annually.

Can any books be read offline?

Yes, with an Epic Unlimited membership, books can be downloaded. However, it’s critical to note that not all books can be downloaded, but most can be.

How does Epic pricing compare to its competitors?

Here are some competitors of Epic children’s books, along with their price ranges:

• ABCmouse pricing – $12.99/month
• Homer pricing – $12.99/mo or $79.99 annual plan
• Noggin pricing — $7.99/mo or $69.99/year
• Reading Eggs pricing – $9.99/mo or $69.99/year

As someone who’s tested dozens of learning apps, I found that the cost of Epic is basically on par with most other popular kids educational apps.

Is Epic worth it?

Whether Epic children’s books are worth the price depends on individual circumstances and needs.

For families and educators who prioritize literacy and learning, the platform offers a vast collection of books, audiobooks, and learning videos for children aged 12 and under. The personalized reading experience allows children to choose books based on their interests and reading level, keeping them engaged and motivated to read. It’s a fantastic tool to help kids build reading skills.

Parents and educators can also use Epic children’s books to track reading progress, customize reading lists, and provide targeted recommendations, making it a valuable tool for supporting academic success. Additionally, the platform includes resources for educators, such as lesson plans and quizzes, making it an excellent option for classroom instruction.

The pricing for Epic children’s books varies depending on the subscription level, with options for families and educators. The monthly fee for a family subscription is $7.99 per month, and the annual fee is $79.99 per year. The monthly fee for an educator subscription is $5.99 per month, and the annual fee is $59.99 per year.

Given the vast collection of books and features the platform offers, many families and educators find the price reasonable and a good value for the money.

However, the price may not be worth it for those who may not use the platform frequently or have access to other resources for children’s reading and learning. Ultimately, whether Epic children’s books are worth the price depends on individual circumstances and needs.

Click here to try Epic today!

Have any questions about Epic pricing, plans, or features? Let me know by commenting below.

Related Posts You Might Find Helpful

• Top Educational Game Apps
• Preschool Learning Apps Guide
• The Best Coding Apps for Kids
• Fun Reading Games for Kids
• The Best Math Apps for Kids
• The Best Learning Apps for Toddlers

The post Epic Pricing: Plans, Free Trial Info, & More (2024 Guide) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

So, is Udemy a good site for taking online courses? How does it compare to other learning sites? What do I like about Udemy? What could be better? And most importantly, is Udemy worth it?

I’ve taken a number of courses on the platform over the years, and in the Udemy review below, I’ll answer all of these questions and more, so you can make an informed decision about if this is the right online learning site for your needs.

This review has been fully updated for 2024 to provide you with all the latest details on this popular online learning platform.

What is Udemy?

Udemy

With over 210,000 online video courses available, you can learn just about anything on Udemy. Transform your life by gaining new skills and knowledge from the comfort of your home.

Learn More

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Udemy is an online learning platform that provides access to thousands upon thousands of web-based courses in just about every subject imaginable.

Whether you’re looking to learn something to advance your career and make more money or just want to pick up a new hobby, Udemy is entirely about gaining skills that anyone can implement in their daily life and make it better.

The website currently has over 213,000 courses (way more than most other online learning platforms), with around 67 million students enrolled in these courses!

With so many courses, the big selling point of Udemy is that you can learn practically anything for your own personal and professional development.

A brief history of Udemy — the company was founded in 2010, focusing on the idea of bringing as many instructors as they can and teaching as many students as they could by constantly growing their catalog of online courses taught by experts in their fields.

Who Teaches on Udemy?

Can you do something proficiently? Do you have a special skill? Are you passionate about online teaching and learning and want to support and empower millions of students around the globe? You can teach anything all over the world on Udemy! 

Udemy is a website that doesn’t rely on big names or famous professors to sell its courses. This platform has all sorts of course instructors, and by that, I mean that anyone can teach on Udemy, but of course, there’s a certain criterion that needs to be met.

You’ll find a lot of course instructors come from top organizations around the world and have extensive experience and credentials in their respective fields.

I really like how diverse the selection of Udemy teachers is, but with such a vast array of instructors, I’ve found there are inevitably a few who don’t quite meet the high standards expected, which is probably to be expected when you have over 75,000 teachers.

And of course, Udemy provides the number of enrolled students in a class and an average rating per class, which helps its user choose the course more effectively so you can feel confident that you’re taking a good class from a qualified instructor.

Adding on to it, Udemy offers teachers something called a Course Quality Checklist, which enables teachers to make sure that their classes are well-delivered and professional before releasing them.

What Can You Learn on Udemy?

A better question would be: what can you not learn on Udemy?

Udemy is a huge platform with 213,000+ courses that nearly 70,000 teachers teach, and their video lectures account for around 115 million minutes!

Those are some huge numbers! And don’t think that with quantity, the quality decreases. I just talked about the high-end instructors on Udemy.

You can learn anything on Udemy — from professional skills to hobbies.

Now, talking about the different types of courses on Udemy, there are a total of 12 umbrella categories which include the following:

• Teaching & Academics
• Finance & Accounting
• Business
• Marketing
• Office Productivity
• IT & Software 
• Development
• Personal Development
• Design
• Photography & Videography
• Lifestyle
• Health & Fitness

These umbrella categories further have sub-categories, and more sub-sub-categories such as “Horsemanship” come under “Pet Care & Training,” which comes under “Lifestyle.” 

Simply put, you can learn just about anything you want, including web design, photography, digital marketing, data science, acting, videography, digital art, UI/UX design, music, database administration, illustration, fine art, finance, creative writing, data entry, Microsoft Excel, entrepreneurship, 3D modeling, freelancing, and more.

So now you have an idea of how vast the categories are and how much there is to learn for personal and professional development on Udemy.

There is so much to explore that you wish you could enroll in hundreds of Udemy’s courses! But then it comes to the cost of each course. Let’s walk you down through the pricing structure as well.

How Much Does Udemy Cost?

Udemy stands out from many of its competitors because, for the most part, its courses are sold on an individual basis rather than under a subscription, all-access plan.

Udemy’s pricing of the courses varies depending on the length and content of the course. For example, a course on basic HTML coding may be priced at $19, while a course on advanced web development may be priced at $149.

Udemy also offers discounts on certain paid courses from time to time. For instance, a regularly priced course at $99 may be offered at a discounted price of $69 during a sale. Thus, Udemy’s pricing structure is based on the length and content of the course and the instructor’s expertise.

It’s also worth pointing out that Udemy does offer some free courses on its platform. While most courses do cost money,

Having said that, Udemy has recently started to experiment with offering a monthly subscription option. The new Udemy Personal Plan offering is “a general subscription with access to thousands of courses in hundreds of course topics”.

However, this isn’t a plan that gives you access to everything Udemy offers. It’s a select number of courses (currently 11,000+, a little more than 5% of their entire catalog) you’ll be able to access at a monthly cost starting at $16.58 a month as of January 2024.

You can try the Personal Plan subscription free for 7 days.

How Does Udemy Pricing Compare to Other Platforms?

For anyone looking to learn new skills or improve on their current abilities, Udemy is the perfect place to do so. With an expansive catalog of courses available in various disciplines, Udemy offers something for everyone.

But how does its cost compare to other popular online learning platforms like LinkedIn Learning, Coursera, and Skillshare? Let’s take a look.

Here are the prices of some competing platforms:

• LinkedIn Learning pricing — $29.99 for month-to-month or $240 for an annual membership
• Masterclass pricing — $180-$276 a year, no monthly plans available
• Coursera pricing — $59 a month or $399 a year for a Coursera Plus subscription
• Skillshare pricing — $167.88 per year, which works out to $13.99/month averaged out.

While the Udemy Personal Plan is about on par with these other services, it’s important to remember that it doesn’t include every single class on the platform so you may have to factor in the cost to purchase courses individually as needed.

How Does Udemy Work?

So, you’ve heard all about what Udemy is, who teaches, how much it costs, and more, but how does the platform that teaches hundreds of thousands of students every day actually work?

Udemy, as we’ve learned, was designed to be “the academy of you” where teachers and students from all over the globe come to teach and learn numerous subjects. Udemy helps students learn on the go, and teachers to teach what they are passionate about.

Udemy enables the user to access the material all at their own pace, whether it be in bed, during the break between work, or when free or during a specific study time, the students don’t have to worry about being late to class or being marked absent because there is no such concept.

Each course is divided into a module, and each module may contain a series of videos and quizzes.

Students can watch the video lessons as many times they want in case they zoned out or have any other issues. They can also take the quizzes as many times as needed to master the material.

How to Sign Up for Udemy

Signing up for Udemy is pretty easy and straightforward, along the lines of what you’d expect when creating an account on any app or platform. 

First, go to the Udemy website and click on the “Sign Up” button. Follow the instructions, and once you have an account. 

You can browse the library or search for your desired courses and select the course you want to take. It’s worth pointing out there’s also a Udemy app for Apple and Android devices, so you can browse courses on your mobile devices if you prefer.

When selecting courses, you would want to check different courses and see the ratings for each one. Check it thoroughly and once you are satisfied with your decision, click on “enrol” or “sign up.”

You will then be guided to provide your payment information, and once you’re done with the payment, ta-da! You have successfully enrolled in a course. It’s just like online shopping! Why wait when you can have hundreds of courses on your computer screen!

How to Take Udemy Courses

Udemy courses are a great way to learn and enhance your skills, and if you teach, it is an amazing platform for everyone to learn what you teach. To take a course on Udemy, go to the website and create an account by clicking on the signup or create an account.

Then browse through different courses or search for them. Once you find the course, click on “Enroll now” (just like “buy now” in online shopping), and once you confirm the payment, you can start watching the videos on the go!

Udemy course features include:

Video Lectures, Audio Lectures, Text Lectures

One of the great things about Udemy is that they offer a variety of ways to learn, including video lectures, audio lectures, and text lectures. This means choosing the learning method that best suits your needs and preferences.

Video lectures are great for visual learners, while audio lectures are perfect for those who prefer to listen and learn. And if you like to learn at your own pace, then text lectures are ideal. Regardless of your learning style, Udemy has a course format that will work for you.

Tests, Quizzes, & Subtitles

The features that Udemy offers make it a good tool for online learning. Adding tests and quizzes to courses is one of the most useful features. This allows instructors to gauge student understanding and ensure that content is properly absorbed.

Furthermore, Udemy courses can also include subtitles, making them accessible to a wider range of learners. Finally, the platform offers a money-back guarantee, so students can enroll with confidence, knowing that they can get their investment back if they’re not satisfied. 

With so many great features, it’s no wonder Udemy is one of the leading online learning platforms.

Certificates of Completion

Udemy Certificates of Completion are a great way to show your accomplishments and prove your expertise to employers. The course features a certificate for each course you complete, downloadable and printable.

You can also share your certificate on social media or add it to your resume. Certificates look great on resumes and LinkedIn profiles and can help you stand out from the competition when applying for jobs.

They’re also a great way to show potential employers that you’re constantly learning new skills and keeping up with the latest trends. Whether you’re taking Udemy courses to improve your job prospects or learn something new, certificates of completion can be a valuable addition to your portfolio.

Udemy Features Explained

Ease of Use

The best part of Udemy is its ease of use. The platform is designed for busy people who want to learn new skills without investing a lot of time or money.

With Udemy, you can take courses at your own pace and schedule. You can also access course material from anywhere, making it easy to fit learning into your busy life.

In addition, Udemy offers a variety of course formats, so you can choose the one that best fits your learning style. Whether you prefer video lectures, audio lessons, or written instructions, Udemy has a course format that will work for you.

Customer Support

Udemy is one of the most popular online learning platforms available today. With over 213,000 courses on various topics, Udemy offers something for everyone. One of the best things about Udemy is its customer support.

If you have any questions or problems with a course, you can always reach out to the customer support team for help. The team is quick to respond and is always willing to help resolve any issues you may be having. In addition, Udemy offers a money-back guarantee if you’re not satisfied with a course.

Value for Money!

Do you know? Udemy is a leading provider of MOOCs and the world’s largest provider of IT certifications. One of the best things about Udemy is its value for money.

For example, a course on web development that would normally cost $200 can be found on Udemy for just $10. That’s a savings of 95%! In addition, many courses come with lifetime access and can be taken at your own pace.

This makes Udemy an excellent option for learning new skills or brushing up on existing ones. So if you’re looking for an affordable, convenient way to learn, Udemy is worth checking out.

Udemy FAQs

What is Udemy?

Udemy is an online learning platform with over 130,000 courses and 40 million students. It offers a wide variety of courses, ranging from business and technology to health and fitness. Additionally, the courses are very affordable, starting at just $10.

Is Udemy a legit and accredited platform?

Udemy is a legit online learning platform, but it’s not considered an accredited institution like a university. It has been around for over 10 years and has served millions of students. It also has a wide variety of courses, which makes it perfect for finding the right one for you. However, I would not recommend it if you are looking for a more traditional college education experience.

Are Udemy certificates useful?

Udemy certificates are highly respected and recognized by employers all over the world, making them a valuable tool for career advancement. A Udemy certificate of completion is a great way to show that you have taken a course and mastered its content. Plus, they are affordable and can be completed in as little as a few weeks.

When do Udemy courses go on sale?

While most Udemy courses are available at their full price most of the time, the site does offer sales from time to time. You can also sign up for Udemy’s email list to receive notifications about upcoming sales and promotions. These sales typically offer discounts of anywhere from 10% to 50% off the regular price, and they usually last for a few days.

Is Udemy Worth It?

As someone who’s tested literally dozens of different course platforms, I can tell you firsthand that there are many different options to choose from when it comes to online learning. Udemy is one of the most popular platforms out there. And in my opinion, it’s for a good reason – Udemy offers a wide range of courses, covering everything from business to cooking to history. 

Udemy, in my opinion, is one of the best places to learn just about anything.

The courses on Udemy are high quality and provide a great way to learn new skills. In addition, the platform is easy to use and provides a lot of value for the price.

If you’re looking for an online learning platform, Udemy is definitely worth considering.

Get Started with Udemy

Ready to start learning something new? Click here to try Udemy now.

Have any questions about this Udemy review? Leave a comment below and let us know.

The post Udemy Review (2024): How Does This Online Learning Platform Compare? appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

In this Noggin review, I’ll walk you through everything the popular app has to offer, providing my professional insights as a longtime teacher who’s worked with kids in their target age range. I’ll also explore some of the app’s pros and cons so that you can get an idea of what Noggin is all about.

Read on to learn more about Noggin and find out if it’s an option your child might enjoy!

What is Noggin?

Noggin – Interactive learning with the trusted characters your kids love.

With over 1,000 educational games, videos, and activities developed by experts, Noggin offers a fun, interactive, and highly effective learning experience for kids ages 2 to 7.

Start Your Free Trial!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Noggin is a subscription-based learning app aimed at helping preschool-age kids discover the world around them.

The program is designed to teach learners from ages 2-7 about everything from being a good listener to learning to read, write, and count.

Subscribers can access the Noggin app across a variety of platforms, including iOS, Android, Amazon Kindle, and most smart TV devices.

Wi-Fi or mobile data will also connect you to the Noggin app, making it easy to access whenever your child wants to play.

The app includes games, shows, and books featuring well-known characters from the Nick Jr. library.

From Dora the Explorer to PAW Patrol, Noggin’s cast of friendly faces is one of the biggest reasons kids connect with the learning material they offer.

The educational content available on Noggin is designed by experts to enhance your child’s understanding of reading, math, science, and art.

Noggin also emphasizes socioemotional health and well-being, with activities geared towards being an empathetic friend, a thoughtful student, or a kind sibling.

Once logged in, kids can choose to play interactive games, watch ad-free shows, or read one of the hundreds of books encompassing the Noggin library for early readers.

Essentially, Noggin aims to let kids have fun while enhancing important academic and social skills.

Now that I’ve outlined what exactly Noggin is, let’s take a closer look at some of the pros and cons the app presents.

Read on to find out what I love about Noggin and what I might advise you to think twice about before using.

Noggin Pros & Cons

Pros

Noggin is Kid-Friendly

The most obvious perk of using Noggin?  Kids love it!

The app is based on characters that your preschooler most likely already knows.  This creates automatic “buy-in,” or motivation, for playing the games or reading the books that Noggin offers.

Kids will also enjoy being able to watch their favorite shows in tandem with the games and stories they’re learning about.

Noggin does a great job keeping kids entertained while making sure they’re learning, too.

After all, a learning app only works if kids are actually invested and paying attention to the content.

Noggin Has High-Quality Content

The quality of Noggin’s content is another big perk.

I love that the educational content is curated by experts in early childhood development. It’s clear that the activities on the app are focused on developing your child’s ability to think and connect.

The emphasis on socioemotional learning is another pro that I noticed with Noggin.

Plenty of learning apps focus on the key building blocks of literacy and math, but this one also touches on the importance of caring for ourselves and others in the community which is something that many other apps I’ve looked at seem to be lacking.

This helps your little one develop their self-confidence and ability to empathize, along with knowing how to count and say the ABCs.

Noggin is Easy to Access and Use

Using Noggin is easy for both adults and kids.  You can download the app via iOS or Android, or log in using Wi-Fi or phone data.

Parents can also access Noggin from their televisions, whether you’re using a FireStick, Roku, or Apple TV.

Noggin is available on Amazon Prime or on your Kindle, too.

Noggin’s high accessibility makes it easier for you to adapt into your little one’s routine.

You can integrate Noggin however works best for your family, whether your child is watching a show on the TV, reading a book on a Kindle or iPad, or playing a game on the go with your phone.

I’ve found that the materials on the app itself are very user-friendly, with clear directions and simple features that most children have no trouble navigating.

Noggin even includes some fun two-player games, so that you and your child can bond while playing together.

Noggin is Ad-Free

One of the biggest dilemmas with letting children play online is the thought of unwanted popups clouding their experience.

Many children’s sites and apps rely on these irritating advertisements for revenue.

At best, these ads are just annoying distractions.  At worst, they can present inappropriate content that you never intended your child to see.

Noggin is 100% ad-free, so you can eliminate this worry when your child is using the app. As an educator, this is a huge perk that makes it stand out from many other apps I’ve seen.

Even the shows available to stream are commercial free, so you know exactly what your child is viewing.

Noggin Provides Customer Support

Noggin’s app comes with customer support available 7 days a week, so it’s fairly easy to troubleshoot any issues you might have with the app.

It’s also regularly updated, so glitches should be few and far between.

Plus, there’s an active Noggin blog with resources from the experts and helpful entries on a number of different topics.

This active community and readily available support are another element that sets Noggin above many of the less comprehensive educational apps on the market.

Cons

Noggin Is Not Free

Though Noggin does offer users a month-long free trial (an excellent way to see if it’s a good fit for your kiddo), the app does require a paid subscription to continue using it after the trial expires. It’s also worth pointing out that at certain times of the year (like during the holiday season), the Noggin free trial is extended to 60 days.

Granted, this is why Noggin can remain ad-free: because subscribers pay for quality content.

Noggin pricing is actually very reasonable at only $7.99 a month, a fee that provides you with access to the app’s vast library of educational videos, TV episodes, reading books, and learning games.

But even though it’s clearly a lot of bang for your buck, some families on a budget might prefer to seek out free learning opportunities instead.

Noggin Focuses Less on Progress Tracking

Many learning apps available (even ones for preschoolers) include a parent dashboard that assembles data on your child’s progress.

This type of approach can help parents get a quick read on their child’s skill level and improvement.

Noggin does not offer data on your child’s academic progress, which is something I feel is sorely lacking.  Instead, the app focuses more on educational entertainment.

This isn’t necessarily a bad thing; it only means that Noggin is not the app to use if you’re seriously focused on remediation for your child.

Instead, Noggin focuses on activities that will help enhance your child’s skills, rather than teach them from the ground up.

Noggin’s Age Range is Limited

Noggin is designed for learners ages 2-7.  If your kids are older or younger, they may not be able to get much out of this app.

The shows, games, and stories on Noggin are specifically created with a preschool and early-elementary school audience in mind.

This means the content will be perfectly appropriate for these young learners… but it might leave your older kids a bit underwhelmed.

Again, this isn’t really a con, but rather something to consider before you subscribe.

Final Thoughts

Noggin is one of the most popular apps available for young learners, and after testing it out, it’s easy to see why.

The app features games, shows, and books all specially created to help your child develop their understanding of math, reading, and social sciences.

Plus, Noggin includes a variety of socioemotional lessons to nurture your young child’s character and sense of self.

And since Noggin features characters from popular shows like Dora, Blue’s Clues, and PAW Patrol, your child is likely to enjoy all of these activities all the more.

The app is extremely easy to use and access from any device, and it comes with built-in customer support and resources.

While Noggin isn’t designed to provide intense academic remediation, the content on the app is curated by educational experts to guarantee that it’s age-appropriate.

Plus, everything on Noggin is guaranteed to be ad-free, which is an important factor to consider when you have young children going online.

Of course, Noggin does require a paid subscription, so be prepared to shell out $7.99/a month to receive access to the thousands of episodes, stories, and games the app provides.

Keep in mind that Noggin is also meant for kids ages 2-7, so you might not get much out of it if your child is older or younger than the target range.

For those preschool and early elementary kids, though, I fully believe Noggin is an easy way to make learning fun and keep kids motivated to practice new skills.

Any app that has kids clamoring to learn more is well worth the price, in my opinion.  And by investing in your little one’s educational experience now, you’re setting them up for a lifelong love of learning.

That’s definitely using your noggin.

Click here to try Noggin free for 30 days to see if it’s the right fit for your family.

Have you used Noggin before?  Do you have any additional pros and cons I might have missed?  Have any questions about this Noggin review? I’d love to hear your comments and questions below!

Related Posts You Might Find Helpful

• Top Educational Game Apps
• The Best Homeschool Apps
• Preschool Learning Apps Guide
• The Best Learning Apps for Toddlers
• The Best Coding Apps for Kids
• Fun Reading Games for Kids
• The Top Reading Programs for Kids

The post Noggin Review: Is This Educational App Worth It? appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Noggin is more than simply learning videos for children. Instead, it’s a huge library of highly engaging videos, lessons, games, and eBooks specifically designed for ages 2-7 years old. This combination of content sets it apart from other apps I’ve tested, and it keeps kids entertained while playing with familiar characters and building their skill sets.

As someone who’s explored the app in depth, I’m going to explain all the differences between the Noggin plans, including features and prices for each plan available, in the guide below.

How Much Does Noggin Cost in 2024?

Noggin – Interactive learning with the trusted characters your kids love.

With over 1,000 educational games, videos, and activities developed by experts, Noggin offers a fun, interactive, and highly effective learning experience for kids ages 2 to 7.

Start Your Free Trial!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Noggin offers a subscription-based pricing model that varies depending on the subscription duration. Customers can choose between a monthly or an annual plan, which both give you unlimited access to the platform’s content. The monthly plan is priced at $7.99 per month, while the annual plan costs $69.99 per year, representing a fairly significant discount for customers who commit to a longer-term subscription.

Noggin also offers a 30-day free trial period for new customers, allowing them to explore the platform’s features and content at no cost for an entire month before committing to a subscription.

Additionally, subscribers can access Noggin across multiple devices, including phones, tablets, and smart TVs, making it a convenient and accessible option for families and educators.

Overall, the pricing for Noggin is competitive compared to other educational platforms I’ve reviewed, providing parents and educators with an affordable option to support their children’s learning and development.

Key Features of Noggin

• Encourages learning through play, promoting cognitive development and problem-solving skills.
• Provides a safe and age-appropriate environment for children to learn and explore.
• Offers personalized recommendations based on each child’s interests and learning preferences.
• Enhances creativity and imagination through interactive games and eBooks.
• Helps children develop social skills through positive and collaborative interactions.
• Promotes healthy screen time habits by offering educational content that is engaging and fun.
• Provides a wide range of educational content, including literacy, STEM, and social-emotional learning.
• Supports language development through interactive videos and books.
• Offers a convenient and accessible platform for parents and educators to support their children’s learning and development.
• It can help children prepare for school readiness by promoting foundational skills and knowledge in various subject areas.

Who Is Noggin Best Suited For?

Noggin best suits parents, caregivers, and educators looking to provide young children with an educational and interactive digital experience. The platform is ideal for children between the ages of 2 and 7 who are eager to learn and explore through play.

It offers a variety of content that promotes cognitive, social, and emotional development, providing a fun, safe, age-appropriate environment for children to engage in educational activities.

Additionally, Noggin’s personalized recommendations and flexible subscription plans make it a solid choice for families and educators looking to support their children’s learning and development.

Noggin Pricing Q&A

Does Noggin offer a free trial?

Yes, Noggin offers a 30-day free trial for new customers who want to try the platform before committing to a subscription. The free trial period provides users unlimited access to Noggin’s extensive library of educational content. During the trial period, users can explore interactive games, videos, and eBooks designed to promote learning through play.

In addition, the free trial allows customers to experience the platform’s features and benefits before deciding whether to subscribe, making it a great way to evaluate if Noggin is the right educational tool for their children. If customers choose to continue using Noggin after the trial period, they can subscribe to one of the platform’s affordable plans, either monthly or annually, to continue accessing the service.

What about Noggin is so fantastic for children?

Noggin is engaging for kids for several reasons.

First, the platform provides various interactive and educational games, videos, and eBooks designed to be fun and engaging for children. These activities cover a range of subject areas, including literacy, STEM, and social-emotional learning, providing children with a diverse and engaging learning experience.

Second, Noggin’s content is designed with young children in mind, focusing on age-appropriate themes, characters, and activities. This helps children to relate to the content and stay engaged throughout their learning journey.

Third, Noggin’s personalized recommendations and adaptive learning technology provide children with content tailored to their interests and learning preferences. This helps to keep children engaged and motivated as they progress through the platform’s educational activities.

Finally, Noggin’s safe and secure environment gives parents peace of mind while their children are engaged in educational activities. The platform provides a kid-friendly interface, free from advertisements or inappropriate content, ensuring children can explore and learn in a safe and supportive environment.

Will my child recognize any of the characters on Noggin?

If your child knows mainstream characters, then yes. Noggin uses Nickelodeon characters to whisk children away to a world of learning. They will solve problems with the Paw Patrol, explore with Blaze and the Monster Machines, play with Shimmer and Shine, and so much more.

How do I cancel my Noggin subscription?

To cancel your Noggin subscription, follow these steps:

1. Open a web browser and click to go to the Noggin website.
2. Sign in to your Noggin account.
3. Click on your profile picture or icon in the top right corner of the screen.
4. Select “Account” from the drop-down menu.
5. Scroll to the “Membership” section and click “Cancel Membership.”
6. Follow the prompts to confirm your cancellation.
7. Once you have confirmed the cancellation, you will receive a confirmation email from Noggin.

Please note that if you cancel your Noggin subscription before your current billing cycle ends, you will still have access to the service until the end of the cycle. After that, your subscription will be canceled, and you will no longer be charged.

Noggin Pricing Compared To Other Kids’ Learning Sites

You might wonder how a Noggin subscription stacks up compared to other websites like ABC Mouse and National Geographic for Kids.

Let’s take a look:

• ABCmouse pricing – $12.99/month
• Homer pricing – $12.99/mo or $79.99 annual plan
• Reading Eggs pricing – $9.99/mo or $69.99/year
• Starfall pricing – $35/year

With Noggin costing only $7.99 per month and offering substantial discounted savings for an annual membership, it’s one of the more affordable premium educational apps that I’ve come across.

Is Noggin Worth It?

The biggest question is always – Well, is it worth it? And when it comes to Noggin, I certainly think so.

It’s entertaining and engaging and makes learning an absolute blast for children as they learn foundational skills in math, reading, and other key subjects. Children can choose from videos, stories, and games and learn essential skills like working together, problem-solving, and more.

And – remember, Noggin offers a one-month free trial to explore the lay of the land before making any commitments. I definitely recommend taking advantage of that and seeing how your kid responds to the app before you shell out for a paid subscription.

If you still want more info before you give it a try, check out our complete Noggin review for an in-depth breakdown of everything the platform offers.

Start your 30-day free trial today!

The post Noggin Pricing: Plans, Free Trial Info, More (2024) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

With technology becoming an integral part of education, it’s crucial to find ways to use screens wisely, ensuring they enhance rather than hinder the learning process. From setting clear boundaries to choosing quality educational content, I’ll explore how to make screen time a valuable component of your child’s educational journey.

Choose The Right Apps

Noggin – Interactive learning with the trusted characters your kids love.

With over 1,000 educational games, videos, and activities developed by experts, Noggin offers a fun, interactive, and highly effective learning experience for kids ages 2 to 7.

Start Your Free Trial!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Not all screen time is created equal, and not all apps and games offer educational value. To make the most of screen time, you’ll want to carefully curate the apps and games your children use. Look for apps that combine entertainment with learning, such as Noggin.

Noggin (review) offers a wide variety of interactive games, videos, and eBooks that feature beloved characters from popular Nickelodeon shows. These engaging activities stimulate a child’s cognitive and social development, making learning enjoyable. The app includes games, shows, and books featuring well-known characters from the Nick Jr. library.

Using high-quality educational apps and games is the right way for parents to ensure that screen time is fun and beneficial for their child’s growth and development.

You should also consider your child’s age and developmental stage when choosing apps. Age-appropriate content ensures that your child can engage with the material effectively and stay motivated.

Additionally, I highly recommend regularly reviewing and updating the apps on your child’s device to keep the learning experience fresh and exciting.

By making thoughtful choices about educational apps and games, parents can provide their children with valuable opportunities for growth while enjoying their screen time. You can kill two birds with one stone by giving your children the knowledge they need and promoting responsible screen use.

Establish Screen Time Limits

Setting screen time limits is important for managing your child’s digital activities. These limits should be both clear and reasonable, taking into account your child’s age, school schedule, and other responsibilities.

Collaborate with your child to create a screen schedule that allocates time for educational use, such as homework or learning apps (like Noggin), as well as recreational activities.

Breaks between screen sessions are essential to prevent prolonged exposure to screens. Encourage your child to engage in physical activities, read books, or pursue creative hobbies during these breaks. Always encourage and promote a healthy balance between screen time and other essential aspects of life.

Reward-based systems can also be effective in teaching responsible screen use. Offer additional screen time as a reward for completing chores or homework or for exhibiting good behavior. This approach helps children understand that screen time is a privilege to be earned through responsible actions, reinforcing the concept of balance and responsibility.

Become A Role Model

Children often learn by watching those around them, particularly their parents. If you’re constantly glued to your device, they’ll want to do the same.

When you demonstrate balanced and responsible screen time habits, you provide a tangible example for your child to follow. Your consistent adherence to screen time boundaries and responsible online behavior sends a clear message about the importance of mindful technology use.

Your role modeling can help instill healthy screen time habits in your child from a young age. By setting limits on your screen use, particularly during family meals and quality time, you teach your child the significance of real-world interactions and the value of being present in the moment. This establishes the foundation for them to develop balanced technology habits that prioritize both online and offline experiences.

Teaching responsible screen time through role modeling equips your child with a valuable life skill. As they grow and navigate an increasingly digital world, the lessons they learn from your example will guide them in making the right call concerning technology use. You should always be helping your children develop a strong foundation for a healthy and balanced relationship with technology throughout their lives.

Co-Viewing & Supervision

I’ve found that co-viewing and discussing screen content with your child can greatly enhance the learning experience. I recommend that you sit down with your child and watch educational programs or play educational games together. While doing so, encourage active participation by asking questions, fostering discussions, and providing context to deepen your child’s understanding.

Co-viewing allows parents to monitor the quality of content and provides an opportunity to address any questions or concerns that may arise during screen time. It fosters a sense of shared learning and exploration, strengthening the parent-child bond. Additionally, by engaging in co-viewing, parents can identify any areas of interest or passion that their child may have, allowing them to tailor future screen time experiences to align with these interests.

The discussion after co-viewing can be just as valuable as the viewing experience itself. Encourage your child to reflect on what they’ve learned, share their thoughts, and ask questions. This post-screen time dialogue not only reinforces learning but also encourages critical thinking and curiosity.

When To Avoid Screens

As an educator, I always advise against screen time before bed to promote healthy sleep habits in children. The blue light from screens can interfere with the body’s melatonin production, a key hormone in regulating sleep. Allowing kids to use screens too close to bedtime can disrupt their ability to fall and stay asleep, impacting their overall well-being and ability to focus in class.

Encourage your child to unwind during the day with calming activities like reading a book. The absence of screens during this time helps signal to the body that it’s time to prepare for sleep.

Quality sleep is essential for a child’s physical and cognitive development, as it supports memory consolidation and emotional regulation. By avoiding screen time in the hour leading up to bedtime, parents can contribute to their children’s overall well-being and ensure they wake up refreshed and ready to learn.

Manage Expectations

Managing expectations for technology is essential for both parents and children. It’s vital to recognize that, while technology can be a powerful educational tool, it is not a replacement for hands-on learning experiences and real-world interactions. Parents should maintain realistic expectations of what technology can achieve and integrate it into a broader educational strategy.

As a teacher, I believe it’s important that technology serves as a supplement, not a substitute, for traditional learning methods. I encourage parents to foster a balanced approach that includes both digital and offline activities. This balance is key to ensuring children receive a holistic education, developing critical skills like problem-solving, social interaction, and creativity.

It’s also essential to set reasonable screen time limits and establish rules for proper online conduct. Having open conversations with children about their technology use is crucial. Discussing responsible screen usage, the risks of too much screen time, and the importance of online privacy and security can help guide them towards healthy digital habits.

Managing expectations of technology lets parents harness its benefits while avoiding the pitfalls of over-reliance. Technology can be a powerful educational ally when used wisely, fostering curiosity, providing access to a wealth of information, and enhancing learning experiences. However, it’s essential to maintain a balanced perspective and prioritize a holistic approach to education that includes both digital and real-world experiences.

Final Thoughts

We’re all so busy these days that balancing screen time and learning isn’t always an easy task. It takes dedicated effort and thoughtful parenting to navigate this aspect of your child’s life, rather than simply using a device as a quick fix for difficult moments.

These tips are designed to help you establish a healthy approach to screen time for your child. Remember, it’s not about completely cutting out screen use, but rather about using it smartly to complement education and boost cognitive development.

Have any questions about helping balance screen time and learning for your kid? Let me know by leaving a comment below.

The post How to Help Your Kids Balance Screen Time and Learning appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

The good news is online courses offer a flexible and comprehensive way to master Angular, providing step-by-step guidance, practical projects, and the latest best practices, all essential for staying competitive in the rapidly evolving tech landscape. As a longtime teacher, I’ve seen firsthand how online classes have revolutionized the educational landscape, offering unparalleled flexibility and accessibility, and enabling students from diverse backgrounds to engage with learning material at their own pace and convenience.

I’ve reviewed and ranked the best online Angular courses available in 2024 based on a number of key factors, including quality of the curriculum, credentials of the instructor, student reviews, cost, and more (click here to learn about our entire Editorial Process & Methodology for product reviews).

What are the Best Angular Classes Online?

1. Angular – The Complete Guide [2024 Edition] (Udemy)

Angular - The Complete Guide, 2023 Edition (Udemy)

Learn to master Angular (previously known as "Angular 2") and create amazing, responsive web applications with this online course.

Learn More

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Regularly $109.99 but often goes on sale (see our Udemy pricing guide)

Duration

36 hours

This course will give you all the knowledge you’ll need to become proficient in Angular. What I like about it is that it has no required skill level, so even a complete beginner to coding can pick it up and start learning Angular.

Within this engaging course, you’ll start to master Angular, one of the most popular front-end frameworks used by developers all over the globe.

With the help of Maximillian Schwarzmuller, an AWS-certified web developer, you’ll be able to gain a unique insight into Angular that only experience can bring. The course offers updated information and 24/7 support, so if you run into issues, you can contact the instructor and have your problems resolved immediately.

Another good thing is that throughout the course, you’ll get the chance to work on projects to reinforce your understanding. By the end, you’ll be able to develop complex, responsive, and scalable web applications using Angular.

2. Complete Angular Developer in 2024: Zero to Mastery (Udemy)

Complete Angular Developer: Zero to Mastery (Udemy)

Dive into the latest version of Angular and learn how to develop large-scale applications that will make you stand out in this powerful course.

Learn More

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Regularly $89.99 but often goes on sale (see our Udemy review to learn more)

Duration

27 hours

With the help of updated information, this class will efficiently guide you toward becoming a professional Angular developer. Everything in this course is kept up-to-date to ensure that you won’t waste your time learning about outdated practices or unsupported features.

This course covers many important aspects of starting an Angular project; setup, deployment, components, directives, optimization, and so on. All code is provided step-by-step and will be easily accessible, so this is the course to pick if you’re not a fan of code-along tutorials.

You’ll learn how to make enterprise-level applications that utilize proper backend services such as Firebase, master Angular design patterns, craft full-stack projects, and use TailwindCSS in Angular development. It will also teach you how to troubleshoot your applications with the help of debugging tools and solve issues such as memory leaks to enhance performance and efficiency.

It’s important to point out, however, that this course does have an entry-level requirement of knowing HTML, CSS, and JS even if it’s just the basics.

3. Complete Angular Course 2024 – Master Angular (Udemy)

Complete Angular Course 2024- Master Angular in only 6 days (Udemy)

Create dynamic and responsive Angular applications, incorporating NgRx, Unit Testing, and Angular Material for a comprehensive development experience.

Learn More

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Regularly $84.99 but often goes on sale

Duration

9 hours

Want to dive deep into the world of Angular? Then this course is the right pick for you. It will teach you Angular entirely from scratch in a week. It’s the best course for busy developers, as it provides to-the-point information that helps you save time.

Taught by seasoned web developers Denis Panjuta and Jannick Leismann, this course will prepare you for an industry-level front-end developer job.

When you’re done with this course, you’ll be able to make entire front-end applications using Angular and communicate with web servers in real-time to process information. There are plenty of aspects you’ll be able to learn, such as being able to write typescripts, create custom directives and components, handle page navigation, send HTTP requests, learn how dependency injection works, optimize code, etc. You’ll also understand more complex concepts, such as state management, unit testing, REST APIs, reactive extensions, and so on.

4. Single Page Web Applications with AngularJS (Coursera)

Price

Audit class for free (optional paid upgrades available)

Duration

46 hours

Taught by Yaakov Chaikin, a professor at Johns Hopkins University, this course is a beginner-friendly course to Angular. With its flexible schedule, you can learn at your own pace and become an experienced Angular developer. The course provides excellent material with well-prepared and informative lectures, making it one of the best Angular courses you can find online.

This course has 5 primary modules, all of which explore and discuss each aspect of Angular in depth. It also teaches you the fundamentals of web development and has simple projects you can code along with to create your applications.

The course will teach you basic UX, form validation, and testing as well as custom services and directives in its modules.

You’ll also make a restaurant page as a final project in the last module, which will combine all the topics you’ve been taught thus far and take it to the next level.

5. Frontend Development Using Angular (Coursera)

Price

Audit class for free (optional paid upgrades available)

Duration

24 hours

In this course, you’ll master web development from scratch. It will initially teach you basic HTML and CSS to help you craft visually appealing web pages. Once that’s done, you’ll dive into Javascript and then Angular to build robust web applications. With the help of expert guidance, you’ll engage in hands-on projects to help you learn and master Angular quickly. 

By the end of the course, you will have learned how to leverage Angular effectively to create front-end applications and have a good grasp of the basics to use for further exploration of more complex topics.

I found that the structured approach in the course builds your knowledge from the ground up, providing you comfort in learning at your speed and mastering the basics before moving on to the more complex aspects.

6. Angular for Front End Engineers (Coursera)

Price

Audit class for free (optional paid upgrades available)

Duration

8 hours

There are 3 modules in this course, which take you from a quick overview of web development as a whole to a comprehensive Angular application. This course is video-free, all assignments within the course contain short explanations with images.

While the course is aimed at more intermediate learners who already have some knowledge about HTML, CSS, and JS, it still does a good job giving a brief overview new learners can use to master Angular.

By the last module, you’ll have learned to make actionable and interactable Angular components. Additionally, for those of you who prefer a visual learning approach that doesn’t involve watching exhaustive videos, this is the course for you. Using this hands-on approach combined with short quizzes, you’ll quickly master Angular in no time!

7. AngularJS for Beginners: Getting Started (Coursera)

Price

Audit class for free (optional paid upgrades available)

Duration

2 hours

AngularJS for Beginners is a simple beginner-friendly course for those who are interested in learning the basics of AngularJS. With the project-based outline of the course, you’ll learn how you can use Angular in a development environment with a proper workflow and create code for components, directives, and more.

I like that this course has multiple tasks to help you practice your Angular development, including reusable code that you can use for future reference. But to get the most out of this Angular course, you should have some knowledge of HTML, CSS, and JS.

You will learn step by step in a split-screen environment alongside an instructor, and they’ll teach you how to edit and write code that you can use for development. You’ll also learn how to create Angular components and how to use a filter, as well as other basics, in a short amount of time.

Final Thoughts

The online courses detailed above offer a great way to get the hang of Angular, no matter if you’re just starting out or you’ve been in the game for a while. Each one’s got something special, whether it’s in-depth tutorials, hands-on projects, or tips straight from the pros.

Mastering Angular is a smart move for your career as a developer. And these courses are just what you need to build in-demand skills to propel your career forward.

Have any questions about this guide to the best Angular courses online? Share them by leaving a comment below.

The post The 7 Best Angular Courses Online (2024 Guide) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Learning a new language isn’t easy, though, and English is notoriously tricky. If you’re looking for simple ways to brush up your business English, I’ve got you covered. As an educator myself, I’ll cover what I believe are some of the most effective ways you can improve your business English.

Good news — most of these English-learning tips won’t break the bank, or require endless hours of time.

1. Invest in a Quality Class

English Online Course - British Council

Learn English in live one-on-one or group classes with British Council teachers who are true experts. Gain confidence and improve your speaking, pronunciation, and vocabulary.

Learn More

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

I get it — no business professional wants to spend additional time taking a class when your schedule is already full.

That being said, a class specifically centered around business English is one of the fastest and most effective ways to reach your language goals.

Instead of factoring in the additional time and inconvenience of a commute, busy professionals should consider a virtual class like those offered by the British Council English Online courses.

This highly-rated institute offers English Online, for example, which is specifically directed toward professionals and students hoping to master the language.

When you enroll in an English Online course, you’ll be working with an expert teacher who will be able to correct your mistakes before they become habits.

You’ll also have access to a structured curriculum that’s designed to help you learn the English you’ll need for business settings.

Plus, English Online allows you to select the course that best matches your goals, and to choose the timetable that best fits your schedule.

BritishCouncil offers different subscription tiers as well, so you can find the course that works for your budget.

2. Work With a Coach

Another proven way to improve your business English is to find someone to be your coach.

If you know a native speaker (or anyone who is confident with English), don’t be shy about asking them for help!

Set a time when the two of you can converse.  It doesn’t have to be formal – even meeting at a local coffee shop can be an excellent way to get better at speaking.

Ask your coach to correct any little mistakes they notice with your accent or grammar, since most friends and acquaintances might not want to tell you when you’ve made a mistake.

You can also ask them to focus on specific areas where you want to practice: pitching an idea, for example, or correcting an email.

If you don’t have anyone in your circle willing to coach you, don’t be discouraged! There are plenty of virtual coaching options available.

You can even invest in a professional English-language coach through the British Council English Online courses to receive specially-tailored instruction that will help you overcome any problems you’re having with English.

3. Read for Business…and Pleasure

Reading independently is another great way to improve your business English.

Obviously, reading the business section of the news will provide you with area-specific vocabulary and context.

Staying up-to-date on current events in English will also help you feel more comfortable discussing these issues with your coworkers and clients.

You don’t have to only focus on the serious stuff, though.

Reading for pleasure in English is a surefire way to build your understanding of grammar, punctuation, and dialogue.

Even if you’re reading a children’s story or lighthearted magazine article, you’re still exposing yourself to important text structures and vocabulary.

Read something that interests you and enjoy all the new words and phrases you absorb as you go!

4. Go Online in English

Whether you love social media or try to avoid it, using the Internet in English is another low-effort way to get more confident with the language.

Reading tweets, articles, recipes or directions in English can help you feel much more assured when completing business projects and proposals.

You’ll learn abbreviations, conversions, and slang that you might not encounter in a textbook or formal learning setting.

These terms can be just as crucial as business-specific vocabulary when it comes to appealing to a customer base or making natural-sounding conversation.

Plus, posting a comment or two in English is a simple way to get some writing practice in without feeling pressure to make sure everything is academically perfect.

5. Watch Shows and Movies

This is another painless one: give yourself permission to watch an interesting movie or TV series in English.

This is a simple way to train your ear to the cadence and rhythm of English.  You’ll get a window into English humor and drama, too!

If it feels like everyone is speaking too quickly or quietly, you can start by turning on subtitles in your native language.

As your understanding advances, you can switch the subtitles to English, so that you can read as you listen.

This is a proven way to help you learn correct pronunciation, as well as subtle differences in inflection and body language that might be difficult to learn from a book.

As an added bonus, watching a popular show will give you an instant connection to your English-speaking customer base, and maybe even help you crack a joke or two.

6. Jot Down New Phrases

As you’re carrying out these ideas (attending a class, reading a book, watching TV, et cetera), don’t forget to record the new words that jump out at you.

Carry a notebook or start a note on your phone so that you can quickly jot down new phrases that you notice.

Even if you’re not completely sure of their meaning, writing down these new terms will prevent you from forgetting them.

You’ll have an easy-to-access record of vocabulary words to review whenever you have a few spare minutes.

As an added incentive, keeping track of all the new things you’re learning is a great way to build motivation.

You can scroll back or flip through the pages after a while and see how far you’ve come!

7. Have Fun with Self-Paced Apps

Self-paced apps are a fun way to get some extra English practice whenever you have a spare time.

Programs like Babbel and Duolingo provide entertaining, gamified learning paths designed to hold your attention while improving your comprehension and fluency.

You can also explore self-paced learning courses, like the one offered by the British Council.

These options are perfect for squeezing some low-pressure practice throughout your day.

Even better, most of these apps and courses can also connect you to an online network of other English learners.

Finding a community can help you stay motivated and feel encouraged, so don’t hesitate to become an active member.

8. Chat with Your Coworkers

Even if you’re not confident in your speaking abilities, strike up a conversation with your coworkers whenever you have a chance.

Speaking to a wider range of acquaintances is a great way to build confidence and understanding.

You can also communicate via writing with coworkers to improve your writing skills, even if it’s just a quick message to ask how someone’s day is going.

The more people you communicate with in English, the more natural you’ll become at facing new scenarios.

You already have a common thread with your coworkers, too, so you’ll be able to stay on familiar territory as you build your confidence.

9. Set a Routine

Whatever English-learning methods you embrace, one of the key habits to adopt is setting a routine.

Whether it’s reading the news in English every morning, attending a weekly English Online class, or watching an English movie each weekend, make a plan and stick to it.

Even if you’re only able to devote ten or fifteen minutes a day to improving your business English, that time adds up.

A consistent half hour of daily practice adds up to big gains over a year, so don’t be discouraged if you can’t spend huge chunks of time working on your English.

It’s better to stick with an easy routine than to spend hours studying one weekend… only to abandon all practice for weeks at a time afterwards.

10. Don’t Be Afraid to Make Mistakes

This tip might be the simplest – and the hardest!

Speaking a new language can be intimidating, and making mistakes can feel embarrassing.

It’s necessary to leave your comfort zone, though, if you’re going to become a confident English speaker and listener.

Surround yourself with sympathetic friends, coaches, and teachers.  Incorporate English into your reading, Internet browsing, and TV watching habits.  Study, either with a coach or a self-paced app or program.  Set a routine and stick to it.

Most importantly, don’t get discouraged if you face an obstacle or a temporary setback.

Instead, jump back in with renewed energy and keep at it.

Mistakes are an essential part of learning any new language, English included!

I hope these tips can help you unlock your business English potential!  If you have any questions, comments, or additional ideas, I’d love to hear them in the comments below!

The post 10 Tips to Improve Your Business English appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Perhaps most importantly, the IELTS is also used by many English-speaking countries as  a requirement for migrants to prove that they’re proficient in the language as they seek permanent residency. The comprehensive test, which is divided into four parts and takes almost three hours to complete, is clearly a huge step for many international students, professionals, and migrants.

Doing well on the IELTS is a key achievement for those hoping to study, work, and live in English-speaking countries. In this article, I’ll jump into how the test works, then share seven helpful tips for how to get the score you need to unlock your goals.

Top 7 Tips to Boost Your Score

1. Invest in a Class

IELTS Coach - British Council

Prepare for the IELTS with the help of an expert coach to help you ace all sections of the test.

Learn More

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

While it can be difficult to squeeze class time into an already full schedule, it’s hard to deny that the best way to learn a new skill is to set aside time to be taught.

Thankfully, in today’s modern world, there are numerous online options available that provide much more flexibility than the night school sessions of yesteryear.

One of the most effective (and affordable) options for hopeful IELTS-takers is the IELTS Coach offered by the British Council English Online programme, which offers flexible group classes based on your preference and ability.

English Online IELTS Coach teachers are experienced and knowledgeable, and can provide coursework and guidance that is proven to be effective for upping your IELTS score.

English Online IELTS Coach also offers a desirable level of customizability.  Students can choose the class that best aligns with their goals, and can select the timetable that works best with their schedules.

Plus, the site offers three different IELTS Coach Packages depending on your requirements, so you can find a helpful course that won’t break your budget.

2. Work With a Coach

If a class isn’t giving you the results you need, working one-on-one with a coach might be the next step to consider.

One-on-one practice is incredibly valuable for language learning, as your coach can help you with everything from correct pronunciation to learning common colloquialisms.

Plus, working with a one-on-one coach builds more motivation and accountability into your language learning practice than just completing homework assignments.

If you happen to know a native English speaker who might be willing to coach you or even just have some casual conversations over coffee, don’t be shy in asking them to help.

If you want more specific instruction, though (or don’t have a native English speaker handy to help), BritishCouncil also offers one-on-one sessions with IELTS experts.

These highly trained IELTS tutors know their way around the exam and can help you target the skills you need to improve, making even just a few sessions a super useful way to prepare for your test date.

Of course, you can also peruse international message boards and freelance platforms to find IELTS coaches, but take care to vet their qualifications carefully to make sure you’re not wasting time or money!

3. Add in Some Fun Practice

Classes and coaches may be the most effective ways to master a new language, but you can also build your English comprehension with some more lighthearted learning strategies, too.

Self-paced learning apps and courses are a great way to improve your English knowledge without making a huge time commitment.

Fun apps like Duolingo and Babbel offer gamified learning experiences that can help you build confidence and comprehension.

BritishCouncil’s self-led English course offers similarly bite-sized learning opportunities that, when used consistently, can add up to big language gains.

These quick and entertaining apps and courses can help you brush up your vocabulary, practice basic grammar, and connect with a network of other English learners online.

Plus, you can take these apps on the go and incorporate quick chunks of IELTS practice into your daily bus ride, lunch break, or down time.

4. Switch Up Your Settings

Sometimes small changes can be instrumental in helping us form new habits and patterns.

With this in mind, try switching your phone or internet settings to English, to force your brain to start “thinking” in a new language.

You can always toggle back to your native language if needed, but oftentimes context clues can help us place unfamiliar words even when we’re not one hundred percent sure of their meaning.

Getting used to following simple directions, navigating technology, and browsing headlines in English can go a long way in laying a solid foundation of understanding.

While this is obviously not the way to become fluent in English, making small adjustments can help you become mentally and intellectually immersed in your new language.

5. Engage with English Media

Another relatively low lift for language learning is to start consuming visual media in English.

Whether you’re watching the latest news or silly social media reels, by partaking in English media you’ll be exposed to a greater amount of vocabulary and context.

Plus, watching recent media in English will ensure that you’re building the vocabulary you need to discuss current events, which are often explored on the Speaking section of the IELTS.

It goes without saying that the more you’re exposed to the language, the more naturally you’ll be able to speak it and understand new scenarios.

By watching media in English, you can painlessly build your fluency and comprehension for the IELTS.

6. Make Time to Read

TV and Tiktok are all well and good, but there’s also nothing to compare to actually reading a book in English.

Reading is an excellent way to absorb new vocabulary and familiarize yourself with written grammar and punctuation.  Reading can also strengthen your comprehension and writing abilities.

Start where you are, maybe by rereading a translation of a favorite book or even a children’s story.

You don’t have to force yourself to read a textbook or complete worksheets… unless you want to, in which case there are numerous take-home curriculum options available for purchase or from the library.

Ultimately, though, it doesn’t matter if the content isn’t exactly scholarly.

The point is to get more comfortable pulling meaning from English-written texts, which is a large part of the Reading and Writing section of the IELTS.

The more time you devote to reading, the stronger your comprehension and written expression skills will become.  You can even read out loud to increase your fluency and work on your accent.

Plus, if you’re reading books that interest you, you might find yourself actually looking forward to this easy method of practice!

7. Sing, Debate, and Discuss

One of the trickiest things about mastering a new language is actually bringing yourself to speak it out loud.

Understanding usually comes before the ability to speak confidently, but to do well on the IELTS, you’ll need to show you can not only comprehend but also respond fluently.

The best way to make this possible is to get comfortable with speaking!

Classes and coaches will of course incorporate speaking practice into the daily routine, as do most self-paced apps and courses.  Reading aloud, as we noted, is another good way to put your voice to use.

You can increase your speaking practice a step further, however, by learning songs in English or recording yourself discussing or debating an intriguing subject.

Memorizing poems or raps can also help you build that essential fluency piece and make you more comfortable with speaking the language out loud.

The more you practice voicing English out loud, the faster you’ll be able to perfect your accent, grow your confidence, and ace the Speaking section of the IELTS!

How Does the IELTS Work?

The IELTS was originally launched in 1980, by the British Council and Cambridge University Press and assessment.

Though its name and format have evolved over the years, the purpose of the IELTS has always been to provide an innovative way for test takers to demonstrate the depth of their English comprehension.

Today, the test is available in two modules: the Academic Module and the General Training Module.

As the name suggests, the Academic Module of the IELTS is more geared toward those with scholarly intentions, while the General Training Module is focused on a less formal grasp of the language.

Both modules are divided into four parts: Listening, Speaking, Reading, and Writing.

The Reading and Writing sections of the test differ based on whether the test taker is completing the Academic or the General Training, but both tests require a comprehensive understanding of the language to achieve a high score.

There is no pass or fail grade for the IELTS.  Instead, results are calculated to a nine-band score, with nine being an “Expert” level and one representing a “Non User” who is essentially unable to communicate.

Many universities, institutions, and visa requirements demand at least a seven-band score from applicants, which corresponds to a “Good” level encompassing strong understanding of complex language and reasoning.

So, how can you attain that elusive seven-band score (or higher)?  Read on to learn some of our strongest suggestions for leveling up your IELTS score.

Final Thoughts

These tips are just some of the many ways you can improve your English proficiency and achieve the IELTS score you’re dreaming of.

Best of luck, and happy learning!

Have you taken the IELTS?  Know any surefire tips we forgot to mention here? We’d love to hear your insights in the comments below!

The post The 7 Best Ways to Boost Your IELTS Score appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

As someone who’s been working in the field for nearly 20 years, I’ve seen firsthand how demand and pay for ID pros has risen over time. Below, I’ll detail the average base salary, average total compensation, and other details for instructional designers in 2024.

How Much Do Instructional Designers Make?

Indeed reports that the average base salary for an instructional designer in America in 2024 is $70,656 plus a $3,000 annual bonus in some cases.

Indeed found the highest salary for instructional designers in Seattle, Washington ($75,147) followed by Denver, Colorado ($72,535), and Chicago, Illinois ($70,621).

Zip Recruiter puts the average salary for an instructional designer higher at $81,290 noting that salaries range from the low of $39,500 to the high of $133,000. The lower quarter percentile group earns an average of $62,000 annually. The higher quadrille group earns an average of $93,500 per year. This works out to be $5,167 to $7,792 per month.

Salary.com reports instructional designers make $55,883 to $70,783 with the median base salary being $62,213.

All in all, instructional designer salaries have remained fairly stable over the last few years based on my ongoing monitoring and analysis.

10 States Where Instructional Designers Earn the Most Money

Here is the list of the median salaries for instructional designers in the top 10 states/territories, showing the highest paid positions as reported by Salary.com:

1. Alaska: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $85,390
2. California: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $85,090
3. Washington, DC: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $84,690
4. New Jersey: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $84,190
5. Massachusetts: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $82,890
6. Connecticut: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $82,390
7. New York: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $81,690
8. Washington (state): Median Instructional Designer Salary: $81,390
9. Rhode Island: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $80,290
10. Delaware: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $79,990

10 States Where Instructional Designers Earn the Least Money

Here is the list of the median salaries for instructional designers, found in the lowest-paying 10 states/territories as reported by Salary.com with the lowest salary of all states shown last:

1. Arkansas: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $70,290
2. Arizona: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $70,290
3. Nebraska: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $69,890
4. New Mexico: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $69,590
5. Tennessee: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $69,190
6. Montana: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $69,090
7. Wyoming: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $67,790
8. West Virginia: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $67,490
9. Mississippi: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $66,290
10. South Dakota: Median Instructional Designer Salary: $65,190

There is about a $20,000 difference in annual pay when working as an instructional designer in the lowest-paying state of South Dakota ($65,190) as compared to the highest-paying state of Alaska ($85,390). Alaska also has a nice annual dividend benefit from the Alaska Permanent Fund that pays each of its residents $2,000 per year.

Careers for Instructional Designers

Under the general category of an instructional designer, there are specialty positions that are tailored for different levels and skills. They are training specialists, instructional learning analyst, eLearning instructional designer, curriculum designer, and project manager. Let’s compare them.

Training Specialist

The typical salary for a training specialist is $55,422 according to Payscale.com.

The top five states with the highest salaries for a training specialist are:

1. Washington: The average salary is $64,844.
2. New York: The typical salary is $64,290.
3. Texas: The average salary is $59,302.
4. Georgia: The typical salary is $58,193.
5. Illinois: The average salary is $57,639.

In this position, you will design and create the training materials needed by various groups. You will also usually be called upon to use these same materials to teach the programs. The teaching may be done in-person or remotely through online group live streams and using a virtual educational system to connect with students and follow their progress.

This job position is usually part of the human resources department. In a corporate environment, you will work to assist in training new employees, and in the continuing education of existing employees.

Instructional Learning Analyst

The typical salary for an instructional learning analyst is $57,208.

The top five states with the highest salaries for an instructional learning analyst are:

1. Washington: The average salary is $66,933.
2. New York: The average pay is $66,361.
3. Texas: The typical salary is $61,213.
4. Georgia: The average salary is $60,068.
5. Illinois: The average pay is $59,496.

An instructional learning analyst uses technological advancements and data mining to understand how people absorb new information and retain it for practical use. Insights from the analysis and research support efforts in this field to design the most impactful learning modalities that incorporate real-world information in the teaching methods.

This is not academic efforts for just research purposes. Instead, these practical investigations help make the lessons more useful in a practical sense to increase job performance and improve productivity.

eLearning Instructional Designer

The national average salary for an eLearning instructional designer is $62,424.

The top five states/territories with the highest salaries for an eLearning instructional designer are:

1. Washington, DC: The average salary is $72,412.
2. New York: The average salary is $71,788.
3. Washington: The average salary is $69,915.
4. Georgia: The average salary is $66,794.
5. Illinois: The average salary is $53,048.

The focus of an eLearning instructional designer is on developing dynamic online educational systems that are effective and make the best use of many media formats. An eLearning instructional designer must stay up-to-date on all the online delivery platforms (such as Blackboard, Canvas, and Zoom) and how to use them to deliver the online educational programs effectively. It is critical to have a clear understanding of the differences between in-person classes and online teaching to be able to manage the limitations created by online experiences.

Curriculum Designer

The national average annual salary for a curriculum designer is $75,303.

The top five states/territories with the highest salaries for a curriculum designer are:

1. Washington, DC: The average salary is $84,693.
2. New York: The average salary is $81,703.
3. Washington: The average salary is $81,323.
4. Illinois: The average salary is $78,203.
5. Texas: The average salary is $74,773.

This special field focuses on creating educational curricula for students in kindergarten to 12th grade. The deliverables required for a curriculum designer include such things as lessons that are targeted to the appropriate age levels, student worksheets, teachers’ guides, standard testing methodologies, and student progress reporting.

Project Manager

The average salary for a project manager in this field is a rewarding $138,218. The pay is so high because this job is very difficult and requires a senior executive with more than five years of experience in project management.

The top five states/territories with the highest salaries for a project manager are:

1. California: The average salary is $172,772.
2. New York: The average salary is $166,276.
3. Massachusetts: The average salary is $155,771.
4. Washington, DC: The average salary is $153,837.
5. Illinois: The average salary is $146,649.

A project manager who focuses on informational design projects is usually in a senior administrative position. In this position, you will supervise a large team of instructional designers and have bottom-line responsibility to make sure the project is delivered on time, on budget, and meets the specifications required.

The instruction design team may have a wide variety of professionals with specific expertise in media, content creation, and interface design. The project manager defines the instructional design project, creates a development plan, set the timeline, and the work schedule for it.

A dedicated project manager needs to be able to keep the team organized and manage the workflow to keep the project on schedule. To be able to perform successfully and meet the staged project deadlines, a project manager must have high-level technical competence, excellent problem-solving skills, people skills, and be flexible in the face of unexpected challenges.

For those who advance in a career as an instructional designer and who are good at managing people, this can lead to a project manager position after sufficient years of experience with associated work success. Candidates earn consideration for these positions by taking on increasing development team management responsibilities.

The instructional design career path offers a number of possibilities for those with the right skills.

For a closer look at how to become an instructional designer check out this article.

Ready for a Career Upgrade?

Instructional designers must be qualified to be hired for this position.

The minimum qualification includes a certification from a recognized school or online institution. The instructional design certification is the equivalent of a master’s degree.

Most positions require at least 2 years of experience as an educator before being qualified to advance to the level of an instructional designer. Those who have 4-5 years of experience command the highest salaries.

Best Overall

Emeritus Professional Instructional Design Certificate | Online Certificate Course

Gain firsthand expertise in instructional design principles and methodologies through this unique Professional Certificate program. Create impactful learning solutions and improve people's ability to learn.

Learn More!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

If you need to get training, there are plenty of courses you can take online from subject matter experts, including the Professional Certificate in Instructional Design program from Emeritus. In just 5 months, this online class gives you all the training you need to earn a certificate and launch your career as an instructional designer. This s immersive program provides students with an in-depth study of the foundations of instructional design and cutting-edge approaches used today in the learning design field.

You can learn more about the program and request a brochure at this link.

Once you’ve gotten certified and start looking for jobs, you’ll also want to create an instructional design portfolio, which you can easily do with a website builder like Squarespace.

Check out our video with some great ID portfolio examples and tips below:

Useful Resources

• What is instructional design?
• What Do Instructional Designers Do?
• 7 Steps To Become An Instructional Designer
• FAQ: How to Be a Freelance Instructional Designer
• Is Instructional Design the Right Career?
• How to create the perfect instructional designer resume

A Final Word on Instructional Designer Salaries

The demand for qualified and certified professional instructional designers is increasing which means even entry level instructional designers can earn a great salary.

If you’re thinking about trying to get the training you need to pursue this career path, then, check out my list of the best instructional design courses to get the training and certifications you need.

If you are hunting for a job in this sector and you are willing to relocate, then, you can expand your search to include the highest paying cities and states. Just remember to factor in the cost of living when you make your decision.

Many states with high-paying jobs also have a modest cost of living so you will do extremely well financially if you move there and work as an instructional designer.

Often, you can even get a moving allowance to help pay for your costs to move as well.

Looking forward to your success!

Have any questions about instructional designer salaries? Let us know by commenting below.

The post What’s the Typical Instructional Designer Salary? (2024 Figures) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Speaker isolation pads can cut out vibrations so you can make sure you’re hearing your monitors clearly, allowing you to better mix your recordings. More simply put, isolation pads let you get a clearer, more accurate sound from your monitor speakers so your final mix is better than ever. This is especially beneficial in home studios or untreated spaces, where the room’s acoustics may not be optimal.

The best studio monitor isolation pads are designed to provide the utmost in sound isolation and decoupling, so you can be sure your mixes will come out as well as possible. I’ve reviewed and ranked the best speaker isolation pads based on numerous factors, including their overall quality of construction, shape and design, effectiveness, customer reviews, price, and more (click here to learn about our entire Editorial Process & Methodology for product reviews).

What Are The Best Monitor Isolation Pads?

Here are my picks for the best studio monitor isolation pads you can buy in 2024…

1. Sound Addicted High Density Studio Monitor Isolation Pads →
2. Auralex MoPAD →
3. Adam Hall SPADECO2 →
4. LyxPro MNS-4 →
5. Pyle PSi03 →
6. Auralex ProPAD →

1. Sound Addicted High Density Studio Monitor Isolation Pads →

This Sound Addicted pair of foam pads is designed for 5” monitors. It’s a solid solution to avoid distortion in the low-end frequencies, this model will be a great fit for your recording environment.

What are the tech parameters of these studio monitor isolation pads?

• High-density acoustic foam pads
• Dimensions: 7.5” x 11” x 1.6” inches (W x D x H)
• Five various angle configurations to make sure the tweeters are positioned at ear level
• Plain design with no logos.

All in all, these Sound Addicted speaker isolation pads support all celebrated monitors like Yamaha HS8, JBL LSR308, M-Audio BX8, KRK Rokit, and others. Got speakers that meet the profile? Go for it!

Official Sound Addicted website.

Best for: standard 5” monitors.

2. Auralex MoPAD →

MoPAD are well-known iso pads that have helped many a pro and amateur avoid monitor vibrations.

What’s special about these speaker isolation pads?

• Sold in pairs, flexible sizing and positioning, including horizontally-placed monitors
• Four base pieces as well as four angling wedge pieces
• Bases are 12″ long x 4″ wide x 1″ thick
• They eliminate sympathetic vibrations
• They help yield a more accurate bass response and clearer high frequencies.

The ‘industry’ standard Auralex uses dense foam that easily handles heavy weights and vibration. You can configure the monitor angle and set the right height.

Best for: multiple sizes of bookshelf loudspeakers or monitors up to 100 lbs. each.

3. Adam Hall SPADECO2 →

A cost-effective model that will meet most budgets and expectations, the Adam is a great example of high-density acoustic foam pads. Some users view these iso pads as a decent Auralex MoPAD alternative. Whatever the rationale, these speaker pads simply do a good job!

What are the tech specs of these studio monitor isolation pads?

• Two-component design
• Dimensions (W x D x H): 10.43” x 12.99” x 1.57”
• Anthracite color

The Adam always works as intended. The ‘two components’, in fact, make up three possible combinations: horizontal placement and two different angles. The Adam helps avoid disturbing resonation and makes audiophiles happy at a reasonable cost.

Best for: mid-sized and big heavy monitors.

4. LyxPro MNS-4 →

Another two-component pair of acoustic isolation pads, LyxPro is a good way to decouple monitors from a surface.

What does these speaker isolation pads come with?

• Great sonic isolation, optimization of performance for a wide range of reference monitors.
• A wedge piece that allows you to tilt the monitors to and fro up to 8 degrees
• High-density acoustic foam, two component design
• 1-year warranty.

Long story short, these studio monitor isolation pads are a good value for the money. Since they can angle up to ear level and support heavier monitors, you simply can’t go wrong.

Best for: 5″ and 8″ studio monitors.

5. Pyle PSi03 →

Pyle is another great option if you’re looking for sound isolation pads. The model offers two dampening recoil stabilizer risers, 9” x 12” each. A great pair of studio monitor pads at a reasonable cost!

What’s in the package?

• High-density durable foam
• Dimensions: 9.44” x 12.1” x 2.0”
• Universal stabilizers for optimized audio performance
• Reduced vibration and resonance, efficient absorption of bass recoil
• Supports studio monitors, shelf speakers, subwoofers, etc.

The features speak for themselves. In addition, the platform bases can be reversed for the sake of upward and downward-firing effects.

Best for: mid-sized speakers up to 33 lbs.

6. Auralex ProPAD →

A premium version of MoPADs, the ProPAD is a bit more sophisticated and comes at a somewhat higher price – and it’s the best you can find!

What do the ProPADs do?

• Ensure optimal durability with their open-celled PlatFoam
• Provide protection against unwanted vibrations
• Support most surround-sound and stereo monitors
• Keep away sympathetic vibrations and improve sound clarity.

These studio monitor isolation pads have the dimensions of 13″ length x 8″ width and a slip-resistant ISO-plate top. You can think of these speaker pads as a cheeseburger, where the cheese is the plate. This design is slip-resistant and provides effective isolation at all times.

Best for: mid-sized studio monitors, a good fit for home theaters, listening rooms, media rooms, etc.

FAQ

What are monitor isolation pads?

Studio monitor isolation pads are designed to go underneath speakers to decouple them from the flat surface they’re sitting on, helping to reduce vibrations and other noise issues during playback.

Are monitor isolation pads necessary?

If you want the clearest, most accurate sound from your studio monitors during playback, isolation pads are a must.

Do speaker isolation pads work?

Yes, good studio monitor isolation pads will drastically cut down on vibrations when you’re using your speakers, allowing you to hear your mix more clearly and accurately during mixing.

What are monitor isolation pads made from?

The best speaker pads are made from high-quality foam that can absorb vibrations and prevent them from being heard during playback.

Final Thoughts

I’ve learned that decoupling studio monitors is absolutely crucial for your audio ambiance. It’s good to know there is an abundant choice of solutions for reverb reduction.

The good news is with the right isolation pad setup, you can improve sound quality and reduce interference from the supporting surface to get clear, crisp sound.

Some of the speaker isolation pads in this guide are original designs, and some are mere variations.

The rule of thumb here is to check out the dimensions, read the reviews and see if the monitor isolation pads are in line with your budget expectations. Good luck, and feel free to share your experiences!

Have any questions about choosing studio monitor isolation pads? Comment below and let us help you out.

The post The 6 Best Studio Monitor Isolation Pads for a Home Recording Studio (2024 Guide) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

The right accommodation for your home studio monitors will help you decouple them from unwanted surfaces, and ultimately produce pure sound and enjoyable audio experiences. Studio monitor stands are specifically designed to position the monitors at the ideal height and angle, ensuring that the sound is directed precisely toward the listener’s ears. This placement is crucial for achieving accurate and balanced sound reproduction, which is essential for critical listening, mixing, and producing high-quality audio.

In this article, I’m sharing what I believe are the 7 best studio monitor stands from various budget categories and announcing my top picks (click here to learn about our entire Editorial Process & Methodology for product reviews). This guide has been fully updated for 2024 to bring you the best options currently on the market today.

What are the Best Affordable Monitor Stands?

Here are our picks for the top studio speaker stands worth a look…

1. Ultimate Support MS-90 →

Combining the advantages of both wooden and metal stands, the MS-90 is a game-changing model from Ultimate Support that fits most common application scenarios in a sound recording studio.

What’s great about this set of studio monitor stands?

• 36″ column made of extra-durable 6000 series aluminum
• Nifty internal design featuring three standalone channels: two small ones for audio cables and power cables, and a large one for weighting
• Three rubber feet to provide isolation from the floor
• Four rubber pads to separate monitors from the stand
• Two joints to decouple the bottom and the top

All these characteristics translate into maximum decoupling and reliability with this affordable studio monitor stand set.

Plus, you get the perk of a lifetime warranty: whatever happens, you’re covered.

One downside to these studio monitor stands: the height is non-adjustable here whereas many other stands are. Aside from this drawback, MS-90 is the best choice!

Best for: pro and semi-pro studios, mid-size and larger monitors.

2. SANUS Adjustable Height Speaker Stand →

As the name suggests, the SANUS studio speaker stand offers full adjustability and a few other perks. Need more details on this studio monitor stand? Here you go:

• Supports satellite speakers up to 3.5 lbs.
• Adjustable height – 28” to 38”
• Heavy-gauge offset steel column with a built-in wire channel
• Top plate, keyhole adapter and L-shaped brackets included
• 5-year warranty from the manufacturer.

It’s cheap and functional! At this budget, you should seriously consider this stand for lightweight speakers.

Best for: home studios, satellite and small bookshelf speakers (JBL, KEF, Sony, and many others)/smaller monitor speakers

3. VideoSecu 2 →

The VideoSecu stand mount supports a great selection of speakers. It’s easily adjustable, heavy duty and nice to look at.

What are the key features of these studio stands?

• Stylish steel column to support up to 30 lbs weight capacity for quality stereo sound
• Flexible side clamping on the top plate – width from 5.5 to 11 inches
• Adjustable height – from 26.5” to 47”
• Screw-in rubber feet facilitate great isolation on carpet or solid floor
• The top plate can rotate 180 degrees and tilt up to 10 degrees
• Stealthy wire management, ensured stability

Best for: PA systems, club environments, a broad selection of studio monitors including JBL, KEF, Klipsch, Sony, Yamaha, Pioneer, and beyond.

4. Mounting Dream MD5401 →

Mounting Dream MD5401 height-adjustable speaker stands raise the bar for durability. The model has an extendable tube (35.5” to 48”) with 11 lbs capacity per stand.

More details below:

• Various attachment options catering to specific speakers: adapter bar for horizontal holes, vertical hole/keyhole, as well as a round holder for wooden speakers
• Heavy-duty cast iron, black finished steel (supports heavier monitors weighing up to 11lbs/5kg per column)
• Floor-standing design features with a triangle shape base
• Neat cable management solution with cabling hidden out of sight.

All in all, this is a very sturdy and very flexible model that provides full compatibility with a wide spectrum of speakers. In any case, make sure you check the location of the speaker holes before you buy.

Best for: mid-weight acoustic systems, semi-pro, and home applications.

5. VIVO (STAND-SP03B) →

Universal floor speaker stands, this VIVO pair works great with bookshelf and surround sound speakers.

Let’s look further into the model’s parameters:

• Dimensions: 25” height, 6.25” x 6.25” top shelf, 9.5” x 9.5” base measure
• Smooth compatibility: this stand accommodates most satellite and bookshelf speakers
• Design: high-gauge steel speaker stands (2 columns) in sleek matte black finish
• Spikes: easy carpet placement with smoothly attachable and detachable spikes
• Padded feet: a nifty option for solid floor placement.

In other words, VIVO offers a stylish neutral look, and it’s heavy-duty and easy to assemble. For a pretty low budget, VIVO is as sturdy as it gets. If you prefer to conceal the cords, this may not be the right option though, since there is no cord management.

Best for: home and semi-pro studios, monitors weighing up to 22lbs.

6. Pangea Audio DS400 →

Heavy-duty 32” speaker stands, Pangea is a high-quality steel model that holds the speaker firmly for best performance.

Here are the features:

• Durable, all-steel
• You can fill all four support piers with sand or steel shot
• Adjustable bottom spikes for better carpet standing
• Four rubberized top pads for speaker isolation
• Supports a bunch of compact speakers as well as larger monitors.

The DS400 utilizes sturdy support piers and provides a rigid base for compact monitors and bookshelf speakers. Stylish, impressive, worth every penny.

Best for: amateur and pro recording studios, large monitors.

Now that you’re familiar with some nice speaker stand options, you might want to supplement your acoustic infrastructure with isolation pads for better decoupling and sound performance. Check out my brief roundup of iso pads, and pick what feels right!

7. DR Pro SMS1BK (36″) →

A wooden model, the DR Pro is a popular studio monitor stand despite the traditional drawbacks associated with wood.

How does DR stand out?

• The model has a hollowed-out cavity that you can fill with the right material for greater density
• Thus, you can boost acoustic isolation between the monitor and the floor
• Shipped in various versions, e.g. DR Pro Maple Wood.

All this should be taken with a pinch of salt though. Wooden models  are far less durable. Plus, they have a larger footprint and you can’t adjust their height.

Best for: smaller studio monitors and speakers

A Final Word on Studio Monitor Stands

Spending hours recording in the studio only to find out that your tracks don’t sound quite right is frustrating.

One of the most common problems is that the speakers aren’t properly positioned.

This can happen for a number of reasons, but one of the most common is that the speaker stands aren’t positioned right.

If your speakers are too low or at the wrong angle, they won’t be aimed at your ear level properly and you won’t be able to hear all the detail in your tracks.

This can lead to subpar recordings that don’t represent your hard work accurately.

That’s why choosing the right speaker monitor stands for your studio is so important. The right stands will place your speakers at the perfect height, so you can hear all the details in your tracks and create a better mix.

With the guide above, you can find great monitor stands that will set you up for success.

Have a question about choosing the right studio monitor stand? Comment below and we’ll help.

The post 7 Best Studio Monitor Stands for People on a Budget (2024 Guide) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

But here’s the real best part — there are literally thousands of Coursera free courses you can explore without paying a thing. In fact, you can audit any class on the platform at no cost. That’s right, Coursera lets you audit any of their courses absolutely free, giving you access to a majority of the materials being taught (our Coursera pricing guide has more details).

You only need to pay enrollment fees (these vary by course) for full access to course content if you want to get a Certificate for completion, which may be the case if you’re taking a class for work purposes. Course fees also get you access to some additional features like getting your work graded or being able to access assignments.

With that in mind, I put together a list of the best Coursera free courses you can audit at no cost in 2024 (click here to learn about our entire Editorial Process & Methodology for product reviews). For your convenience, I’ve broken the best Coursera free courses out into categories, so you can browse to the topics that interest you most.

Arts & Humanities

1. Indigenous Canada from the University of Alberta

Taught by Dr. Tracy Bear and Dr. Paul Gareau, this Coursera course is designed by the University of Alberta and is amongst the platform’s most popular courses, with over 450,000 enrolled learners from all over the world.

This comprehensive course comprises 12 modules that cover indigenous history in Canada and allow you to dive deeper into themes such as political disputes, indigenous life, political action, laws, rights, land claims, environmental concerns, and the fur trade.

This course allows for self-paced learning or by following the prescribed setting and completing it weekly.

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

2. Modern and Contemporary Art and Design from The Museum of Modern Art

This art and humanities Specialization is designed by the Museum of Modern Art and consists of 4 courses.

Modern Art and Ideas includes videos that connect with the museum’s art collection and audio interviews, readings, and resources from renowned artists, designers, and curators.

The other 3 courses include exploring ancient and modern photography and learning how artists operate and think about today’s urgent concerns and developing critical abilities to understand, examine and interpret fashion design from a variety of perspectives.

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

3. Graphic Design from The California Institute of the Arts

Offered by the California Institute of the Arts (CalArts), this Specialization series of courses are amongst the best Coursera courses. These introductory courses will teach you the fundamental skills required to become a professional graphic designer.

You’ll obtain a solid grasp of graphic design from formal and conceptual procedures through the implementation of the learned principles.

This program consists of 5 introductory courses that relate to graphic designing, typography, image-making, history of graphic design, and a course named “Brand New Brand” which lets you tie all the learning objectives under a final capstone project.

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

Business

4. Excel Skills for Business from Macquarie University

Excel Skills for Business is a series of courses provided by Macquarie Business School, and it’s arguably one of the most useful Coursera free courses out there.

Taught by 3 lecturers of Macquarie Business School, this is a 4-course Specialization and teaches applied Excel skills to students.  Its 4 courses are Essentials, Intermediate I, Intermediate II, and Advanced.

Its topics include constructing professional spreadsheets and dashboards, executing complicated calculations, handling large datasets, and data analysis through the extraction of data and information.

Furthermore, you will learn the skills required to validate datasets as well as eliminate mistakes in spreadsheets and design spreadsheets that forecast and model data.

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

5. Successful Negotiation: Essential Strategies and Skills from the University of Michigan

This is a free Coursera course offered by the University of Michigan and it is taught by George Siedel. One of the most crucial skills to develop in the business world is negotiation. It enables you to create effective contracts and pave the route to a successful career.

The 4 stages of negotiation taught in this course are: Prepare (helps you plan your negotiation strategy), Negotiate (enables you to use key tactics requires for success), Close (helps you in creating a contract), and lastly, Perform and Evaluate (delivering on your agreement and assessing performance).

This self-paced learning course requires you to watch brief interactive videos and tests your negotiating skills through questions and different activities.

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

6. Fintech: Foundations & Applications of Financial Technology from the University of Pennsylvania

This beginner-level series of Coursera courses is offered by the Wharton School of the University of Pennsylvania and is designed to deliver essential knowledge of fintech and implementation of its concepts through case studies.

This Coursera online Specialization has 4 courses and may be completed in 4 months if the student devotes about an hour each week to it.

This series of courses will prepare you to implement modern financial technologies in your firm and you will learn different concepts including investment strategies, cryptocurrency, blockchain, crowdfunding, marketplace lending, Robo-advising, applications of AI, and a lot more!

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

7. Foundations of Positive Psychology from the University of Pennsylvania

Foundations of Positive Psychology is a Specialization series offered by the University of Pennsylvania and is taught by qualified doctors in their respective domains.

This elaborated Specialization contains 5 courses and can be completed within 5 months at a pace of 4 hours per week.

This series of courses will sharpen your research methods and will build a deeper understanding of terms such as resilience skills.

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

Computer Science

8. Python For Everybody from the University of Michigan

These massive open online courses (MOOC) are among the best free Coursera courses for learning or improving your Python skills. Provided by the University of Michigan, this introductory Specialization is best for beginners and can be completed within 8 months at a pace of 3 hours per week.

Taught by Charles Russell Severance, this Specialization consists of 5 courses, including the Capstone project to learn retrieval, processing, and visualization of data. These courses help you learn important programming fundamentals such as data structures, networked application program interfaces, and databases.

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

9. Algorithms from Stanford University

These Coursera free courses are designed by Stanford and taught by Professor Tim Roughgarden.

This Specialization focuses on conceptual learning and presents algorithms to beginners.

This series of courses is the jack of all cards for algorithm learning, from educating users to grasp technical algorithms to presenting them with crucial concepts.

This Specialization consists of 4 courses, and it teaches a variety of concepts such as divide and conquers, sorting and searching, randomized algorithms, graph search, data structures, greedy algorithms, dynamic programming, and NP problems.

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

10. Digital Product Management from the University of Virginia

This Specialization from the University of Virginia teaches basic principles of product management.

With this series of 5 Coursera courses, you will learn how to communicate and pay attention to potential stakeholders, how to assess growth and engagement using quantitative and qualitative methodologies, and how to focus on creating a targeted long-term program to make your product competitive.

Duration for this series of courses is 5 months at a pace of 3 hours per week.

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

Data Science

11. Google Data Analytics Professional Certificate

The Google Data Analytics Professional Certificate is a fundamental series of courses for anyone interested in learning data foundations. Coursera’s Google Data Analytics courses are among the best offerings on this subject and will provide you with all of the information, skills, and tools you’ll need to start a career in data analytics.

The 8 courses in this series will help with understanding the foundations of data, asking questions to make data-driven decisions, preparing data for exploration, processing data from dirty to clean, analyzing data to answer questions, sharing data through the art of visualization, analyzing data with R programming, and lastly completing a capstone project.

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

12. Learn SQL Basics for Data Science from the University of California

Developed by the University of California, Davis, this Coursera Specialization makes it easier for beginners with no coding experience to gain SQL fluency.

This Specialization series contains 4 courses:

• SQL for Data Science
• Data Wrangling, Analysis, and AB Testing with SQL
• Distributed Computing with Spark SQL
• SQL for Data Science Capstone Project

These courses will equip you to study and analyze data through SQL and to apply SQL skills to solve real-world business issues.

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

13. Data Science Fundamentals with Python and SQL 

This data science Specialization series consists of 5 self-paced courses offered by IBM.

Start your career in data science by achieving first-hand experience with data analyzing tools and through the use of real-world data sets.

From providing knowledge of data tools such as R Studio, GitHub, and Jupyter Workbooks to introducing Python programming basics, this series of courses has covered it all for you. The series includes statistical analysis techniques as well as fundamentals of a relational database.

These courses can be completed at your speed, helping you develop key foundational skills for building your career.

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

14. IBM AI Engineering

Provided by IBM, this Professional Certificate series of courses on artificial intelligence is offered by IBM through Coursera. This intermediate-level course has been created to teach you the skills and tools you’ll need to get started as an AI or machine learning engineer.

The curriculum consists of 6 self-paced courses that teach individuals about machine learning and deep learning concepts as well as how to put the concepts into practice.

The 6 courses included in this Professional Certificate are:

• Machine Learning with Python
• Introduction to Deep Learning and Neural Networks
• Introduction to Computer Vision and Image Processing
• Deep Neural Networks with PyTorch
• Building Deep Learning Models with TensorFlow
• AI Capstone Project with Deep Learning.

By the end of this series of courses, you’ll know how to take the knowledge you’ve gained and apply it to a real world situation.

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

Health

15. Introduction to Psychology from Yale University

Provided by Yale University and taught by Professor Paul Bloom, this beginner-level course teaches you basic psychological ideas and how they influence events impacting us.

You will be enlightened with a greater understanding of yourself and others, learning how people think and interact with one another. The course will conclude with a discussion of how to measure happiness and the things that contribute to a happy life.

This free Coursera course can be completed in 4 weeks with about 15 hours total of work.

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

16. Psychological First Aid from Johns Hopkins University

This course from Johns Hopkins University teaches students the RAPID model to deliver psychological first aid to the ones in need. RAPID model is an abbreviation for Reflective listening, Assessment of needs, Prioritization, Intervention, and Disposition.

The syllabus of this course consists of 5 lessons and starts with an introduction followed by reflective listening/rapport, assessment and prioritization, intervention and disposition, and self-care and wrap-up successively.

The methods you’ll learn in this course could be applied in public health settings, work environments, nonprofit/faith-based organizations, and even in your daily life as you deal with significant events.

This course will not take much of your time and can be completed within 6 hours only.

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

17. Stanford Introduction to Food and Health

Taught by Maya Adam, this course will teach individuals to be able to differentiate between healthy meals as well as harmful meals. Furthermore, this course will provide a compelling argument towards adopting basic home cooking to attempt to live a longer and healthier life.

The goal of this course is to educate you on how you can eat better so you can avoid preventable chronic diseases and avoid the global epidemic of obesity.

In 5 weekly modules, the course covers the following topics: Background on Food & Nutrients, Contemporary Trends in Eating, Future Directions in Health – Part 1, Future Directions in Health – Part 2, and Cooking Workshop.

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

Information Technology

18. IBM Cybersecurity Analyst Professional Certificate

This series of intermediate courses provides you with essential knowledge to prepare you for a career as a cybersecurity analyst.

The 8 courses included in this Professional Certificate include:

• Introduction to Cybersecurity Tools and Cyber Attacks
• Cybersecurity Roles, Processes, and Operating System Security
• Cybersecurity Compliance Framework and System Administration
• Network Security and Database Vulnerabilities
• Penetration Testing, Incident Response, and Forensics
• Cyber Threat Intelligence
• Cybersecurity Capstone: Breach Response Case Studies
• IBM Cybersecurity Analyst Assessment

When you’ve completed this series of courses, you’ll have the knowledge and confidence to put your skills to work in the cybersecurity industry.

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

19. AWS Fundamentals

The Amazon Web Services Fundamentals is a Specialization series of courses designed for existing or prospective IT professionals who are beginners at cloud computing. It’s a great introduction where you can learn how to use AWS services for different real world cases.

This Specialization consists of 4 interconnected courses, each delivered by a technical professional instructor.

You will learn how to install and run a cloud-native application using and configuring AWS services.

You’ll also master the best practices for protecting an AWS infrastructure and AWS-based apps.

This course has been developed by the experts at AWS and is taught around the globe, so you can be confident that you’re getting high quality information directly from the source.

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

20. Preparing for Google Cloud Certification: Cloud Architect Professional Certificate

Offered by Google Cloud, this intermediate-level series of courses will provide you with all the concepts required for you to succeed as a cloud architect.

You will be learning different tools and techniques used in Google Cloud, including its platform’s infrastructure and services, as well as learn how to interface cloud console and cloud shell with Google cloud.

This Professional Certificate consists of 7 courses, including:

• Google Cloud Fundamentals: Core Infrastructure
• Essential Google Cloud Infrastructure: Foundation
• Essential Google Cloud Infrastructure: Core Services
• Elastic Google Cloud Infrastructure: Scaling and Automation
• Reliable Google Cloud Infrastructure: Design and Process
• Architecting with Google Kubernetes Engine: Foundation
• Preparing for the Google Cloud Professional Cloud Architect Exam

This in-depth series will take around 3 months to complete at a pace of 6 hours per week.

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

21. Google IT Support Professional Certificate

Provided by Google, this series of courses is worth a look if you want to change careers or are looking to upgrade your IT abilities.

In 6 months, this Professional Certificate series will help you learn all the tasks required to thrive as an IT professional. With over 100 hours of expert instruction, you’ll learn different skills, including how to use Linux, Domain Name Systems as well as recognizing issues to troubleshooting and debugging.

The Certificate includes the following 5 courses:

• Technical Support Fundamentals
• The Bits and Bytes of Computer Networking
• Operating Systems and You: Becoming a Power User
• System Administration and IT Infrastructure Services
• IT Security: Defense Against the Digital Dark Arts.

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

Language Learning

22. Improve Your English Communication Skills from the Georgia Institute of Technology

Want to improve your English skills so you can get ahead in your career?

Offered by Georgia Tech, this Specialization series of Coursera free courses will help you improve your communication skills by teaching you how to conduct more productive conversations and communicate more professionally in business environments.

Composing professional emails, participating in meetings, giving a presentation, or creating an e-portfolio, this course covers it all.

This Specialization consists of 4 courses:

• Write Professional Emails in English
• Speaking English Professionally
• Build Your Professional ePortfolio
• Take your English Communication Skills to the Next Level

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

23. First Step Korean from Yonsei University

This language learning course from Yonsei University is for beginners wanting to learn Korean.

Taught by Seung Hae Kang, this beginner course covers the very basics of how to read, write, listen, and speak in Korean.

Topics include the Korean alphabet, basic expressions, greetings, how to read dates and time, and most importantly, how to use Korean vocabulary in your everyday life.

Whether you’re learning Korean for pleasure or for work, this course will get you on the right track to mastering the basics.

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

Personal Development

24. The Science of Well-Being from Yale University

This online course from Yale University will require you to complete a series of tasks aimed at boosting your happiness and developing more productive habits.

Taught by Professor Laurie Santos, this course takes approximately 19 hours to complete and allows for flexible deadlines.

With 10 lessons, this course discusses assumptions about pleasant and unpleasant mental traits that force us to think and act a certain way. By the end of this course, you’ll be ready to effectively overcome mental roadblocks to improve your overall happiness and productivity.

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

Social Sciences

25. Methods and Statistics in Social Sciences from the University of Amsterdam

Offered by the University of Amsterdam, this Specialization series of courses dives into deep learning and understanding of research methods as well as statistical methods.

The 5 courses included in this Specialization course are:

• Quantitative Methods
• Qualitative Research Methods
• Basic Statistics
• Inferential statistics
• Methods and Statistics in Social Science

For the final Capstone Project of this course, you’ll put the concepts and skills you’ve learned to use by creating your research topic, collecting data, and utilizing statistical tools to analyze and report on the results.

With the information you’ll learn, you’ll be able to more critically evaluate scientific research in the social and behavioral sciences as well as even perform your own studies.

Click here to learn more and to get started for free.

Final Thoughts

With Coursera, there’s a world of educational opportunities available at your fingertips.

And remember, you can take all of the best Coursera free courses at no cost by auditing them. And if you want to receive your Certificate for completing a course, you can pay to upgrade so you can complete the required coursework and get certified.

Have any questions about taking free Coursera classes? Leave a comment below and we’ll help you out.

The post The 25 Best Coursera Free Courses to Try Now in 2024 appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

The good news is there’s no need to drive miles to take expensive photography classes. These days, you can take some great online photography classes from the comfort of home or anywhere you’d like. As someone who works in the eLearning field, I’d argue that online classes are even more effective than in-person classes in many cases due to their flexibility and the ability to take lessons on demand as many times as you’d like.

I’ve reviewed and ranked the best online photography courses available in 2024 based on a variety of critical factors, including quality of the curriculum, instructor credentials, student reviews, cost, and more (click here to learn about our entire Editorial Process & Methodology for product reviews). From free online photography courses to paid options with certifications, we have choices for everyone.

What are the Best Online Photography Classes?

Here are our picks for the top online photography courses to take in 2024…

1) Annie Leibovitz Teaches Photography (Masterclass)

Annie Leibovitz Teaches Photography (Masterclass)

Step into Annie Leibovitz’s world and learn the secrets of capturing amazing portraiture that tells a story!

Sign Up!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Plans start at $10/month for unlimited access to all courses (billed annually)

Duration

15 video lessons, 3+ hours

In this powerful online course, famed photographer Annie Leibovitz shows you how to take stunning, iconic photos. The course is great for those working in any photography genre.

During her iconic career as a staff photographer shooting portraits for Rolling Stone and Vanity Fair, Annie has taken some of the most famous images in the world—capturing legends such as John Lennon, Queen Elizabeth, LeBron James, and countless others.

What I like about this class is how Leibovitz’s expertise and reputation as a world-renowned photographer bring an unparalleled level of insight and depth to the course. Her approach to teaching isn’t just about the technical aspects of photography but also about storytelling through images, which is a crucial skill for any photographer.

Throughout taking the course, you’ll learn all about Annie’s philosophy, creative process, and the skills she uses to capture her amazing photos. What makes this course particularly special is the way Leibovitz delves into the philosophy behind her work. She encourages students to develop their own concepts and vision, which is essential for creating compelling and meaningful photography.

Click here to enroll in this course today.

What You Will Learn

• How to develop concepts
• How to work with subjects
• Tips for shooting with natural light
• Editing tricks to bring images to life in post-production

Best for: Anyone who wants to learn the creative process of a world-class photographer.

2) Fundamentals of DSLR Photography Class Online (Skillshare)

Fundamentals of DSLR Photography (Skillshare)

Master the basics of using your camera, learning key camera settings like ISO, aperture, shutter speed, and more. You’ll take a look at the “exposure pyramid.

Try It Free!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Skillshare offers a 1-Month Free Trial. After that, the price for an annual membership is around $165 per year, which works out to $13.75/month averaged out, or you can opt for a monthly membership at $32 a month.

Duration

1 hour 20 mins(12 lessons)

Skillshare provides a wide range of online video courses to try out at a very reasonable price. It also provides a one-month free trial, which is enough to complete two or three of the best online photography courses for free.

This course is designed to help you with your camera and some tutorials on Photoshop and Lightroom.

You can learn everything from street photography to portraits with this class. These lessons also include a sharing option where you can compare your projects with others and learn through their experiences.

This course is great for beginner photographs.

It will inspire you to get up and take some beautiful street photos.

You will get to know how to balance shutter speed and ISO for the perfect click.

You will be learning camera settings, manual mood shoots and will be able to create next-level photos that you always imagined taking by yourself.

It is not about what is the object in front of the lenses, it is about how you capture it, the angle you choose, and the editing skill you have.

This online photography course will help you to adjust things like exposure, contrast, clarity, shadow, and all other tools, which you will need for the perfect editing.

You can try this class free during your one-month free trial period on Skillshare.

What You Will Learn

• How to balance the three elements of the exposure triangle to capture different levels of moments
• How to learn to shoot in manual mode and panning the camera with the motion of the object.
• How to opt for the right camera and lenses
• How to adjust and set ISO ranges and shutter speed
• How to freeze and blur motion

User Feedback

“Excellent DSLR Course! I have learned a lot from this course. Simply just amazing. I can recommend this course unreservedly to all who are interested in wanting to try their hands on DSLR Photography. Justin Bridges will be able to walk you through ALL the REQUIRED STEPS that you need for your first RAW Photo Shoot & All the necessary TWEAKINGS that you may need to do via the Editing mode.”

Best for: Mastering both photography and photo editing; aspiring photographers

3) Photography Essentials: Understanding the Basics (Skillshare)

Photography Essentials: Understanding the Basics (Skillshare)

Just getting started in photography? This 101 course is perfect for beginners looking to master the basics and get on the path to becoming a great photographer.

Try It Free!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Skillshare offers a 1-Month Free Trial. After that, the price is $165 per year, which works out to $13.75/month averaged out, or you can opt for a monthly membership at $32 a month. See our Skillshare pricing guide for more info.

Duration

1 hour 30m (13 lessons)

If you want to learn photography basics but don’t have a lot of time, this course is for you.

It has all the information about essential basic skills of photography in just 90 minutes.

This course is not only about basic photography skills, but it will give you tips and tricks that you need to become a prominent photographer.

If you have an interest in capturing the true essence of nature and if you are fond of traveling and strive to capture the scene with your camera, this class is the best fit for you.

This course will help you capture emotions and storytelling content with your camera.

Most of the content in these videos is related to travel and lifestyle photography, and you will grow as a lifestyle and traveling photographer within a few days.

Like any other good online photography course, this course is also designed for beginners, who have little or no knowledge and who want to improve their photography skills.

The course will help you with all the basic tricks and tips that will help you to capture the best scenes, making unforgettable images.

It will also teach you how to find the best angle for the image and how to control the lighting environment.

You can take this class free during your one-month Skillshare trial period.

What You Will Learn

• How to use the best camera setting and camera modes to nail the perfect composition.
• How to do the best editing for the image captured.
• How to manage social media platforms and tips for the photographers
• How to find the best angles and lighting environment to capture the moment.
• How to get a crisp focus in every photo
• How to edit the photos with precision
• How to work with manual mode and manipulate your environment

User Feedback

“I learned so much from this course. Sean is such an engaging teacher and explained everything so clearly, with great use of example images to illustrate the points being made. I can’t wait to get out and put what I have learned into practice!”

“The classes were genuine and practical, which in conjunction with Sean’s great work, makes this an adaptable course for beginners.”

Best for: Beginner and intermediate-level photographers

4) Introductory Photography Course (Udemy)

Free Photography Tutorial - Introductory Photography Course (Udemy)

This free photography class from Udemy teaches some of the very basics to beginners just getting into this hobby.

Learn More

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Free (Udemy pricing varies by course)

Duration

2.5 hours

If you are a beginner and want to start from the basics, this short video-based Udemy course is for you.

This free online photography course starts with the basics, like managing autofocus modes, lenses, depth of field, etc.

Right from the start, the course demystifies many aspects of using a camera beyond the auto mode. The instructor’s approach is straightforward and easy to follow, which made the learning process enjoyable.

This free course is not only about camera settings but it also covers compositional concepts and covers topics from the very basic to specialized niche topics.

Having prior camera skills or photographic skills is not required to start this course, because it starts with the fundamentals, and you will learn a lot in a short span of time.

Even some of the accomplished photographers commented that they still learned a lot from this course.

It doesn’t matter what kind of camera you are using, because this course is not limited to any specific type of camera or brand. A wide range of terminologies is included in this course to help you out with any kind of camera.

The mode of study in this course is very easy to understand because of the simple language and no usage of complex theories or jargon.

The aim of this introductory course is to inspire and make enthusiastic beginners understand the fundamentals of photography.

Click here to sign up for this class at no cost.

What You Will Learn

• How to apply the right techniques required for the perfect click
• How to frame up photos by using the rule of leading lines and thirds to cover everything
• How to control exposure, brightening, or darkening of photos
• How to understand aperture and depth of field
• How to work with different shutter speeds, ISO settings

User Feedback

“The course has filled in a lot of gaps in my knowledge when it comes to understanding the ‘why’s’ and the ‘what’s’ of settings of the camera I have used but couldn’t fully explain to myself. The presenter is honest and gives practical advice that I can relate to from my own photographic experiences.”

“This is a great course. After following along with the videos, I had a much better sense of how to control my camera and how to compose better shots. I was shooting underwater in Cuba. I was not used to shooting with so much natural light. Initially all of my pictures were blown out, but with Chris’s training, I was able to make quick changes and get some great shots.”

Best for: Beginner photographers who are learning for the first time

5) Macro Photography & Focus Stacking Made Easy (Udemy)

Macro Photography & Focus Stacking Made Easy (Udemy)

This online class focuses on close-up, macro and focus stacking, getting you on the path to shooting great macro photos in no time at all.

Learn More

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Regularly $69.99 with 30-day money-back guarantee (price may vary)

Duration

3 hours on-demand video

If you have a DSLR and want to capture the amusing world around you, then a Macro photography course is the best way to help you to get the most from your camera.

This course will help you to learn the techniques, like lighting, optical, and more to capture some of the best photographs of nature like birds, insects, flowers, and much more.

The aim of the course is to help you with your DSLR skills and mirrorless cameras with their macro-capabilities in a very reasonable way.

By spending a few dollars, your ordinary lenses can be turned into amusing macro lenses, because this course will help you with some of the best techniques with small changes in your camera settings.

Once you are one with this course, you will excel in focus stacking techniques, and you will have much fun with photoshop.

You will learn about all kinds of close-up shots, extreme macro, and reverse lenses techniques in a simple and easy-to-digest manner.

Click here to sign up for this course.

What You Will Learn

• How to select the right lenses, cameras, and light sources such as LED, fiber optic, etc.
• How to understand the concept of focus stacking and images in photoshop and helicon focus
• How to capture stacks of images by using a computer.
• How to use a wide range of lenses, attachments to take close-up photos.
• How to work with exposure, white balance, and depth of field
• How to set up the Helicon Remote

User Feedback

“Coverage of the subject is extensive and presented with practicality in mind. Getting into macro photography can be expensive but doesn’t have to be. The experience of the instructor clearly shows. I will be returning to these videos many times.”

“I really enjoyed the course. I wanted to know more about macro photography and this course provided all the necessary information. Excellent tutor. No messing about, straight to the point!”

Best for: Advanced photographers interested in close-up and macro with a DSLR

6) Photography Masterclass: A Complete Guide To Photography (Udemy)

Photography Masterclass: A Complete Guide to Photography (Udemy)

Looking for a comprehensive photography class that will help you take your skills to the next level? This Udemy class is a great place to start!

Learn More

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Regularly $109.99 with a 30-day money-back guarantee (price may vary)

Duration

23.5 hours on-demand videos

As the name shows, Photography Masterclass is a complete guide for capturing the best photos.

This course is designed to help with everything that you grow your photography skills and take them to the next level.

If you are keen to take photos of nature, people, animals, or birds, you must know how to light it, edit it or compose a short.

If you excel in these skills, you can make huge money, and make a career in photography.

This course will add to your knowledge about photography and enhance your earning chances.

This online photo course starts with the basics like tackling your camera, gives knowledge about types of lenses, and other equipment that you need to accomplish a bigger goal.

You will not only learn how to use your camera but also your smartphones and tablets to take and edit pictures.

After taking online classes of this course, you will end up being a brand yourself and you can earn through starting a business in photography, because by the end of the course, you will be a confident photographer.

Click here to learn more.

What You Will Learn

• How a camera works in a true sense.
• How to compose and edit images
• How to work in natural and artificial light
• How to balance symmetry, composition, backgrounds, and angles
• How to take the best pictures with smartphones and tablets.
• How to photograph different scenarios such as portrait, landscape, aerial, wildlife, etc.
• How to brighten up your subjects with flash or natural lighting

User Feedback

“This is an excellent, cost-effective and very comprehensive course and I’m so glad to enroll in the class. Even though I don’t have any more equipment than my iPhone 7 Plus, I’ve learned so much from the basics that I might choose to have a DSLR or mirrorless camera in the future. I am extremely grateful of the fact that all three instructors were committed throughput and conveyed their knowledge diligently. Once again, this course is highly recommended!”

“One of the most detailed and beautifully structured courses on photography that takes us from the basics to the advanced lesson with so much ease. Thanks to the mentors for putting in all their efforts for this wonderful course.”

Best for: Aspiring, professional photographers

7) Fundamentals of Photography (CreativeLive)

Fundamentals of Photography (CreativeLive)

Looking to better understand your equipment so you can get the most from it as a new photographer? This beginner's class is the perfect place to begin your journey.

Learn More

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

$99 individually purchased or available with “The Creator Pass” subscription for around $11/month along with a 7-day trial period

Duration

24h 30m of class content

If you want to be one of the best photographers, you must master the basic technicalities of the camera that you are using.

You must have knowledge about the kind of equipment that you need.

The Fundamentals of Photography is an online photo course that will help you boost up your creativity in photography and teach you the essentials of the camera.

These lessons are not ordinary photography classes, but they aid in experiential learning and quality visuals.

These lessons are not only designed for the basic understanding of the photographs but also encourage practicing and experimenting with them.

When you start doing photography and experiment with it, you will feel the need of knowing different ideas and approaches to add more to the beauty of the picture. This course is here to fill the gap and teach these ideas and approaches.

This photography class will help you with different styles of cameras, post-processing, modes in cameras, focusing and lightening techniques. It covers a lot of things that you need as a photographer.

Click here to learn more.

What You Will Learn

• How to corroborate shutter speed, aperture, and image compositions.
• How to use natural lighting for maximum advantage
• How to choose the right gear
• How to work with two different sensor sizes ( basic and compared)
• How to use different lenses such as Fisheye and Tilt & Shift lenses
• How to use various exposure settings ( bracketing, values)
• How to work with pixel shift, noise reduction, selective cloning, and time lapse

User Feedback

“John is one of the best teachers I have ever had. He has a methodical approach and explains things slowly without becoming boring. His experience is very helpful and the material he created for this course is spot on. I could tell years of thought went into every section of this course. Before taking the course, I thought it was going to be out of date but that really was not the case. Everything taught is still very relevant.”

“I’m hooked, John’s presentation was sincere, passionate, personable, and natural. His introduction left me with a desire to learn more. I love the concept of his teaching technique through his own story.”

Best for: Outdoor and travel photographers

8) Portrait Photography Bootcamp (CreativeLive)

Portrait Photography Bootcamp (CreativeLive)

Interested in becoming a portrait photographer? This bootcamp course will have you taking great portraits by the time you finish it.

Learn More

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

$74 individually purchased or available with “The Creator Pass” subscription for around $11/month along with a 7-day trial period

Duration

Approx. 14 hours

Portrait photography is one of the distinguishing skills of any photographer, which is more demanding than many other types of photography.

As humans, we are fond of reflecting on ourselves and on the people we love, and portraits photography is one of the best skills that you can use to take pictures of people that you cherish.

This skill can be used for your business, where you can use portrait portfolios.

Portrait Photography Bootcamp will help you establish a strong foundation for any kind of portrait photography.

It will start at the very beginning and help you establish a foundation for all styles of portrait photography.

This course is one of its own kind, which will help you boost up your portrait skills and it will cover all that you need to know to make an excellent portrait shoot.

It will not only assist you with making portraits, but it will help you with the basic camera settings, like lens selection, lighting, angles, and posing techniques for all kinds of photos.

Click here to learn more.

What You Will Learn

• How to make a good portrait
• How to manage the light environment, expressions, posing, etc.
• How to work with shooting doors, windows, stairs, nature, or your studio with full instructions.
• How to use modifiers and speed lights
• How to shoot full-figured objects (couples, fashion models)
• How to apply studio lighting

User Feedback

“This has been, by far, the best, most helpful course I’ve ever done. Lindsay is amazing and helped me to understand lighting and posing in such a simple, straightforward way that is easy to remember. I would highly recommend this class!”

“Lindsay’s Photography Bootcamp is an answer to my prayer. All lessons are relevant. She is so easy to understand. I am so excited about my photography journey.”

Best for: Professional photographers willing to expand their skillset

9) Photography Basics And Beyond: From Basics To DSLR Specialization (Coursera)

Photography Basics and Beyond: From Smartphone to DSLR (Coursera)

Learn how to create photographs you can be proud of on everything from a DSLR to your phone in this great class.

Enroll For Free

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Free to audit (paid upgrades available)

Duration

6 months (4 hours per week)

This in-depth class helps you pave your way toward a career in photography.

I found it to be an enriching and comprehensive journey into the world of photography. This specialization, consisting of a series of five courses, is meticulously designed to cater to beginners, with no prior experience necessary, making it an ideal starting point for anyone interested in delving into the art of photography.

These complete online photography classes will help you understand basics of compositions, on any photo capturing device, like smartphones, DSLR, mirrorless models, etc.

It will help you to build your skills by giving you creative concepts and tips to make the best photos that you always wanted to capture.

The hands-on projects are particularly beneficial, allowing you to apply the concepts learned in real-world scenarios. This practical approach to learning ensures that you gain a deep understanding of the key concepts and skills.

This course will not only teach you to make the best photos, but it will also give you a certificate of specialization from Michigan State University that will add to your credentials in the photography field.

All in all, this is one of the best free online photography courses out there.

Click here to get started for free.

What You Will Learn

• How to develop a final project of photoshoots
• How to work with frame and vintage points to click old subjects in new, improved ways
• How to use strobe lighting
• How to use focus effects with the help of depth of field
• How to apply the principles of post-photography image management using Adobe Lightroom
• How to use content in photography such as fact to fiction or purely documentary to expressive

User Feedback

“This course was very informative and provided just the right amount of challenge for me to stretch my creativity and newly obtained knowledge. I enjoyed it and I am looking forward to the next course”

“It’s a very good course for beginners and I got to learn a lot and improve my photography in every way possible! I recommend it to everyone who’s interested in Photography and wants to do more with it”.

Best for: Becoming an all-rounder photographer who makes money

A Final Word on Online Photography Classes

The above are some of the best online photography classes you can benefit from as they provide a lot of knowledge about photography skills.

These online learning classes have made our lives easier by providing lessons instantly with one click, but the real thing is the craze and eagerness to learn photography. These classes are going to increase your motivation towards learning photography skills and excel in the field.

But remember, there’s no such thing as a single “best online photography class.” What’s best for one budding photographer might not be a great choice for another. It depends on where you are on your journey, what level your skills are at, and even some personal preference.

Our advice? Take advantage of the free trial offers these online course websites offer and test out some different classes on this list to see which you prefer.

Soon, you’ll be on your way to becoming a photographer!

Have any questions about taking online photography classes? Drop a comment below and we’ll lend a hand.

The post The 9 Best Online Photography Classes You Can Take in 2024 appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

I’ve found that it’s crucial to maintain a reading habit even during these breaks. Regular reading plays a vital role in a child’s development – it fuels their imagination, sharpens analytical thinking, and enhances problem-solving skills. More than that, it broadens their understanding of the world, fostering empathy and communication skills.

But getting kids to pick up a book during holiday time can be challenging. As someone who’s navigated this, I’ve gathered some practical tips to keep your children engaged in reading during their school breaks. Let’s dive in and explore how to make reading a fun part of their holiday routine.

Formulate a Plan

Make a plan with your children before the holiday break starts. Try not to wait until the holiday break is underway to come up with a reading routine.

This plan could include a simple discussion of what reading time each day will look like. If you are looking for more structure, it could also include a calendar or chart with designated reading times.

The best type of plan is one that has a reading goal. You can set a goal of 20 minutes each day, as a minimum. In spite of the hectic days, at least you will have built 20 minutes of reading routine time into your bedtime routine.

You can also have your child draw out their own reading calendar. Putting them in charge of this task will help them take ownership of their reading goals. Add in some stickers and other craft supplies to make it a fun calendar.

Use Apps to Make Reading Fun

Lou Adventures: An Interactive Learning Story for Kids

Lou Adventures is an interactive learning story for kids that helps them improve their reading skills through a fun, adventurous game.

Try It Free!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Another option to switch up the reading routine is to use interactive reading apps, like Lou Adventures.

Lou Adventures is a free app that helps children hone their reading comprehension skills in a fun, engaging way.

Lou, a furry dog character in the app, takes children through different interactive adventures and mysteries. The app asks children questions along the way to check for understanding.

The best part is that you can refer to the dashboard after they have completed their reading time and check their progress.

Check out our Lou Adventures review for an in-depth look at the app.

Click here to try Lou Adventures for free!

Set an Example

Children do what they see. Part of making reading an everyday occurrence, especially over a holiday break, starts with you. Take some time each day and read.

You can read with your child, or you can read your own book while your child is reading. If you have some downtime, which is a rarity for parents and caregivers, take a few minutes to read.

Let your child see you stopping to sit and read. Explain to your children why reading is important to you, and in life. Give them examples of how reading often helps you learn or relax.

You can also make it a point to let them know that you are going to read for 20 minutes. Maybe they will join you!

Allow Children to Choose

Allowing children to choose what they read over break can be a game-changer. Most often in school, children are told what they have to read. This could be their chance to pick out different types of books they will enjoy. These books might not be educational, but the practice of reading is education in itself.

Go somewhere new to pick out books to read over the holiday break. If you frequent the local library and bookstores often, choose another library.

Find a different bookstore in a new town. Some towns have awesome used bookstores that you can visit. There are also virtual used bookstores online that you can order from.

If you make the plan for reading over break early, you can have these books at your doorstep when break begins.

Give it a Theme

Of course, your child can read a mix of books during the holiday break. Another cool idea is to choose a theme for the week. Maybe your child loves mystery, science, or a certain character. You can search for books within the theme of their choice together. Mix up the type of books within your theme, including both fiction and nonfiction.

Make it a Challenge

Who doesn’t love a good challenge? There are many ways to make reading a challenge over holiday breaks. You can find many printable worksheets online that make reading a challenge.

Some of my favorite challenges include a checklist of different types of books (a funny book, a nonfiction book, a book with magic). Other reading challenges are bingo boards that list different types of books. You can add a prize incentive of our choice for each winning bingo line.

Challenge your child to read to their siblings. The book challenge options are plentiful, and it might be a good way to gear your child up for reading over the holiday break.

Designate a Reading Space

The best part about reading is that it can be done anywhere! Books are easy to carry and bring along with you while waiting or traveling. If you plan to be home over most of the holiday break, create a reading space. If you do not have a designated reading space already, adding in a new one could add to the excitement of reading over the break.

A designated reading space does not have to be fancy, though it can be! Some books in a bin with a comfortable place to sit is a great way to start. You can add pillows or a beanbag chair. Fun lighting is always a plus!

If the reading nook is next to a window, natural light sets a great tone.

One important tip is to make sure the books are easily accessible in the reading zone. If children have to leave the reading zone to find another book, it could lead to distraction. Having the books at arm’s reach is key for keeping children focused during their reading time.

Take the Pressure Off

Once you have a plan set for reading over holiday break, you want to try to stick to it as much as possible. But there is a lot of fun and relaxation time that occurs over a holiday break. Let’s not forget the traveling, traditions, and family dinners.

One of the best pieces of advice is to take the pressure off. Some reading is better than zero reading, but remember we want to continue to make reading an enjoyable activity.

Try not to put too much pressure on the reading schedule, but instead focus on building reading in with quality family time.

If it’s the middle of the holiday break and your child seems to be running out of steam, take a break. Switch up the reading activity or reading location. Try again the next day!

Start a Family Book Club

When a family reads together, it makes reading a more normal part of a child’s daily life. You can simply read at the same time, or you can read together with your child.

Choose a long book to read and break it up throughout the holiday break. Another option is to choose a book or series of books that you will discuss as a family.

After the book is complete, gather together and discuss the storyline and the characters. This is a great activity to help with reading comprehension. Its help’s children verbalize what happened in the story.

If you read short books, you can do a family book club after each one. If you read longer books together, you can do a family book club every few days. This activity will keep everyone reading over holiday break, including parents and caregivers.

Engage with Follow-up Activities

Reading books is great, but having children complete follow-up activities for their reading is even more important. This keeps them accountable.

Decide on the types of activities you want to include over break. You can do activities every few days, or every single day, if you have time.

Some art activities can include making a bookmark, drawing a book cover, drawing a character, and creating a new character.

Alternatively, you can choose more literacy-based follow-up activities, such as reading comprehension questions. Have children react to the whole story or different parts of a story. They can write their reactions in words or draw a picture.

You can focus on practicing sight words within the stories for younger readers. For more advanced readers, you can focus on the definitions of words within the stories. Short on prep time? No worries, there are free printable worksheets online for all of your reading and literacy needs.

Whether you choose one item from this list or multiple items, the most important thing is not to make this feel like homework! We want children to be excited to read.

What are some other tips to keep kids reading during holiday breaks? Share them with us by commenting below.

The post How to Keep Kids Reading During Holiday Breaks from School appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Plus, with various options to suit different budgets and interests, they’re an ideal gift from grandparents or relatives, helping maintain a year-long connection with each exciting delivery.

I’ve reviewed and ranked some of our favorite kids subscription boxes for the holidays, including picks based on their quality, ease of use, entertainment factor, customer reviews, and price  (click here to learn about our entire Editorial Process & Methodology for product reviews).

1. KiwiCo Crates

Top Pick

STEM, STEAM & Science Kits for Kids | KiwiCo

KiwiCo's monthly STEM, STEAM, and Science kits spark fun and learning with their one-of-a-kind hands-on activities kids of all ages love.

Learn More

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Subscriptions on sale for $15.95/month this holiday season (regularly $23.95/mo). One-off purchase options and classroom kits also available.

Recommended Age

KiwiCo makes sure every age group is covered and provides age-appropriate engaging custom content for the following age groups:

• 0-24 months (Panda Crate)
• 2-4 years (Koala Crate)
• 5-8 years (Kiwi Crate)
• 6-11 years (Atlas Crate)
• 6-14 years (Yummy Crate)
• 9-14 years (Tinker Crate)
• 9-16 years (Doodle Crate)
• 12-100 years (Eureka Crate)
• 14-100 years (Maker Crate)

KiwiCo offers subscription crates for all children, ages 0-18, and even children at heart. Their crates have an adorable animal-themed label based on the age group and interest level.

KiwiCo has done extensive research to make sure that the content of each crate is not only engaging to the specific age group, but also safe and age-appropriate.

Some projects require age-specific skills, however, KiwiCo has done a great job making sure there is an age range to help you choose the right subscription box for your child, not only based on age, but also based on categories, or areas of interest.

KiwiCo also offers crates for classrooms that align with NGSS and Common Core teaching standards so that you can supplement a student’s in-class activities, or give a subscription to your favorite homeschooler.

Key Features

• Quiz to match crate to child
• Incredible level of customization (based on age, area of interest, budget or shipping frequency)
• STEM-focused activities (hands-on learning through building and critical thinking)
• Engaging “learning through play” activities
• High-quality crate content
• 3-, 6-, or 12-month subscriptions
• NGSS and Common Core-aligned content

Click here to shop KiwiCo now.

2. Little Passports

Price

• $24.95/month for 12-month subscription, billed every 12 months
• $28.95/month for 6-month subscription, billed every 6 months
• $30.95/month for month-to-month subscription

Recommended Age

Available in 8 different categories that are based on age and interest, you are sure to find a perfect match for your child:

• 3-5 years (Early Explorers and Animals Wild)
• 5-8 years (Science Junior)
• 6-8 years (Space Quest)
• 6-10 years (World Edition)
• 7+ years (Kitchen Adventures)
• 8+ years (Science Expedition)
• 8-12 years (USA Edition)

Little Passports offers “passports” for your child to travel to in any area of their interest: from art to STEM to animals, children will playfully learn through exploration each time they open a subscription box.

For example, with the World Edition box, children can explore the world, learn about geography, be exposed to different cultures, and gain an appreciation for cultural diversity. The Kitchen Adventures box will offer your child step-by-step cooking instructions and provide many (if not all) of the ingredients to help create yummy dishes or desserts. Aside from keeping kids busy, they will also learn valuable life skills, such as cutting vegetables, safe cooking in the kitchen, or even following directions.

The theme-based subscription boxes have a key theme for each month, with supporting books, games, and an arts-and-crafts component to make sure that all learning styles are engaged. This also reinforces the lessons the children learn through play and interaction, keeping them interested and excited about each box content they receive.

Key Features

• Shopping filter by age group, interest area, and budget range
• Great STEM toy options for all ages
• Age-appropriate picks based on developmental stages of child
• High-quality toys
• Parent-approved, Award-winning selections (Parents’ Picks Award Winner 2021)
• Theme-aligned workbooks, experiments, and games to focus on one key idea with multi-disciplinary learning (art, reading, math, science-all on one)
• Perfect school learning supplement for extra-curriculars

Click here to learn more.

3. MEL Science

Price

Starting at $29.90/month

Recommended Age

MEL Science offers subscription kits for all ages, from 4 to 99, and each box subscription has a different main theme:

• 4-7+ years (Coding)
• 5-10+ years (STEM)
• 8-12+ years (Math)
• 8-14+ years (Physics)
• 10-16+ years (Chemistry)
• 14-99+ years (Medicine)

With over 100 different hands-on projects to choose from, your child will never be bored. Every month, they will be excited and positively challenged to explore new science concepts.

The kits are geared toward specific age groups to offer age-appropriate content to ensure that each child is challenged at their proper academic and developmental level.

MEL Science also offers school and group orders, making this a great fit for small homeschool groups, Montessori schools, or micro-schools.

If you are an educator, MEL Science kits take the lesson planning and prep work off your plate. Everything the child needs to successfully complete the different projects is included in the kit (with small exceptions of certain household ingredients).

You can use the physics or the chemistry subscription box to supplement the academic theory lessons.

The content is exciting and fun, making boring science concepts like electricity come alive. For example, in one kit, your child will build a mini rocket ship.

Applying science concepts, thinking critically, solving problems with creativity, and learning from trial and error are all amazing skills that foster innovation and invention.

Key Features

• Boxed-kit engaging science experiments for every age
• Digital connection (optional) to enhance the hands-on experience
• Video guides to help with the lesson
• Augmented reality connection for an immersive learning experience
• Choose one or more science subjects
• Classroom-quality experiments

Click here to learn more.

4. Universal Yum

Price

Starting at $16/box

Recommended Age

The Universal Yum box is a great gift idea for children of any age, from 3 years old to adult. Although some of the educational trivia is mostly geared toward children ages 8-12, it can be used by younger children with adult help.

Who’d think that snacks can be educational? If you are looking for a fun way to supplement your child’s geography lessons, or simply introduce them to different world cultures and foods, the Universal Yum is a fun and fairly inexpensive way to do just that. More fun than receiving a gift card to a local restaurant, the Universal Yum subscription brings you different countries to your doorstep every month, with a booklet that explains each snack, and has useful and quirky trivia about that specific country, as well. Your child can also rank their top 5 choices of snacks and compare with friends, who get the Universal Yum box, as well. With this box subscription, you can send a monthly sweet gift, and the recipients will experience a world-class culinary journey.

Note: Keep in mind that some snacks might taste unusual, whether it’s spicy, sour, or not a customary flavor (for example, fried egg and sea salt chips). Universal Yum boxes are for children who are somewhat open to trying new flavors.

Also, please check the ingredients for allergy-specific info, should your child have any dietary restrictions, or health issues. Contact Universal Yum, if you are unsure.

Key Features

• Sweet and savory snacks from different countries every month
• Informational booklet with activities, such as trivia and recipes
• “Pick your Country” feature
• Review past favorites online
• Option to reorder favorites individually (for yourself, or as gifts to share) in the Universal Yum shop

Click here to learn more.

5. Music Library Box

Price

Starting at $40/month

Recommended Age

The Music Library Box is for any child from age 4 to 12, geared mainly towards the early elementary school years.

With music programs disappearing from many schools, it is more important than ever to foster and cultivate musical talent and music appreciation in children outside the traditional teaching venue on an everyday basis.

Research shows that music is very important for a child’s brain development, but also helps in many other areas of a child’s academic and personal success.

Music is also a key elective subject that assists in other areas in life, not only with math, but also with creative thinking, stress management, and artistic expression.

The Music Library Box was founded by a retired music teacher of over 20 years. It introduces different instruments, music genres, and music theory, as well as music appreciation with the help of hands-on instruments, books, and activities.

It also includes interactive digital content that enhances the learning experience.

Your child will learn how to play different instruments with ease through playful interaction. This is a great way for your child to experiment and explore which instrument they enjoy playing, without breaking the bank, or committing to just one instrument too early.

Even if you are not musically inclined, you can give the gift of music to a child, as the included lessons will make it a breeze for them to learn on their own.

Key Features

• Connection between music and art, language arts, math, or logic
• Great quality box content and instruments
• Online access to exclusive content
• Printable downloads
• Activity booklets
• Access to video music lessons

Click here to learn more.

6. We Craft Box

Price

• $34.99/monthly
• $99.99 for 3 months
• $189.99 for 6 months
• $359.99 for 12 months

Recommended Age

The We Craft Box activities are geared toward children of ages 3-9, with some activities needing adult help with younger artists, depending on their skill level, and their gross and fine motor skills.

Arts and crafts can be stressful and messy sometimes, but they don’t have to be. With the We Craft Box subscription, your child can get monthly art projects delivered directly to the mailbox.

With everything needed included, you will foster the inner artist in every child, encourage them to express themselves, help them learn about art appreciation, color theory, different art styles, and encourage them to develop their gross and fine motor skills.

Art also fosters creativity and imagination in your child, something that is key to healthy early child development.

With the We Craft Box, you can focus on making fun memories with your child rather than having to plan and prep an art activity. Also, the supplies that come in the subscription box are of really nice quality so that your child sees your commitment to art. The We Craft Box gets the kids away from computer screens and helps them engage with different mediums, using their hands and eyes.

The children can reuse the non-consumables (such as watercolor or clay) over and over, practicing the skills they learned while creating new masterpieces.

The art projects are great for display, but also make for great gifts to showcase the child’s creativity and mastery.

Source: We Craft Box Website

Key Features

• 4-5 pre-kitted activities per box, with everything needed included (with the exception of scissors)
• High-quality art supplies
• Step-by-step directions and video tutorials for no-stress teaching
• One box can be used for two crafters
• A themed story is included

Click here to learn more.

7. Green Kids Crafts

Price

Starting at $28.95/month

Recommended Age

• 3-5 year olds (Junior Box)
• 5-10+ year olds (Discovery Box)

Green Kids Crafts subscription box comes packed with STEAM activities. STEAM stands for Science, Technology, Engineering, Art, and Math-including art to balance right-brain thinking with left-brain thinking.

You can order individual activities, or surprise your child with a box of a handful theme-based activities that include anything from a STEM building project to an art project that is all about bees.

Key Features

• 4-6 science and art projects
• 12-page magazine
• Choose individual science experiment boxes or mystery bundle packs

Click here to learn more.

Final Thoughts

Whether you’re a parent, a grandparent, a relative, or an educator, you’ll appreciate the thoughtfulness that goes into each subscription box to help your child or student thrive developmentally, as well as educationally.

The best way to learn is through play, and each featured box subscription service incorporates that concept.

With so many different subscription boxes to choose from, we reviewed the top choices for each major academic and skill-set category, such as STEM, music or arts.

Once you know what interests match your child’s interests and which skills you would like to foster and support with an annual subscription, simply select the appropriate subscription plan based on age and size.

Have any questions about our guide to subscription boxes kids will love this holiday season? Comment below so we can help.

The post Top 7 Best Kids Subscription Boxes for the Holidays appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

The best educational streaming platforms offer a treasure trove of content that is not only engaging and entertaining but also aligns with educational standards and fosters intellectual growth.

In this article, I’ll guide you through the top platforms that I’ve found to offer exceptional educational content that kids find both fun and interesting (click here to learn about our entire Editorial Process & Methodology for product reviews).

What are the Best Educational Streaming Services?

1. Noggin

Noggin – Interactive learning with the trusted characters your kids love.

With over 1,000 educational games, videos, and activities developed by experts, Noggin offers a fun, interactive, and highly effective learning experience for kids ages 2 to 7.

Start Your Free Trial!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Cost: $7.99/month (see our Noggin pricing guide)

Noggin is a whole lot more than just a regular streaming service. Yes, there is an extensive library of beloved children’s shows and characters that have a focus on early childhood development and offer a safe and enriching digital environment for their children, but the app has a whole lot more to explore.

What I love about Noggin is that the platform offers a wide variety of interactive educational games, eBooks, and activities featuring popular Nickelodeon characters like Dora the Explorer, PAW Patrol, and Blue’s Clues. These beloved characters guide children through educational adventures that encourage cognitive and social development, laying a strong foundation for their future learning.

As a teacher, I can tell you that Noggin covers nearly all aspects of early childhood development. It’s designed for kids 2 to 7, teaching them basic skills in math, reading, creative thinking, and more. Through a combination of interactive content and web exercises, the platform helps children hone their grammar and pronunciation skills.

Noggin has established itself as a trusted choice for parents and caregivers seeking a platform that combines education and entertainment to nurture young minds and prepare them for a lifetime of learning. It’s one of the best educational apps for kids.

Noggin offers a 30-day free trial to all new customers and is $7.99 a month thereafter. Check out our Noggin review for more details.

2. Curiosity Stream

Cost: $4.99/month

Curiosity Stream is a streaming service specifically dedicated to educational documentaries and non-fiction programming. While it largely caters to an adult audience, it does have some dedicated content suitable for children and families.

Curiosity Stream’s kids content library offers a rich array of educational documentaries and series that cover a wide range of subjects, from nature and science to history and technology. The platform provides children with the opportunity to explore topics in-depth, fostering a sense of curiosity and a love for learning.

Parents and educators can use Curiosity Stream to complement classroom learning and encourage independent exploration.

3. PBS Kids

Cost: Free

PBS Kids is one of my go-to kids streaming apps because it’s completely free and high quality. That’s right, you can watch every single show it streams at no cost at all.

With its strong focus on early childhood education, PBS Kids cements itself as one of the best educational streaming services available, period. It has a treasure trove of videos and games featuring multiple beloved characters from various shows, such as Sesame Street, Arthur, Curious George, etc.

The service is well-known and beloved by many for its commitment to great educational quality. It ensures all content is age-appropriate and intellectually stimulating enough to implant something useful in the children who watch it.

PBS Kids tries to explain and ingrain essential skills such as literacy, problem-solving, and creativity in children through its engaging and entertaining programs.

Parents can confidently allow their children to explore the platform freely for hours on end. It even has interactive games to retain engagement and reinforce learning concepts, making education a fun endeavor instead of a challenging one.

4. Disney+

Cost: $13.99/month

Disney+ is pretty much a household name, especially if you’ve got kids at home. Known for its vast array of family-friendly shows, including those timeless animated classics, Pixar adventures, and superhero tales, it’s a go-to for family movie nights. But there’s more to Disney+ than just entertainment.

In the Kids section, you’ll find a mix of fun and educational content that’s perfect for kids of all ages. But what really sets Disney+ apart is its cool collection of National Geographic documentaries. These aren’t just any shows – they’re windows into the world, teaching kids about nature, science, and geography in a way that’s super engaging.

What I love about Disney+ is how it’s committed to offering content that’s just right for kids – it sparks their curiosity and gets their creative juices flowing. It’s the kind of platform that encourages kids to ask ‘why’ and ‘how,’ nurturing logical thinking and a deeper understanding of the world. For parents aiming to raise inquisitive, well-informed kids, Disney+ is a treasure trove.

5. Amazon Prime Video Kids

Cost: $14.99month

Amazon Prime Video offers a dedicated section known as Prime Video Kids, which is filled with a vast library of educational shows, animated series, and movies suitable for children of all ages. This streaming service combines entertainment with educational value, making it a valuable resource for parents and educators.

Prime Video Kids features popular animated series such as “Paw Patrol,” “SpongeBob SquarePants,” and “Dora the Explorer.” These shows not only entertain but also provide opportunities for children to learn about problem-solving, teamwork, and creativity.

In addition to the beloved series, Prime Video Kids offers educational content that covers a wide range of subjects. This diverse content ensures that children have access to both entertaining and informative programming.

Overall, Amazon Prime Video Kids is an excellent choice for families looking to balance entertainment and education. The platform provides a wide variety of content, catering to different age groups and interests, and is easily accessible through an Amazon Prime subscription.

You can try Amazon Prime free for 30 days.

6. HappyKids

Cost: Free

HappyKids is a fantastic, free streaming service that’s all about kids and their learning journey. It’s like a one-stop shop for a whole bunch of kid-friendly content that’s not only fun but also educational.

As a teacher, I like that it has everything from those catchy nursery rhymes that little ones love, to cool science and history videos for the older kids. It’s great for keeping them entertained, but they’re also picking up new things without even realizing it.

What’s really neat about HappyKids is how it caters to kids at different learning stages. Whether you’ve got a preschooler, a kid in early elementary, or a pre-teen, there’s something for each one. This makes it super easy for parents or teachers to find shows and videos that match your kids’ ages and what you want them to learn.

Final Thoughts

Educational streaming services can be a really great tool for enriching your child’s learning journey. From the comprehensive learning experience offered by Noggin to the timeless classics on Disney+, these platforms provide more than just entertainment — they are gateways to knowledge, creativity, and curiosity.

Whether you’re a parent, teacher, or caregiver, these streaming services are valuable tools in your arsenal to make learning both fun and impactful for the children in your care.

Have any questions about our guide to the best educational streaming services? Let us know by commenting below.

The post The 8 Best Educational Streaming Services for Kids appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

That’s why learning how to manage your time effectively is so important. Unfortunately, research reveals that an astonishing 82% of individuals do not employ any form of time management system. If you have poor time management, you’ll constantly feel stressed out and upset, and you’ll never get to spend time doing the things you really want to do.

The good news is I believe taking online time management classes is one of the most effective ways to learn how to make the most of your time and manage it like a pro.

I’ve reviewed and ranked the best time management courses based on numerous factors, including quality of curriculum, teacher credentials, student reviews, cost, ease of access, and more (click here to learn about our entire Editorial Process & Methodology for product reviews).

What are the Best Time Management Courses Online?

Here are my personal favorites for the best time management courses online in 2024:

1. Time Management for Boosting Productivity (MEW Learning)
2. Productivity & Time Management Strategies for Goal Setting & Eliminating Distractions (Skillshare)
3. Get Productive: Time Management Hacks, Strategies and Tools! (Skillshare)
4. One Minute Habits for Success (LinkedIn Learning)
5. Productivity and Time Management for the Overwhelmed (Udemy)
6. Work from Home – Work Life Balance and Time Management (Udemy)
7. Work Smarter, Not Harder: Time Management for Personal & Professional Productivity (Coursera)

Keep reading to learn how to master your time effectively and efficiently, smoothly excelling at all that you do as a result!

1. Time Management for Boosting Productivity (MEW Learning)

Time Management for Boosting Productivity | MEW Learning

This time management course offers clear, proven strategies to help you prioritize tasks, cut out distractions, and get more accomplished.

Enroll Now

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

$49.99

Duration

56 lessons over 3.5 hours

If you’re someone who wants to accomplish more with your time in any facet of your life, this is the course for you.

With over 50 insightful video lessons taught by 3-time bestselling Amazon author Alex Genadinik, you will learn to implement effective time management strategies, from task prioritization and goal setting to mastering your own personal productivity habits.

This course also covers valuable topics such as eliminating distractions, overcoming procrastination, getting quality sleep to improve productivity, and leveraging technology for maximum efficiency.

I love the real-world case studies and step-by-step guidance — it’s huge for building confidence and knowledge to take control of your time, focus on your goals, and reach your full potential.

Whether you’re a student, teacher, entrepreneur, employee, parent, or anyone else, I really believe this course can help you maximize your productivity and make the most of every moment. This course is also great for companies who want to train their entire team to manage their time more efficiently.

Enroll today and start learning how to get more done in less time!

You Will Learn

• How to immediately free up time by automating and outsourcing daily tasks
• Strategies for eliminating distractions from your day
• Ways to use technology to optimize your productivity
• Tips for sustaining motivation and focus on tasks
• Task prioritization techniques
• How sleep, exercise, and diet can affect your productivity
• Best practices for setting goals and reaching them

Best For: Anyone who needs to use their time more effectively

2. Productivity & Time Management Strategies for Goal Setting & Eliminating Distractions (Skillshare)

Productivity & Time Management Strategies for Goal Setting & Eliminating Distractions (Skillshare)

This time management course uses a proven productivity methodology to show you how to get more done in less time with less stress. Become more productive in all areas of your life, from business to at home.

Try Skillshare Free for One Month!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Skillshare offers a 1-Month Free Trial. After that, the price is $165 per year.

Duration

22 lessons over 2.5 hours

Want to learn how to get more stuff done in less time? And want to get more done without working yourself to death?

This time management class is a complete master course that will show you a proven productivity methodology that helps you accomplish your goals all without exhausting yourself.

Thousands of students have taken this Skillshare course, using it to maximize productivity by taking their time management skills to the next level. And the overwhelming majority of students reported that this time management course exceeded their expectations.

You can try Skillshare free for one month and take this and other online courses at no cost during that time. Skillshare is one of the best online courses websites out there today.

You Will Learn

• The effective time management skills top performers use to get more done in less time
• How to set goals and develop step-by-step plans for getting them done
• How to hyperfocus on your most important tasks while eliminating distractions
• How to organize your day to get more done
• How to be productive in all aspects of your life
• How to make sure you have time for the things that matter most in your life and improve work-life balance

User Feedback

“If you want real practical and understandable advice on using the most valuable resource you have, your time, then this course is the BEST. If you think you don’t have time to take this course then you really need it!”

Best For: Anyone who wants to reduce stress by getting more done in less time and improve work-life balance

3. Get Productive: Time Management Hacks, Strategies, and Tools! (Skillshare)

Get Productive: Time Management Hacks, Strategies and Tools! (Skillshare)

This class is the complete resource on time management and productivity, helping professionals better manage their teams and create a more productive company culture.

Try Skillshare Free for One Month!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Skillshare offers a 1-Month Free Trial. After that, the price is $165 per year. Check our Skillshare pricing guide for more info.

Duration

39 lessons over 3+ hours

Do you lack motivation and willpower? Want to overhaul your habits?

This time management class will teach you the principles and strategies needed to become a master of productivity. You’ll master the basic tenets of productivity, including multitasking, overcoming procrastination, and dealing with information overload.

This course is specifically aimed at professionals, helping students become more productive at project management, meetings, dealing with employees, and more. It also teaches ways to be more productive outside of work with things like achieving your health and fitness goals.

You can try Skillshare free for one month and take this course at no cost during that time.

You Will Learn

• The 4 quadrants of productivity for better time management skills
• How to develop willpower, motivation, good habits, and smart decision making
• How to manage your team, run more productive meetings, improve your commutation skills with your team, and build a better culture at your company
• Actionable plans to help you go from knowing to doing
• The keys to successful project management

User Feedback

“It covers everything you need for you to become a more productive and efficient version of yourself.”

Best For: Managers who want to run their teams and organizations more efficiently; anyone in project management

4. One Minute Habits for Success (LinkedIn Learning)

Price

One-month free trial, then $39.99/month to access

Duration

4 chapters spread over 40 minutes

Practice makes perfect – that’s the age-old phrase that has somehow stuck around, and it’s proven to be gold.

Time management skills are all about effectively managing the tasks you have to fit them into a concise time frame without compromising on quality or suffering from burnout.

Sounds pretty difficult, doesn’t it?

Well, the surefire way to achieve this is to practice, practice, and practice. Because what does practice do? It forms habits, and habits stick around.

Ask any successful person around you, they’ll have a list of go-to habits that they put in action whenever they’re faced with a challenging task.

In this online time management course, that’s what they focus on: habit building. It might seem like a bit much to dedicate an entire course to habit building, but it’s really an art that you’ll learn to appreciate once you’re through with this course.

Your instructor Scott Mautz, author of Leading from the Middle and part of IU faculty, has come to know human nature in great detail in his many years in the industry. As such, he focuses on short, one-minute habits that won’t let the all too common human qualities of procrastination and laziness get in the way.

With Scott’s energetic nature and drive for teaching, his time management training course will leave you with invaluable life skills.

LinkedIn Learning offers a free one-month trial, which is a great opportunity to take this class at no cost.

You Will Learn

• Utilizing your existing skills to your advantage
• The importance of resetting
• Building self-confidence
• Performing under high-pressure situations
• Habit building that lasts
• The importance of practice – and how to do the most of it
• Building your customized routine for all-around success
• Navigating procrastination – and making sure it doesn’t come back

Best for: Individuals striving to get into habit building and use it to effectively manage time and gain control of their daily life

5. Productivity and Time Management for the Overwhelmed (Udemy)

Price

Regularly $79.99 (price may vary at times)

Duration

32 lectures spread out over almost 2 hours

It’s easy to feel overwhelmed in today’s hectic world that keeps throwing information, dates, and deadlines at you left, right, center. But the important thing is knowing how to curb this feeling of overwhelm by effectively managing the most precious resource you have: time.

If you’re looking to do just that and beat your procrastination then this is just the time management course for you!

Split up into three tacitly developed sections, this time management class focuses on tackling major obstacles to managing your time effectively while also educating you on proven ways to make the most of what you have.

Taught by Josh Paulsen, he has spent more than 15 years leading organizations and helping clients and students achieve their full potential.

Having traversed into the realm of science and psychology, Josh has developed a grasp over the working of the human mind, using what he’s learned to apply it to successful time management training techniques.

You Will Learn

• Managing sensations of overwhelm
• Planning
• Limiting multitasking
• Energy management
• Beating procrastination
• The importance of sleep
• Settling mood, energy, and emotional states for success
• Increasing productivity
• Effective time management techniques

User Feedback

“The course was highly interesting. A couple of things, I was already doing here and there, but had no idea what an impact they have on productivity and focus. I’ll have to implement them more often. I learned a whole lot more techniques that I can’t wait to try a few of them out and find out which ones or which combinations work best for me so that my head isn’t so chaotic and I can be even more helpful to my colleagues and other areas of my life.”

Best for: Individuals who feel overwhelmed going about their daily routines and want to boost productivity

6. Work from Home – Work Life Balance and Time Management (Udemy)

Price

Regularly $99.99 (price may vary at times)

Duration

50 lectures spread over approximately 5.5 hours

The onslaught of the COVID-19 pandemic meant that thousands of individuals shifted to a work-from-home position. And while it means that you can get that extra 30 minutes of sleep and stick to the pajamas a little longer, it also means that you no longer have access to that exclusive work environment where productivity is buzzing in the air.

This online time management course is designed to help you manage your newfound freedom without losing sight of the reins and still churning out productivity on the daily.

Whether you’re self-employed, working for a corporation, or simultaneously juggling multiple roles while also making your mark in the business world, this course teaches you how to make the best of your situation and utilize time and resources effectively.

Taught by professional speaking duo Joeel and Natalie Rivera, they combine their skills in public speaking, training and coaching to help individuals realize their best self. Gaining experience from their years of running Transformation Services – a company focusing on life coach training and personal empowerment – and Joeel’s time as a psychology professor specializing in counselling and education, the duo imparts valuable advice with concrete steps to help each individual carve the path that is best for them. All they ask is that you bring a can-do attitude and see how your life changes!

You Will Learn

• Learning balance
• Reducing stress
• Time management techniques & key skills
• Reducing burnout
• Establishing effective boundaries
• Deliberate goal creation
• Practical tools to tackle any time crunch situation
• The importance of recovery
• Scheduling
• Creating effective to-do lists
• Ins and outs of emailing
• Delegating tasks
• Setting achievable goals

User Feedback

“Awesome!! It helped me to find a positive approach in my day to day activities which I can now implement in my personal and professional life. Facts have been delivered very well with the logic behind them fully explained.”

Best for: Entrepreneurs, self-employed individuals, independent contractors, and people working from home looking to effectively manage their time

7. Work Smarter, Not Harder: Time Management for Personal & Professional Productivity (Coursera)

Price

Included with 7,000+ other courses with Coursera Plus subscription ($59/mo). Try Coursera Plus free for 7 days. See our Coursera pricing guide for more info.

Duration

4 weeks with 2 to 3 hours of content in each week

Work smarter, not harder – that’s the mantra of a million successful people. After all, you’ve only got so much to give, so why burn yourself out trying to give more energy when you could just work smarter? It’s what will keep you going in the long run and you’ll soon see – and feel – the benefits.

In this online time management training, the aim is to help individuals recognize what work is worth doing, and how much effort a certain task requires. While it’s great to give your all when working on a task, there is a thing called too much effort. This is a point where the amount of effort you’re exerting is in disproportion to the results you’re getting.

A University of California offered time management course, the content is rigorous and tested – a sure recipe for success.

Margaret Meloni, instructor at the University of California’s Irvine Division of Continuing Education takes you through this course, using her ample experience in the field to deliver course instruments in a way that they resonate with the student. She takes her time when teaching, and makes sure to value comprehension over quantity, being mindful to not jam too much into each session. Her compassion for learning and imparting knowledge truly makes her course stand out.

You Will Learn

• Planning for personal goals
• Planning for professional goals
• Crisis management
• Building a unique perspective in varying situations
• The barriers of successful time management – and how to overcome them
• Resource management with factor evaluation
• Recognize the importance of saying no – and when to do so
• Effective, stress-free delegation

User Feedback

“Outstanding course with a simple & practical suggestions on time management and improving personal & professional productivity. Narratives of clients is very well used to understand the concept. Thank you very much for making a difference in our personal & professional life through this course.”

Best for: Individuals who feel themselves to be burnt out and want to utilize their time more effectively – great for students and busy professionals

Other Useful Resources

• The Best Public Speaking Classes Online
• The Best Instructional Design Training Courses Online
• The Best Voice Over Training Courses Online
• The Best Photoshop Classes Online
• The Best Personal Development Courses Online

Final Thoughts

Balancing various aspects of life can be challenging, but mastering time management through online courses can transform how you get the most out of every minute, enhancing productivity and peace of mind.

These skills are key to success in any field, and the courses we’ve highlighted go beyond basic scheduling techniques. They explore the psychology of time use, offering insights into motivation and decision-making, and provide strategies to align your daily routines with your goals.

With these comprehensive online courses, you can quickly learn to manage your time more effectively, setting you on a path to personal and professional fulfillment.

The post The 7 Best Time Management Training Classes Online (2024) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

That’s why it’s so vital to have a good time management plan in place. By taking the time to plan your day and schedule your activities, you can make sure that you’re making the most of your time both in the classroom and out, helping you cut down on the obscenely long hours many teachers report working.

In the guide below, I’ll share some of my favorite time management tips for teachers that I’ve learned after spending years in education.

Time Management for Boosting Productivity | MEW Learning

This time management course offers clear, proven strategies to help you prioritize tasks, cut out distractions, and get more accomplished.

Enroll Now

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Teacher Time Management Tips & Ideas

1. Start your day with a plan

Before you begin each day, make sure you have a written plan for what you want to accomplish.

Personally, I recommend writing this plan at the end of the previous school day and then reviewing it in the morning before you start your day.

This way, you can hit the ground running as soon as you arrive at school and won’t waste any time getting started on your tasks.

This doesn’t have to be anything fancy or detailed; a simple list of the tasks you need to complete and goals for the day will suffice.

But by taking the time to think about what you need to do ahead of time, you can save yourself a lot of time and stress throughout the day.

2. Use a planner for long-term structure

As a teacher, having a planner with your lesson plans, meetings, key deadlines, and important dates is essential.

This will help you stay organized and on top of everything that’s happening both in and out of the classroom.

But in addition to using your planner for daily and weekly tasks, you can also use it to plan for larger projects that are due down the road.

For example, if you know you have a big Parent-Teacher Conference coming up in a few weeks, make sure to start planning for it now.

By setting aside planning time to do this, you can avoid scrambling at the last minute and feeling overwhelmed.

Not only that, but having a planner that outlines everything going on in your classroom can be useful if a substitute teacher has to step in at any point.

This way, they can easily follow your lesson plans and keep the students on track while you’re gone.

3. Prioritize tasks

There’s no shortage of tasks on your to-do list as a teacher.

And with so many different things that teachers manage, it can be tempting to try and do everything at once.

But the truth is, that’s just not possible. And when you try to take on too much at once, you end up feeling overwhelmed and stressed out.

Instead of trying to do everything at once, focus on one task at a time, from the most important and urgent to the least.

By prioritizing important tasks, you can ensure that you’re giving each task the attention it deserves and making progress on the things that are most essential.

In the excellent online time management class “Time Management for Boosting Productivity,” you can learn some highly effective tactics for prioritizing tasks in your daily life.

4. Do your hardest tasks first

Speaking of prioritizing your important tasks, that also usually means doing the most difficult tasks on your to do list first.

I know it can be tempting to push these tasks off until later, but the truth is, they’re not going to get any easier the longer you wait.

And the longer you put them off, the more anxious and stressed you’ll feel.

So instead of procrastinating, just bite the bullet and get started on your to do list.

You’ll be surprised at how much better you feel once you get them out of the way.

5. Set time limits for tasks

When you’re working on a task, it can be easy to lose track of time and end up spending much longer on it than you intended.

To avoid this, set a timer for yourself or your students and make sure you stick to it.

This will help you stay on track during the day in your classroom and ensure that you’re using your time efficiently.

6. Assign homework strategically to free up class time

When it comes to managing time in the classroom, one of the most important things experienced teachers learn is how to balance the repetition of key concepts in the classroom versus assigning homework to free up class time.

If you assign too much homework, students will feel overwhelmed and may not have enough time to complete it.

But if you don’t assign any homework, you’ll likely have to spend more time in the classroom rehashing concepts that could be better mastered at home by putting the information taught in class into practice.

The key is to find a balance between the two and assign homework strategically.

This way, you can make the most of your time in the classroom and ensure that students are mastering key concepts both at home and in school.

7. Use technology to be more efficient

These days, there are more tools for teachers than ever that can help you save time on everything from grading assignments to planning lectures.

From online gradebooks and quiz makers to lesson plan creators and digital calendars, there’s a tool out there to help with just about every aspect of your job.

And while it’s important to not get too reliant on technology, using it in moderation can definitely help you be more efficient and organized in your work.

So if you’re feeling overwhelmed by all the things you have to do as a teacher, consider using some technology to help you out.

8. Set routines for each day of the week

Having a well-established routine can go a long way to helping you more effectively manage your time as a teacher.

Many teachers have found it helpful to have a specific routine or theme for each day of the week.

For instance, Mondays might be for lesson planning for the upcoming week, Wednesdays might be for grading assignments, and Fridays could be for sending emails to parents recapping the week’s events.

Or you might have a different routine for each period of the day.

Whatever you decide, having a set routine will help you use your time more efficiently and make sure you’re covering all the bases in your job.

9. Know when to say “no”

Every teacher knows how easy it can be to get sucked into doing things that are outside of your job description.

Whether it’s joining a committee, volunteering for an after-school event, or something else, there are always going to be extra things that come up that you’re expected to do.

But it’s important to know your limits and not try to do too much. Otherwise, you’ll quickly find yourself feeling overwhelmed and bogged down.

So when you’re asked to do something that’s outside of your job, really think about whether or not you have the time to commit to it and a desire to do it.

If you do, go for it!

But if you don’t, don’t be afraid to say no.

It’s better to focus on doing a few things well than to try to do too many things and end up doing all of them poorly.

10. Delegate tasks when possible

At the end of the day, the buck stops with you as a teacher for how your classroom operates, but that doesn’t mean you have to do everything on your own.

If you have an assistant or aide in your classroom, make sure to delegate tasks to them when possible.

This will free up your time so you can focus on the things that only you can do, like lesson planning and grading.

And if you don’t have an assistant or aide, see if there are any other teachers in your school who you can collaborate with.

For instance, you might be able to team up to share resources and lesson plans.

And don’t be afraid to use your students for basic tasks like passing out materials or taking attendance.

Get them involved in the running of the classroom and you’ll be surprised at how much time it can save you while also teaching them some responsibility.

11. Take advantage of downtime

There will be moments throughout the day when you have some down time, whether it’s while students are completing an assignment or during a free period.

Instead of using this time to check your personal email or surf the internet, use it to get ahead on grading or do some other task that’s been weighing on you.

This way, you can use your time more efficiently and finish your work sooner.

12. Take breaks

It can be all too easy to let teaching take over every minute of your day, but it’s important to take some time for yourself.

Make sure to schedule in some breaks throughout the day, even if it’s just a few minutes here and there.

Use this time to step away from your work and clear your head.

You’ll come back feeling refreshed and ready to tackle whatever else is on your plate.

Taking breaks can also help you avoid the dreaded teacher burnout.

13. Keep your personal life on point

As a teacher, you give your all to your students and your job.

But it’s just as important to make sure you’re taking care of yourself, both mentally and physically.

If your personal life is a mess, it will quickly start to affect your work.

So make sure you’re maintaining a healthy lifestyle, spending time with loved ones, and doing things that make you happy outside of work.

This will help you be your best self when you’re at school and prevent burnout.

Final Thoughts

As a teacher, there are a million and one things to get done in a day. From lesson planning and classroom management to working with individual students and grading papers, the list of tasks never seems to end.

That’s why time management skills are so important for teachers.

By following these time management tips, you can take control of your time, get more done, and feel less stressed out in the process.

I also highly recommend checking out the online course “Time Management for Boosting Productivity“. It’s an in-depth class with 50+ video lessons on time management and productivity that everyone can learn something from.

So what are you waiting for? Start implementing these tips today and see how much easier your days become.

Have any questions about our time management tips for teachers? Want to add your own tip for building time management skills? Share your thoughts by leaving a comment below.

The post 13 Time Management Tips for Teachers to Be More Effective appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

In the guide below, I’ve rounded up some fun, affordable student Christmas gift ideas teachers can give to their elementary, middle, and high school students  (click here to learn about our entire Editorial Process & Methodology for product reviews).

Our Favorite Student Christmas Gift Ideas

1. KiwiCo Crates

Top Pick

STEM, STEAM & Science Kits for Kids | KiwiCo

KiwiCo's monthly STEM, STEAM, and Science kits spark fun and learning with their one-of-a-kind hands-on activities kids of all ages love.

Learn More

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Subscriptions on sale for $15.95/month this holiday season (regularly $23.95/mo). One-off purchase options and classroom kits also available.

With KiwiCo, you can help your students explore the world of STEM in an engaging and creative way!

As a teacher, you can buy one or more kits for your classroom, and have your students work on them together as a fun and educational group project.

KiwiCo offers a variety of boxes for all grade levels, so you can find something perfect for your students.

From building rocketships to creating pinball machines, there are tons of exciting projects tailored to children of all ages.

Through unique activities related to STEM, geography, math, and science as well as art projects – kids get hours of fun

It’s time to open the door and spark creativity with each Crate!

Click here to shop KiwiCo’s fantastic selection of crates today!

2. Christmas Theme Bookmark Rulers (set of 75)

Price

$8.99

Bookworms wish for nothing more than a good bookmark, and this gift is sure to be a treat for your students!

These Christmas-themed ruler bookmarks are an easy, useful gift idea that can be used again and again.

You can also ask the students to make these bookmarks an active part of their classroom. It will encourage them to read more!

3. 36 Sheets Christmas Party Games Sticker

Price

$9.98

Engage your students in this awesome game right before their vacations start!

The Christmas-themed stickers are made of premium material that’s bound to last you for years to come. Children are supposed to design their characters by adding facial features to the empty figurines. Your students can channel their creativity by adding eyes, noses, eyebrows, and other details to the stickers and call it a character of their own!

The stickers can also be used as decorative elements on notebooks, refrigerators, laptops, or phones.

4. Favonir Christmas Stationary Set (48 pack)

Favonir Christmas Stationary Party Favor Collection 48 Set – Pencils – Notebooks – Assorted Novelty Stickers – 3D Rubber Xmas Character Erasers – Reward Prizes, Carnival Events

$18.99

Buy Now

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

01/15/2024 06:03 pm GMT

Price

$18.99

Ditch the boring stationery by gifting your students this stationary set from Favonir!

The set includes several stationary items like pencils, notebooks, erasers, and stickers. The catch is that each item is decorated with Christmas graphics, making it a perfect gift for the season.

This set is also a great investment in terms of quality. The pencils are excellent to write with, and the notebooks have smooth-gliding pages.

5. Christmas Pop It Sensory Fidget Toys (20 pack)

Price

$20.99

When anxious, pop it! If you’ve ever played around with bubble wrap, you’d know how satisfactory it is to pop bubble after bubble.

Reduce your students’ nervousness and stress levels with this fidget toy!

The design consists of numerous bubbles which make a popping sound when pushed. Children can pop the bubbles as much as they want because, unlike bubble wrap, this toy will last forever!

6. 36 Mini Holiday Activity Books

36 MINI HOLIDAY FUN and GAMES Activity BOOKS/Stocking STUFFERS/PARTY FAVORS/TEACHERS/Daycare/2 1/2 x 3 1/2

$14.99

Buy Now

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

01/15/2024 05:57 pm GMT

Price

$14.99

If you don’t want your students to drop their reading habits over the holidays, give them these activity books!

The set has 36 mini-books that have numerous activities to keep children engaged.

These books are also a great option for kids who don’t like to read. The graphics and projects tend to attract children towards the habit.

The books are suitable for students of all ages, so you don’t have to worry about them outgrowing their gifts!

7. Advent Calendar

Price

Varies

Marking dates off the calendar is fun, right? Take it a step further and make it interactive with this Advent Calendar!

Forget counting the days left until Christmas on a boring calendar.

Each day has a separate activity, which aims to improve your student’s developmental skills.

Activities include puzzles, drawing, painting, and many others. Students will open up the calendar every day to find a surprise waiting, along with a message. This evokes the spirit of the season and also makes the wait worth it!

The package is also full of 3D objects and textures, which will improve your student’s observational skills.

8. Scented Erasers

Price

$5.99

Add a bit of fun to your young students’ day with these adorable scented erasers.

Not only do they come in the form of ice cream cones, but their delicious vanilla aroma is sure to bring joy and excitement!

With an affordable price tag that allows you to buy several packs – what more could you ask for? So go ahead: treat them each with one and watch as smiles spread across their faces!

9. Plaid Christmas Drawstring Bags (set of 36)

36Pcs Cotton Christmas Drawstring Bags Buffalo Plaid Xmas Gift Bags Cotton Xmas Candy Bags Small Christmas Fabric Bags Goody Gift Bags Treat Sacks Reusable Gift Wrapping Bags Holiday Party Favors Bags...

$15.99

Buy Now

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

01/15/2024 05:37 pm GMT

Price

$17.99

Conjure up the festive vibe amongst your students by gifting them these drawstring bags! Each bag is decorated with Christmas-themed graphics and can last for years.

Students can use these bags to store their belongings or maybe gift them to their friends and cousins.

The bags are made of a sturdy and durable fabric, so you can expect to see them being carried by the students all year round.

10. Silicone Wristbands Rubber Band Bracelets (set of 35)

 Price

$11.99

These Christmas-themed rubber wristbands are a great way to add a little cheer to the student’s wardrobe.

They come in different designs and colors, so you can give out a nice variety to your students.

The bands are also of great quality and give a comfortable fit to the wearer.

11. Custom Wish Bracelets

Price

$2.00

Have kids who are big fans of jewelry? Gift them these Wish Bracelets this Christmas and make their entire holiday!

These bracelets can be customized according to your liking, where you can add the recipient’s name on every piece, a thoughtful message, or even an emoji.

12. Push Pencil Assortment with Eraser

Price

$15.99

Choose these push pencils as your Christmas gift, and watch your students’ eyes light up!

The set includes 24 pencils, each with a unique and brightly-colored eraser on top.

Each pencil has 9 refillable #2 leads

13. Christmas Pens Gel Ink Pen (set of 20)

jiebor 20Pcs Christmas Pens Gel Ink Pen Novelty Pens Cute Pens Fun Pens Bulk with Black Ink for Women Students Teacher Christmas Gift Office School Supplies

$9.99

Buy Now

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

01/15/2024 06:22 pm GMT

Price

$9.99

These gel ink pens can uplift your class’ mood in seconds! Each pen sports Christmas colors and also has a little adornment on the top (Santa, a snowman, a reindeer, or a Christmas tree).

The best part about these pens is the smooth gliding and durability.

Final Thoughts

As a teacher, choosing Christmas gifts for your students is always a challenge.

However, with so many options available online and in stores, it can be made easier if you know what to look for.

These gift ideas are sure to bring joy to your students and make their holidays memorable!

Have any questions about our student Christmas gifts guide? Let us know by commenting below.

The post 13 Great Ideas for Student Christmas Gifts (All Grade Levels) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

As a teacher, you’re already overworked (and likely underpaid) as it is. So, finding ways to save time grading can help you regain some of your valuable time so you can enjoy a life outside of school. The good news is, there are ways you can grade assignments more efficiently without sacrificing quality.

As someone who’s worked in eLearning for nearly 20 years and has numerous teachers in my network, I’ve put together a collection of highly effective tips for saving time on grading.

How to Save Time When Grading Student Work

Now that we’ve talked about why grades are important, let’s discuss some ways you can save time when grading student work.

1. Use technology to your advantage

Taking your classroom digital can help you significantly slash your grading time. In my opinion, it’s the single best way teachers can cut their grading time down significantly.

There are a number of digital resources available that can help you grade assignments more quickly and efficiently.

For example, online quiz makers and assessment tools can be a super easy and efficient way to administer tests as these tools grade tests and quizzes automatically. This frees up your time so you can focus on other tasks, like writing personalized feedback for students.

Another time-saving tech tool is a digital portfolio platform. These platforms allow students to submit their work electronically, which cuts down on paper waste and makes it easy for you to keep track of all assignments in one place. And, many of these platforms include features that make it easy to provide feedback directly on student work.

You can even use online gradebooks to keep track of student grades and provide feedback rather than doing it all by hand. These gradebooks often include features that automate the grading process, such as weighting assignments and calculating grades automatically.

The result is less work for you and better feedback for your students.

2. Get students involved in the grading process

Another great way to save time when grading is to get students involved in the process.

You can do this by teaching them how to grade their own or each other’s work. This can be especially helpful for assignments that are mostly objective, such as multiple-choice quizzes.

Of course, you’ll still need to check their work and ensure they’re being honest, but this can help cut down on your grading time.

Involving students actively in the grading process can also benefit them academically. They can learn how to identify their own strengths and weaknesses, as well as how to give and receive instant feedback that’s constructive and insightful.

3. Don’t grade everything

One of the biggest mistakes I’ve seen new teachers in particular make is thinking that they have to grade every single piece of work their students do.

This simply isn’t true.

In fact, grading every assignment can actually do more harm than good as it takes up a lot of time and can overwhelm students (and you!).

Instead of grading everything, focus on assessing the assignments that are most important. For example, you obviously want to grade major tests but not maybe every single homework item.

If an assignment doesn’t need to be graded in order to provide feedback, then don’t grade it.

For example, if you’re having students do a quick in-class writing exercise, there’s no need to grade every single one. You can simply read through them quickly and provide general feedback on what they did well and what needs improvement.

The key is to focus on the assignments that will give you the most information about student understanding and progress.

4. Create assignments that combine multiple subjects

Another way to save time when grading is to group subjects together into a single assignment for multiple grading opportunities.

For example, you could combine reading and writing skills with social sciences assignments. An essay on a social sciences topic could then be graded both as a writing assignment and as a social sciences assignment.

This can be an efficient way to grade as you’re able to kill two birds with one stone, so to speak.

Just be sure that the entire assignment is actually assessing what you want it to. You don’t want to overburden students or create an assignment that’s too difficult to complete.

5. Use rubrics

Rubrics are a grading tool that can be used for any type of assignment.

They break down an entire assignment into its various parts and detail the criteria for each part. This makes it easy to assess student work and provide feedback.

Rubrics can also be helpful for students as they can see exactly what is expected of them and what they need to do to earn a good grade.

When using rubrics, you can either create your own or find ones that have already been created. There are rubrics available for almost any type of assignment you can think of.

6. Focus on quality of assignments, not quantity

Does a math assignment really need to have 40 repetitive questions covering the same concept over and over in order to be effective?

Probably not.

Sure, repetition can be helpful for some things, but it’s not always necessary. In fact, it can often be counterproductive as it can lead to students getting bored and feeling like they’re just going through the motions.

It’s important to focus on quality over quantity when creating assignments.

A shorter assignment with 10-15 questions can be plenty if it’s well-designed and covers the material in an effective way.

The key is to focus on creating assignments that are engaging and cover the material in a way that’s most likely to lead to students understanding it.

7. Do spot checks in real-time with in-class work

One easy way to cut down on time spent grading is to spot check your students’ work during class as you go through your lessons.

For example, if you’re working through some math problems, you can have students solve them on their own and then randomly choose a few to come up and solve on the board. Or they can hold up their answers for you to quickly check.

This will help you quickly assess who’s understanding the material and who needs more help.

It also allows you to provide immediate feedback and answer any questions students may have.

Doing spot checks like this throughout the semester can save you a lot of time in the long run as you won’t have to grade as much material at the end.

Final Thoughts

If you’re spending hours and hours grading assignments every week, you really need to make it a priority to find ways to save time. Otherwise, you’ll quickly become bogged down and burned out.

By following the tips in this article, you can make grading more efficient and less time-consuming without sacrificing quality.

So take the opportunity to implement a few of these time saving tips and see how they work for you. You may just find that your grading load becomes a lot more manageable.

How much time do you spend grading assignments each week? Let us know by leaving a comment below.

The post 7 Ways Savvy Teachers Save Time Grading Assignments appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

With so many options available in the market today, there’s sure to be something that will suit any type of learner. Whether it’s math and science kits, special toys, or interactive games – when given thoughtfully and with care – educational gifts offer unique opportunities for children to both explore and develop their interests!

We’ve rounded up some of our choices for the best educational Christmas gifts for kids, choosing products we feel are age-appropriate, affordable, engaging, replayable, and informative (click here to learn about our entire Editorial Process & Methodology for product reviews).

What are the Best Educational Christmas Presents for Children?

Here are our picks for the top Christmas gifts that have an educational component.

1. KiwiCo Crates

Top Pick

STEM, STEAM & Science Kits for Kids | KiwiCo

KiwiCo's monthly STEM, STEAM, and Science kits spark fun and learning with their one-of-a-kind hands-on activities kids of all ages love.

Learn More

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

Subscriptions on sale for $15.95/month this holiday season (regularly $23.95/mo). One-off purchase options also available.

Recommended Age

All ages

Give your kids a jumpstart into STEM with KiwiCo’s fantastic monthly crates!

These specially curated kits provide the tools and resources to explore science, technology, engineering, art, and math in a quick-starting, fun way.

Each month, kits are delivered with special projects that range from constructing rocket ships or planes to exploring solar systems.

KiwiCo offers kits for kids of all ages and with all interests, so no matter what your child loves, there’s something for everyone.

I’ve tested various KiwiCo kits firsthand with different children, and they’re always amazed by the projects and activities.

KiwiCo offers a range of subscription options, including monthly, quarterly, bi-annual, and annual plans.

Click here to get started today!

Key Features

• Kits come loaded with all the materials needed to build the project
• Tutorials and guides help with easy navigation
• Various engineering challenges to keep the children engaged
• Projects are fun, engaging, and educational, leaving kids wanting more

Click here to shop KiwiCo’s fantastic selection of crates today!

2. Magna-Tiles Clear Color 100 Tiles

Price

$119.99

Recommended Age

3+

If little flashy things have ever attracted you, you’d understand why Magna Tiles are so trendy amongst kids these days.

An educational toy meant for motor development, Magna Tiles will keep the child engaged for hours at a time. You can also turn the toy into a science lesson and teach the kid how magnets work.

Magna Tiles also inculcate problem-solving skills in children.

Key Features

• Dynamics of pattern making
• Grows with the child
• Easy to clean after
• Flexibility in how they function

3. Melissa & Doug Magnetic Fishing Game

Melissa & Doug Magnetic Wooden Fishing Game and Puzzle With Wooden Ocean Animal Magnets - Magnetic Fishing Game, Ocean Animals Chunky Puzzle For Toddlers And Kids Ages 3+

$8.24

Buy Now

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

01/15/2024 08:42 am GMT

Price

$9.99

Recommended Age

3-5

Have an eager toddler who’s just started to get the hang of things? Introduce him to this educational toy and watch his development speed up by ten folds!

This puzzle game will help improve the child’s motor skills, hand-eye coordination, and visual understanding.

Toddlers specifically need games that are not too technical, and this toy will be a perfect fit!

Key Features

• Encourages social interaction
• Easy-to-understand
• Builds foundations for the next developmental stage
• Encourages matching, sorting, and counting activities

4. Hape – Playfully Delicious Pita Pocket

Price

$15.95

Recommended Age

36 months – 5 years

If your kid is fond of kitchen playsets, he will love this educational toy. It has a range of food made out of non-toxic materials. Children can pretend to make their sandwiches or get down to learning different types of edibles. This toy is also an excellent opportunity to introduce your kids to healthy foods such as fruits and vegetables.

Key Features

• Various textures help in building the senses
• Encourages children to explore
• All the food items required to make pita pockets are included in the kit

5. Klutz Bio Chem Creatures STEAM Lab

Klutz Bio Chem Creatures STEAM Lab Kit

$18.78

Buy Now

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

01/15/2024 08:57 am GMT

Price

$19.99

Recommended Age

7-10

Have a kid who’s obsessed with slime? This kit will make an awesome Christmas gift!

As the name suggests, this kit is more like a tiny lab in a box. It includes various chemicals which children can churn together to create the gooiest slime ever.

This kit also helps in improving sensory perceptions and chemical understanding.

Key Features

• Numerous books on instructions and experiments
• Information about real-life animals
• Test tubes to keep the experiments safe
• Ten different activities to teach about biological development

6. Thames & Kosmos Robotics: Smart Machines – Super Sphere

Price

$134.95

Recommended Age

8-14

Saw a kid getting interested in robotics? Gift him this kit, and watch his eyes shine with happiness! This kit gives children a brief introduction to robotics and also lets them practice their skills!

Children are facilitated to build motorized machines of their own which they can show off amongst their friends. You can control this robot through your phone, tablet, or PC, depending on the principles used by your child. The ideal Christmas gift for all robotic enthusiasts!

Key Features

• Allows giant robotic constructions
• Includes various sound sensors
• Customizable introductions

7. Osmo Explorer Start Kit

Price

Varies

Recommended Age

3-10

This educational kit has all the materials and activities to play the nine famous Osmo games.

These games help your child develop critical thinking skills and also learn STEM in a fun way.

This kit includes all the games from its previous kits, making it a worthwhile investment.

You also don’t have to worry about the supplies because it includes all the game pieces, art supplies, and stackable storage.

Key Features

• Comes with a base and a reflector.
• Introduction to phonics
• Builds reading fluency
• Improves comprehension

8. Geomag Magicubes Full Color Try Me Recycled, 64 Pieces

Price

Starting at $58.49

Recommended Age

1-5

Nothing beats the classic building blocks when it comes to attracting children.

This building set has converted the conventional blocks into cubes that kids can stack according to their preference. The cubes have magnets attached, so your child’s constructions don’t disintegrate.

Each of the 64 pieces is made out of recycled plastic, so you don’t have to worry about environmental damage!

Key Features

• Improves logical thinking
• Encourages creativity
• Flashy colors attract children

9. MEandMine Journey Down The Belly STEAM Kitchen Science Kit – Digestion & Nutrients Lab

MEandMine Aha! Digestion - STEM Chemistry Kit- Body Science - Poop Lab, Food Slime, Nutrient Fizzy Solutions, Lava Lamp- Gift for Boys and Girls Ages 4-7- STEM Toys

$29.95

Buy Now

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

01/15/2024 09:27 am GMT

Price

$29.95

Recommended Age

4-7

Want to teach a child how his body works? Gift him the MEandMINE Science kit!

This educational kit takes a biological approach and breaks down each body function in a fun, non-boring way. This helps the children better understand themselves and inculcates a love for biology.

From food breakdowns to how that food becomes poop- this kit has an attractive way of explaining everything related to the human body!

Key Features

• Allows children to build 3 STEAM projects
• Designed by learned professionals, including physiologists and scientists
• Numerous sensory activities
• Helps breakdown stimuli such as anger and fear

10. LeapFrog 100 Animals Book

Price

$19.99

Recommended Ages

18 months+

Want to teach a toddler about different animals? Choose this book as your next Christmas present, and watch your child read the pages for hours!

The book has six double-sided pages and three play modes. These allow your child to choose what he’s interested in, hence making learning more impactful.

This toy also has a bilingual setting where children can sing along in Spanish.

Key Features

• Fun facts about animals
• Features animals from twelve different categories
• Mimics animal sounds

11. Educational Insights Spindoodle Game

Price

$27.99

Recommended Age

8+

If you want to give something which the entire family can play, this game is your answer!

The layout is very similar to Pictionary, where players are supposed to write or draw something on the spinning board. The rest of the members have to guess what’s drawn and whoever gets it right wins the points!

This game is designed for older kids, and adults can enjoy it too.

Key Features

• Five different categories to choose from
• Helps build positive relationships
• Encourages sharing

12. Crayola Model Magic Deluxe Variety Pack 

Crayola Model Magic, Deluxe Craft Pack, Gift, 14 Single Packs, At Home Crafts for Kids

$12.96

Buy Now

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

01/15/2024 09:37 am GMT

Price

$18.29

Recommended Age

4+

Want to teach soft skills with clay but are scared of the mess?

Choose this modeling set and watch your child mold magic for hours!

The kit comes with colorful, squishy clay, which your child can use for making 3D objects. It hardens after 24 hours, making your child’s crafts a permanent toy!

Aside from the colorful pieces, you also get a white clay piece which you can color yourself using acrylic paints.

Key Features

• Boosts creativity
• Improves sensory skills
• Helpful in school projects
• Dries into lightweight objects

13. Peaceable Kingdom Race to the Treasure!

Price

$18.95

Recommended Age

5-6

If the child is not a fan of winning and losing games, gift him this kit for collaborative learning! The game has multiple players trying to unlock a treasure before the ogre does.

During the process, kids learn crucial skills such as collaborative work, team spirit, and communication. This game has a roll-over dice method, so there’s also a lot of luck at play!

Key Features

• Improves strategic thinking
• Builds communication skills
• Encourages a non-stressful play environment
• Includes game board, dice, game cards, key tokens, Ogre snack, and instructions

14. Taco Cat Goat Cheese Pizza

Taco Cat Goat Cheese Pizza

$9.84

Buy Now

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

01/15/2024 10:07 am GMT

Price

$9.84

Recommended Age

8-12

Have a child who’s a fan of card games? You know what to buy this Christmas with Taco Cat!

The game can be played by both children and adults, where players are supposed to get rid of their cards. Whoever goes cardless first wins the game.

The kit has several illustrated cards that attract children and also has many variations of play.

You can make your own rules or even set up a reward at the end.

Key Features

• Easy to carry
• Hilarious illustrations

Final Thoughts

Educational gifts are an excellent way to ignite the minds of kids in a creative, yet useful way.

Not only are they an enjoyable present for those who receive them, they also provide lasting value that goes well beyond the excitement associated with opening up presents on Christmas Day.

Instead of short-term happiness, educational gifts help foster curiosity and other important skills like problem-solving and critical thinking.

Start your holiday shopping now and get something truly special that your kids will remember for years to come.

Have any questions about our guide to the best educational Christmas gifts for kids? Leave a comment below.

The post The 14 Best Educational Christmas Gifts for Kids appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Step-by-Step Guide to Accessing the 60-Day Trial

See if the Deal is Currently Available

Noggin doesn’t offer the 60-day free trial year round. It’s typically available during the Christmas holiday season (like at the time of this writing), and may be available for limited times during other promos throughout the year. You can check here to see if the offer is currently available.

Visit the Special Link

Start by clicking on our exclusive link. This will take you directly to Noggin’s promotional page where the 60-day free trial is available.

Create an Account

You’ll need to create an account if you don’t already have one. This involves providing some basic information and setting up login credentials.

Enter Payment Details

While the trial is free, Noggin requires payment details upfront. Rest assured, you won’t be charged until the trial period ends, and you can cancel anytime. If you do decide to keep the app after the trial period is up, you’ll be billed at the regular Noggin pricing.

Download the App

Once your account is set up, download the Noggin app on your preferred device – be it iOS, Android, Amazon Kindle, or a smart TV.

Start Exploring

Dive into Noggin’s extensive library of interactive games, educational shows, and books. Remember, everything is ad-free, so your child’s learning experience is uninterrupted.

Making the Most of Your Noggin Free Trial

By taking a smart approach to the 60-day trial period, you can make an informed decision about Noggin’s long-term place in your child’s learning journey.

• Explore the Full Range of Content: Noggin boasts a wide range of educational materials. Spend time exploring different categories – from interactive games that enhance problem-solving skills to educational shows with kids’ favorite Nickelodeon characters that make learning fun. Each category offers unique benefits, so try them all to understand what captivates your child the most.
• Establish a Routine: Consistency is key in learning. Use the trial period to establish a routine. Allocate specific times for your child to engage with Noggin. This not only helps in setting healthy screen time habits but also integrates learning seamlessly into their daily life.
• Engage with Your Child: Take an active role in your child’s Noggin experience. Watch shows with them, discuss the stories, and encourage them to share what they’ve learned. This not only enhances the learning experience but also strengthens your bond.
• Track Progress and Interests: Observe which activities and topics your child gravitates towards. Noggin offers a wide range, from science and math to art and storytelling. Understanding their interests can help you guide their learning journey beyond the app.
• Use the Parental Features: Noggin comes with parental controls and features that allow you to track your child’s progress and manage the content they access. Familiarize yourself with these tools to ensure a safe and appropriate learning environment.
• Plan for Post-Trial: Towards the end of the trial, evaluate your experience. If you find Noggin beneficial, consider subscribing. If not, ensure you know how to cancel the subscription to avoid any charges.

Final Thoughts

This 60-day free trial offer from Noggin is an excellent opportunity to introduce your child to a world of fun and learning without any commitment.

Whether you’re a parent looking for quality educational content or an educator seeking to supplement your teaching tools, this trial period is an invaluable resource.

You can read our full in-depth Noggin review if you want to learn more about this app before you try it.

Don’t miss out on this limited-time offer. Click here to start your 60-day Noggin adventure today!

The post How to Get a 60 Day Noggin Free Trial appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

While Noggin pricing is already very affordable, this deal offers the lowest price of the year, bringing the cost of an annual subscription down to a one-time payment of just $47.

Why Try Noggin?

Noggin – Interactive learning with the trusted characters your kids love.

With over 1,000 educational games, videos, and activities developed by experts, Noggin offers a fun, interactive, and highly effective learning experience for kids ages 2 to 7.

Start Your Free Trial!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Noggin, a subscription-based educational app, has been a game-changer in my experience with preschool-age children. It’s a vibrant platform that opens up a world of learning for kids aged 2-7, covering everything from basic literacy and numeracy to social skills like empathy and kindness.

As pointed out in our Noggin review, “the app features games, shows, and books all specially created to help your child develop their understanding of math, reading, and social sciences.”

As a user, I’ve found its cross-platform availability incredibly convenient. Whether on iOS, Android, Amazon Kindle, or smart TVs, Noggin is just a Wi-Fi or mobile data connection away. This accessibility means that engaging educational content is always at your child’s fingertips.

The app is a treasure trove of interactive games, ad-free shows, and a vast collection of books, all featuring beloved characters from the Nick Jr. universe. Characters like Dora the Explorer and the PAW Patrol team aren’t just entertaining; they’re a bridge for kids to connect with essential learning concepts.

What sets Noggin apart in my eyes is the expert design of its content. It’s not just about academic learning; there’s a strong focus on socioemotional development. Activities in Noggin encourage children to be empathetic friends, thoughtful learners, and caring family members.

Navigating the app, children can choose from a variety of activities. Whether it’s diving into an interactive game, enjoying an educational show, or exploring the extensive library of books tailored for early readers, Noggin offers a balanced mix of fun and learning.

Details of Noggin’s Holiday Deal

The 2023 Noggin Holiday deal is live at the time of this article’s publication. So far, an end date hasn’t been officially announced, but the company has been clear that this is a very limited-time deal.

This holiday deal is a game-changer. The 50% discount on the annual subscription opens up a year of learning opportunities at $47 off the regular price.

For those new to Noggin who aren’t ready to pay just yet, the 60-day free trial is a no-risk introduction to its rich educational content. This is twice as long as the regular 30-day trial they offer during the rest of the year.

Get This Deal Before It’s Gone

Dive into a year of learning for 50% off the regular price of Noggin or if you’re not ready to commit just yet, you can try Noggin free for 60 days and see the magic unfold.

Hurry, this special holiday offer is only available for a limited time! Click here to grab it before it’s gone

The post Noggin’s Holiday Deal is the Perfect Gift for Kids appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

However, many LMS vendors stick with SCORM and don’t use the newer – and more promising – Tin Can (xAPI) format. In fact, a survey conducted with 150 learning and development professionals found that 62 percent of them utilized SCORM in their practices.

As an experienced instructional designer who’s created a number of online courses and modules, I’ve navigated the complexities of creating SCORM-compliant content and understand the importance of this standard in the eLearning industry. In this article, I’m going to demystify the process and provide you with practical, straightforward methods to develop SCORM packages.

Best Overall

Emeritus Professional Instructional Design Certificate | Online Certificate Course

Gain firsthand expertise in instructional design principles and methodologies through this unique Professional Certificate program. Create impactful learning solutions and improve people's ability to learn.

Learn More!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

1. Use SCORM compliant authoring tools to deliver appealing content

First of all, let’s discuss what software you trust for shaping up your courses to create a SCORM package.

If this is just an ad hoc deck with some nice extras, and you are not particularly interested in viewer statistics and reporting, PowerPoint seems like a universal remedy.

If you seek deeper insights, a logical move is to go beyond PowerPoint and employ third party authoring software and eLearning platforms. Microsoft’s all-in-one solution is always a soft option, but it can’t cover all creative needs and specific eLearning features such as performance tracking, assessment, grading, quizzing, etc.

In fact, it’s the tracking options that matter when discussing eLearning standards. SCORM defines how web-based training content can be played back and tracked by SCORM-friendly learning management systems. Another aspect is packaging the content into an easily transferable archive.

Most industry frontrunners like iSpring Suite, Adobe Captivate, Articulate Storyline, Trivantis Lectora, and others offer full SCORM compliance so you can save a course for LMSs in just a couple clicks.

Apart from the quality of collaboration tools, quizzes, effects, and interactions, eLearning software solutions are judged by the criteria of interoperability and scalability. Some vendors include both authoring tools and learning management systems as part of their comprehensive product line. Works great if you are loyal to a specific brand, causes discrepancies if you prefer diversity.

Before you get carried away with a captivating character library or nice-looking triggers, make sure you don’t fall into the vendor lock-in trap. A course created in Program A should play back flawlessly in Program B; otherwise, you are facing a dead end.

Another major concern here is quality. After you’ve handcrafted all the bells and whistles to support your course flow, it would be a shame to lose any effects in the conversion process. Check out solution providers’ compatibility notes to be on the safe side.

Here is to sum up the advantages and disadvantages of this scenario to create a SCORM course.

Pros

• No need to shop for a standalone presentation-to-SCORM converter
• Most authoring products integrate easily with LMSs
• These tools have great functionality so your content will look glossy and professional.

Cons

• Content authoring tools may be pricey, especially if you are aiming at the high end
• Despite advanced integration policies taken on board by most vendors, there is still a risk of quality losses and incompatibilities.

2. Use a converter to turn your deck into a SCORM archive

On a sidenote, a SCORM container can accommodate various content types, be it video, Flash, HTML, slides or PDF files.

You might ask: Why not just open an HTML page in a learning management system of choice and save the conversion efforts?

Well, you can definitely do so, but again you won’t be able to monitor learner’s progress, keep viewer statistics and receive feedback. From this perspective, the whole point of having an LMS is missing.

In case you don’t want to get involved with a sophisticated – or costly – third party authoring tool, your better choice could be a converter or a free add-on like Microsoft Office Mix (installed on top of PowerPoint 2013 onwards).

If you ask Google to fetch some free PowerPoint-to-SCORM course converters, you’ll get a plethora of available choices at your fingertips. However, beware of technical complications and limitations. There is no such thing as free lunch.

For instance, if you go with Office Mix, which is a powerful tool shipped free of charge, you will surely enjoy the authoring experience. However, some of the visuals and interactive elements are doomed to get lost during conversion. Not to mention that analytics will no longer be available in Office Mix.

Note also that Microsoft has removed SCORM conversion from the latest version of Office Mix. I hope that they will reinstate the functionality shortly.

Among others, iSpring Free is known to be a lossless conversion tool that supports all the frills PowerPoint has to offer. If you want the output to look exactly the way you conceived it, iSpring’s solution is, by all means, worthy of consideration.

Pros

• Free conversion tools are readily available on the web
• You do not get stuck with a particular authoring tool
• Minimized compatibility risks.

Cons

• No software solution on the planet can sign off on a 100% insurance policy against quality loss.

3. Do some heavy lifting and generate the package on your own

Whether you’d like to prepare several courses or a standalone lesson for display in an LMS, it’s actually pretty easy to compile a unified SCORM archive with no extra tools involved.

Here is what you have to do to create a single package/course

Generating a SCORM content archive is pretty much about the manifest file, a package inventory item named imsmanifest.xml.

Let’s go through the elements of the .xml file:

1. <manifest> and its parameters

Identifier: This one ensures the course doesn’t get confused with other courses with somewhat similar names.

Version: Your course version, e.g. version=”1.0″

The rule of thumb here is to equip your course with a unique identifier to avoid mixups. A simple combination of name + creation date should do it.

Here is a sample:

<manifest identifier="course_1_01_05_2016" xmlns="http://www.imsproject.org/xsd/imscp_rootv1p1p2" xmlns:adlcp="https://www.adlnet.org/xsd/adlcp_rootv1p2" xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xmlns:lom="http://www.imsglobal.org/xsd/imsmd_rootv1p2p1" xsi:schemaLocation="http://www.imsproject.org/xsd/imscp_rootv1p1p2 imscp_rootv1p1p2.xsd http://www.imsglobal.org/xsd/imsmd_rootv1p2p1 imsmd_rootv1p2p1.xsd https://www.adlnet.org/xsd/adlcp_rootv1p2 adlcp_rootv1p2.xsd">

2. <organizations>

In this node, insert a default point and make sure it coincides with the indetifier name.

<organizations default="Course_1_organization">
<organization identifier="Course_1_organization">

3. <title>

Provide your course name as the title. It’s as simple as that.

4. <item>

With a single course, it’s not a big deal. It only gets tricker if you have multiple materials in a bundle. In that case you’ll have to generate an item for every module of the course.

5. <resources>/<resource>

This is, in fact, a list of all the essentials that account for the integrity of your eLearning course. Open the node for all resources – <resources>.

Don’t forget to create a resource node for each separate module.

<resource identifier="resource" type="webcontent" adlcp:scormtype="sco" href="res/start_1.html">

Make sure that the “identifer” parameter matches the “identifierref” parameter of the associated <item> node.

Type should be indicated as “webcontent”. “href” leads to the html page that opens up when a visitor logs in. The “scormtype” of the resource has to be set as “sco” if this mentioned resource corresponds with the item to be launched. If this is not the case, it must be defined as “asset”. “Assets” don’t need a “href” parameter.

You should have at least one file/href per item so you can add them based on your needs.

Last but not least, you have to close the open nodes: </resources></manifest>. Finally, make sure the manifest file created by the reload editor is the same one that we generated.

Download a sample SCORM archive for further reference →

Need to bundle multiple packages?

In some scenarios, such as a series of presentations or a multilevel course, you may want to pack several educational materials into a single SCORM package. Here are a few easy steps to follow:

Step 1. Unzip courses into separate folders and see to it that each and every one includes an imsmanifest.xml file.

Step 2. In every imsmanifest.xml file, use CTRL+C to copy the index file names and content assets.

Step 3. After you are done copying, create a new parent folder and place all merged SCORM packages therein.

Step 4. Operating with the SCORM 1.2 standard, you should include five standard files into the parent folder. Four of these are .xsd files that don’t require any modification. The fifth file is the notorious .imsmanifest.xml, which you will need to change so it complies with the package.

Step 5. Modify the imsmanifest.xml of the parent file so it refers to the subfiles. The change should be made in the item tag and the organization. Plus, ensure there is a row for all the sub-folders in place.

Step 6. Before you finally zip the package, make sure the item identifiers are precise and relevant. Also, they should be similar to the other corresponding resource identifiers. Here’s a sample code:

<?xml version="1.0? standalone="no"?>
<manifest identifier="course_1_01_05_2016" xmlns="http://www.imsproject.org/xsd/imscp_rootv1p1p2? xmlns:adlcp="https://www.adlnet.org/xsd/adlcp_rootv1p2? xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:schemaLocation="http://www.imsproject.org/xsd/imscp_rootv1p1p2 imscp_rootv1p1p2.xsd http://www.imsglobal.org/xsd/imsmd_rootv1p2p1 imsmd_rootv1p2p1.xsd https://www.adlnet.org/xsd/adlcp_rootv1p2 adlcp_rootv1p2.xsd">
 
<metadata>
<schema>ADL SCORM</schema>
<schemaversion>1.2</schemaversion>
<adlcp:location>imsmetadata.xml</adlcp:location>
</metadata>
 
<organizations default="Course_1_organization">
<organization identifier="Course_1_organization" structure="hierarchical">
<title>Multi sco sample</title>
<item identifier="Course_1" identifierref="C_1" isvisible="true">
<title>Introduction</title>
<adlcp:masteryscore>80</adlcp:masteryscore>
</item>
<item identifier="Course_2" identifierref="C_2" isvisible="true">
<title>Chapter 1</title>
<adlcp:prerequisites type="aicc_script">Course_2</adlcp:prerequisites>
<adlcp:masteryscore>80</adlcp:masteryscore>
</item>
<item identifier="Course_3" identifierref="C_3" isvisible="true">
<title>Chapter 2</title>
<adlcp:prerequisites type="aicc_script">"Course_3</adlcp:prerequisites>
<adlcp:masteryscore>80</adlcp:masteryscore>
</item>
</organization>
</organizations>
 
<resources>
<resource identifier="C_1" type="webcontent" adlcp:scormtype="sco" href="course_multiple/res1/start_1.html">
<file href="course_multiple/res1/start_1.html"/>
</resource>
<resource identifier="C_2" type="webcontent" adlcp:scormtype="sco" href="course_multiple/res2/start_2.html">
<file href="course_multiple/res2/start_2.html"/>
</resource>
<resource identifier="C_3" type="webcontent" adlcp:scormtype="sco" href="course_multiple/res3/start_3.html">
<file href="course_multiple/res3/start_3.html"/>
</resource>
</resources>
</manifest>

Step 7. Last but not least, archive the parent folder with all the subfiles, and voila! Test the course in your learning management system. If you see all the links in the navigation panel, everything should be OK. Don’t hesitate to double check and go through the entire course.

Download a sample SCORM package →

Pros

• You have full control of the process
• There is no need to roam the web for solutions

Cons

The job requires pinpoint accuracy. If you are pressed for time, authoring tools and converters may be a smarter choice.

How do you create SCORM course content? As you can see, it’s no rocket science, even if opting for manual packaging. The most important factor is that your content and visuals remain intact and reach the target audience on time and with a positive impact.

A Final Word on How to Create SCORM Content

With the tips above, you can create a SCORM package that will work great for publishing your online courses.

If you’re looking to take your instructional design skills to the next level, I highly recommend looking into the Professional Certificate in Instructional Design program from Emeritus.

In only 5 months, you can learn all about the basics of instructional design, popular ID theories and models, and best practices for creating eLearning experiences.

You can learn more about the program and request a brochure at this link.

Best Overall

Emeritus Professional Instructional Design Certificate | Online Certificate Course

Gain firsthand expertise in instructional design principles and methodologies through this unique Professional Certificate program. Create impactful learning solutions and improve people's ability to learn.

Learn More!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Have any questions about how to create SCORM courses? Comment below and I’ll help.

The post How to Create SCORM Content: 3 Ways to Make a SCORM Content Package appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

As an eLearning professional with extensive experience in recording voice-overs, I’m a strong believer that you can’t overstate the critical role a vocal booth plays in producing high-quality audio content. Whether you’re a seasoned eLearning developer, an aspiring voice artist, or a podcast enthusiast, the right booth can transform your recordings, minimizing ambient noise and creating that crisp, clear sound that captivates listeners.

But here’s the thing — getting access to a great vocal booth can be a bit like finding hidden treasure.

In this article, I’m going to guide you through some of the best ways to acquire a vocal booth that suits your needs. Whether you’re dreaming of owning one for your home studio, itching to craft a DIY masterpiece, or considering the convenience of renting time at a local studio, I’ve got you covered.

1. Budget Portable Sound Booths on VocalBoothToGo.com

VocalBoothToGo.com manufactures low-cost portable sound booths that start at under $1,000. These sound booths have a metal frame support structure that is easy to assemble and disassemble. The sound booth frames are covered by a fitted acoustic blanket material. This material provides up to 80% noise reduction and an echo-free environment for recording. Outside noise is reduced by 10dB and the blanket material suppresses humming noises.

Here are two examples of low-cost portable recording booths they offer that I love.

The Acoustic Vocal Booth 4 (AVB4) is a one-person walk-in booth, with these features:

• Inexpensive: Sells for $1,298.78 (price as of September 2023).
• Portability: Assembles quickly in minutes without tools. Comes with a carry bag for the metal frame and a separate carry bag for the acoustic blankets.
• Sound Reduction: Creates a reverberation-free recording environment with 80% noise reduction.
• Lighting: Includes a noise-free LED light and adapter.
• Window: One clear vinyl window is installed in the door wall.

The Acoustic Vocal Booth (AVB63) is a two-person walk-in booth, with these features:

• Modestly-Priced: Sells for $1,188.68 (price as of September 2023).
• Spacious: Designed for two people with the dimensions of 80 inches long, 40 inches wide, and 80 inches tall.
• Lightweight: Easy to carry in the trunk of a regular-sized automobile or to ship by common carrier. The total weight is 100 lbs.
• Lighting: Includes two noise-free LED lights and adapters.
• Windows: Two clear vinyl windows are installed in the door walls.

Best For: These vocal booths are made for those who need portability to do their work. These portable sound booths are frequently used at conventions to record real-time announcements. They have been used to create isolation rooms for virtual reality games at gaming conventions. They can be easily set up and taken down for use to record in any office space.

2. Premium Sound Booths on VocalBooth.com

VocalBooth.com manufactures a portable professional sound room that starts at $3,750 with the standard features package, with delivery in the U.S. by standard freight included (price as of September 2023). This silver series vocal booth is a single-wall design that is commonly used for extra sound isolation, such as when recording a singer, within a larger recording studio environment. It can also be used as a stand-alone booth for voice-over recordings.

The dimensions are 48 inches wide by 48 inches depth by 82 inches interior (88 inches exterior) height. The door makes an airtight seal when closed and has a 12-inch high by 24-inch wide window installed. For easier portability, optional caster wheels are available, which add four more inches to the height.

The standard package features include:

• Studio Foam Sound Insulation: The inside walls are covered with two-inch pyramid studio foam that is charcoal-colored and A-level fire-rated.
• Ventilation: Comes with active ventilation that uses a high-capacity, silent-running fan that can be left on when recording. Adaptors are available to connect this booth to a recording studio’s HVAC system.
• Cable Ports: The walls have cable and electric pass-through ports.
• Lighting: Comes with three, silent, lighting fixtures
• Finish: The exterior of the booth is finished in an executive gray color.

Best For: This sound booth is more solid than a blanket booth. Even though it can be moved around on its optional caster wheels, it is more of a permanent sound booth not meant to be taken apart once it is assembled. The built-in ventilation system is innovative and works well.

3. Buy a New or Used Sound Booth on eBay

On eBay you can find plenty of choices of new and used sound booths. They range in price from just under $200 to the top-of-the-line double-walled professional WhisperRoom brand at almost $6,000.

The cheapest vocal booth that I found for sale on eBay was $160.00. For that price, you will get what looks like a shower stall with thick canvas curtains for the walls. The support frame is made from PVC tubing. The curtains hang down from the PVC tubing as a shower curtain would. The sound isolation is minimal but the curtain material does prevent any sound reflections coming off the interior walls of the room, which might add unwanted reverb to a voice recording.

For the top-of-the-line, I found a WhisperRoom MDL 4260 E model that was previously-owned and listed on eBay for sale at $5,890. A brand-new WhisperRoom sound booth of this same model costs $7.395. For that kind of money, you get a double-walled booth with excellent sound isolation and quiet ventilation. It is large enough to accommodate one person, with the interior dimensions of 2.5 feet by 3.5 feet and an interior height of six-foot-eight inches. This room offers supreme sound isolation, which is what you are paying for. It reduces sound at the frequency of 125 Hz by 30 dB and at the frequency of 1,000 Hz or higher by 60 dB or more.

Best For: People who know what they want, and who are looking for a bargain are likely to find one on eBay. Be sure to factor into your decision the cost of shipping the sound booth to your location and any assembly that may be required.

4. Do-It-Yourself (DIY) Sound Booth

I have to admit that I am more of the do-it-yourself (DIY) type of guy. A sound booth is the perfect DIY project because the professional rooms are very expensive. You can achieve nearly the same thing for less than one-quarter of the price if you build a sound room yourself.

I once built a very effective sound room out of materials I found for free, which worked extremely well to record punk bands in my basement. The reason I know that it worked well is that I never had the neighbors call the police due to my loud noise, even when the bands played at nearly deafening levels.

Sound isolation is not that difficult to achieve if you have plenty of space and lots of sound-deadening materials. I hung thick carpeting in the walls of my found-materials sound booth and allowed a one-inch gap between the layers. The sound would penetrate the first layer, get deadened by the carpet, and then have to travel through the air to be deadened again by another layer of hanging carpet.

I found that this worked quite well with three layers of very thick carpet. If you are going to try this be sure to use fire-retardant chemicals on all the materials that you install.

The trickier part is to put in ventilation so you can breathe in the room and the ventilation system does not transfer sound in or out of the sound booth. Sound travels by vibrating air molecules, so where the air goes, the sound can follow. Use a baffling system to let the air pass, by having it go around corners, and the sound can be caught by the baffling materials since sound waves flow in a straight line.

I found some helpful videos on YouTube that show how to construct a decent sound booth for recording voice-overs.

Here is the video that discusses the options of how to make a low-cost sound booth in a home including how to make a budget DIY vocal booth using special sound-absorbing blankets. The framing that holds up the blanket is made from standard PVC pipe and connectors.

The total cost of the materials for this vocal booth will be around $350 to $400.

Here are the parts needed for this DIY project:

• 4 – Acoustic Blankets →
• 14 – One-Inch T-Joints →
• 8 – One-Inch U-Joints →
• 24 – Shower Curtain Rings →
• 1 – PVC pipe cutter →
• 4 – Clamps →
• ~ 6 – Four-foot length, one-inch diameter PVC pipe →
• 13 – Five-foot length, one-inch diameter PVC pipe →

For those who are a bit more ambitious, here is a video that shows how to build a home sound booth for around $500, out of lumber and sound-absorbent acoustic foam tiles.

For this booth, complete building instructions with diagrams and a materials list are found on the website of Murrant.ca.

Best For: People who are a hands-on type of person who likes to build things and those on a limited budget who need to create a working sound booth for as little money as possible.

5. Rent a Professional Voice-Over Studio

Professional recording studios rent for $50 to $500 per hour. The hourly rate includes the cost of an audio engineer to run the recording equipment and you will have to bring your recording media or buy it from the studio. Search on Yelp to find recording studios in your area.

For example, I searched on Yelp for the “Best vocal booth in Jersey City, NJ” and found these studios listed:

• Long Island Sound Studios
• Degraw Sound
• Lessons & Sessions
• Brewery Recording Studio
• Skyroom Studio

There were many other choices. Any one of them would be a reasonable place to record a voice-over, if you can afford their hourly rental rates. To find some voice-over recording studios in your area, just search on Yelp for “best vocal booth” along with the name of your city.

Recording voice-overs requires less technical skill and microphone placement work than what is needed for an audio engineer to record a band. You may get a better rate if you find a recording studio that specializes in voice-overs. The rental rate may be less for a small vocal booth when compared to renting out a full sound recording studio room Many recording studios have rooms with enough space for a full band and have a smaller vocal booth within the space. When doing voice-overs, you do not need such a large room.

Sometimes, recording studios offer a “block-rate” discounted deal when you pay for a group of hours in advance. Other studios may offer discounts for last-minute bookings of time that is not scheduled. You may get a discount if you can go to the studio in a short moment’s notice. You may be able to find a deal like these if you shop around.

If you just want to try some voice-over recording with rented gear, you can rent equipment for recording, a microphone, and there is also the chance to rent out some vocal booths from the companies that sell them. Vocal Booths to Go rents out booths for $150 to $600 per week that depends on the type and the size, plus shipping charges. Many conferences and conventions, which need a temporary room for audio interviews at the event, use this solution.

You may be able to record your voice-overs at a local community college if they have a music program. Rehearsal rooms at schools are a decent alternative if you cannot afford the cost of a voice booth in a professional recording studio. You can bring some sound-absorbing material with you and temporarily hang it up in a rehearsal room at school to improve the voice recording.

Another idea to save money is to use moving blankets that you can rent from a self-moving or storage place. They are a very cheap substitute for professional acoustic blankets because they are made of similar materials.

Conclusion

If you’re not planning on renting some time at a professional recording studio, you can use any of the techniques I described above to buy or build a vocal booth. After you solve the challenge of having a place to record your voice-overs, you are also going to need some voice-over equipment to use to make the recordings.

Then, add a high-quality microphone that has a good design for recording voice-overs in a home recording studio setting. After that, you should be all set and ready to record everything from voice overs on Google Slides to YouTube video narration and more.

Conduct a few test recordings in your new room and then add more sound-absorbing material if needed. Make adjustments until you get a recorded sound that has a very high degree of presence for the voice. You want to capture a strong, clear sound with no reflective sound from the walls or natural reverb from the room where you are making the recording.

The goal is to make the voice-over recording very present without it sounding like it was recorded in a specific type of room. You don’t want it to sound like it was recorded in a small stuffy space either. The idea is, that the sound of the voice is all you hear. There is no distraction and there is no indication of what type of room it was recorded in at all.

When you do this well, the voice has that presence, which gives it a dynamic sense of power, and you can hear the difference.

Want to learn more about the art of voice work? Check out our guide to the top voice acting classes online.

The post 5 Best Ways to Get a Vocal Booth for Your Voice-Overs appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

As someone who’s been working in instructional design for nearly 20 years, I’m going to answer all of the following questions in depth in this guide:

• What is instructional design?
• What do instructional designers create and do?
• What are the components of instructional design?
• What are the different instructional design models?
• Why is instructional design important in education?

What is Instructional Design?

Instructional design, or instructional system design (ISD), is the process of creating learning experiences in such a way that knowledge and skills are acquired and applied. The process involves assessing needs, devising a method, developing materials, and evaluating their usefulness.

Or as I like to explain it more simply when someone asks me, instructional design is the construction of instructional materials, modules, or lessons.

Instructional designers use academic theories and models of individuals’ learning and the cognitive processes that underpin the learning experience. These approaches ensure that instruction is as efficient as possible when transmitting knowledge or teaching skills to students.

To assure the quality of instruction, the instructional design process includes:

• Evaluating the specific needs of the students
• Establishing the outcome goals and key objectives of the training
• Developing and arranging assessment tasks
• Constructing teaching and learning activities

Some examples of instructional design models include ADDIE (Analysis, Design, Development, Implementation, and Evaluation), The Kirkpatrick Model, Bloom’s Taxonomy, ASSURE, and Situated Learning Theory.

What are the Components of Instructional Design?

While many different instructional design methods and procedures exist, many elements are the same. They include analysis, design, development, and evaluation.

1. Analysis

The parameters for building a course vary for different groups of learners. Adults, for example, are always interested in why they should learn anything and like to be self-directed. As a result, it’s critical to keep this in mind while creating a course for adults.

Similarly, I’ve found that building online courses for children differs greatly from designing training programs for adults because children rely on explanation.

2. Design

The student should properly appraise themselves by the end of the course. So how you design performance, conditions, and specified criteria should help them achieve the goal.

Well-defined objectives help the instructor select appropriate material, methods, media, and assessments.

3. Development

After the first two elements, the most crucial aspect is developing your material. It should contain a pre-planned exercise, a presentation, assessments, and comments from the students. Effective instructional materials should include easy-to-follow lessons, multimedia elements, and activities that help the student to understand and remember the content.

Learners are more likely to enroll in a course if knowledge is broken down into tiny, easy-to-understand chunks.

4. Evaluation

You can use a pre-test or one of the formative or summative evaluation criteria to determine whether the learner has grasped the material.

At the end of the course, learners should be assessed and given timely feedback to understand their knowledge levels.

It will help them determine whether or not to enroll in additional training courses to improve their abilities.

Instructional Design Models

To fulfill instructional goals, an instructional design model gives principles for organizing acceptable educative scenarios to accomplish instructional goals. Such models include ADDIE, Kirkpatrick, Bloom’s Taxonomy, and ASSURE.

Let’s look at some popular instructional design models.

The ADDIE Model

The ADDIE model is specifically created to enhance teaching with technology resources. It is presently employed in various instructional design procedures for e-learning.

It began in the mid-1970s as a military training project (USA) at the University of Florida (USA). However, it has expanded and adapted over time to meet current demands and is still very commonly used by instructional designers.

Its name is an abbreviation for the several stages of the process. As shown below, the scope is broad and flexible enough to meet any unique requirement:

Analysis Phase

During this phase, the designer’s focus is on the students to create a program that matches each student’s or participant’s degree of competence and intelligence. The analysis phase guarantees that what they already know is not repeated.

Instead, the focus is on topics and lessons that pupils have yet to investigate and learn. Instructors discriminate between what students already know and what they should know after finishing the course during this phase.

Design Phase

How will you present the course? This is when you put together the structural framework that will form the program you’re working on.

It entails having clear ideas on the strategy, approach, and path forward, as well as the deadlines to reach each goal and the resources to use.

Development Phase

This phase entails getting down to business and creating the course content and training materials. In the development stage, you prepare the content to be used and adapt it to the possibilities afforded by e-learning education once you decide on the style and manner you want to impart specific knowledge.

Implementation Phase

Once you established the goal, the path has been clearly outlined, and you can launch the course on your learning management system. It’s important to remember that all previous work has been done to ensure that this phase runs smoothly.

However, it is also critical that the method of instruction be in perfect alignment with the previously stated methodology and the tools employed.

Evaluation Phase

It is the final step where you will assess the effectiveness of the entire instructional design process. It comprises forms for students to appraise the applicability of the program they followed and the work of the e-learning teacher when putting it into practice.

The Kirkpatrick Model

The Kirkpatrick Methodology uses four tiers of criteria to measure aptitude, considering any type of training, whether informal or official.

This model was created by Dr. Donald Kirkpatrick (1924–2014) in the 1950s. The model can be used before, during, and after training to demonstrate the value of training to It is divided into four levels:

1. Reaction

This level aims to assess how people respond to the training model by asking questions that reveal the learners’ thinking.

Questions will determine whether the participant enjoyed their experience and found the program’s content relevant in their career.

2. Learning

This level of evaluation is used to determine how far learners have progressed in terms of competence, knowledge, and mindset.

Compared to level one, this level is significantly more difficult and time-consuming.

3. Transfer

This level examines how the learner’s behavior in class has changed after finishing the program.

Assessing the change allows you to see if the knowledge, mindset, or abilities given in the program are being applied in the learning environment.

4. Results

Level four measures the overall performance of the learning model by measuring elements such as involvement in the classroom and results, which is commonly regarded as the program’s primary purpose.

Bloom’s Taxonomy

Bloom’s Taxonomy is organized in a hierarchy, and like many other theories, it supports the premise that learning is based on existing knowledge and skills.

Each learning outcome must be met before going on to the next level.

• Remembering: entails extracting earlier knowledge from long-term memory and making connections to help with current comprehension.
• Understanding: entails employing ways to infer conclusions from existing data, such as summarizing and analyzing concepts, comparing message meaning, and interpreting both oral and written texts.
• Applying: entails putting the learning approach into action.
• Analyzing: requires breaking down information into valuable components while ensuring that each element is related to the ultimate purpose.
• Critiquing: material based on the learning criteria is part of evaluating.
• Creating: the concepts into a new structure to generate a meaningful thinking pattern.

ASSURE

ASSURE is an instructional design paradigm that aims to improve teaching and learning effectiveness. The abbreviation “ASSURE” stands for the different processes in the model.

Each stage is described in detail below.

A – Analyze Learners

The teacher should assess the characteristics of her students as the first stage in the procedure. There should be an emphasis on student characteristics linked to the targeted learning outcomes.

S – State Standards and Objectives

After analyzing the learner’s characteristics, the teacher must state the learning module’s criteria and objectives. This statement outlines what the students will accomplish due to the instruction.

S – Select Strategies, Technology, Media, and Materials

Given your learning objectives, you’ll need to choose instructional methodologies, technology, and media to help you achieve your goals.

U – Utilize Technology, Media, and Materials

This step in the ASSURE process is devising a strategy for implementing the technology, medium, and content you’ve chosen.

Like the rest of the instructional steps, you must ensure that your plans contribute to achieving the goals you’ve set.

R – Require Learner Participation

This step necessitates that you devise a strategy for actively engaging your students in the content you’re teaching. This needs to be determined at both the class and individual levels.

E – Evaluate and Revise

The final phase in the ASSURE procedure is where you evaluate the impact of your teaching on student learning. This involves reviewing your teaching methods and the technology, media, and resources you employed to make certain the learning objective is being achieved in the most effective manner.

Situated Learning Theory

Situated learning is based on psychology, sociology, cognitive science, and anthropology, among other topics. These learning encounters cannot take place in a vacuum. Situated learning theory highlights the importance of cognitive apprentices learning from experts.

When creating instruction, keep the following in mind:

• The most effective learning happens when learners are given an issue to solve and must think and act like experts.
• Realistic and situation-specific problems are required in learning.
• The instructor is a role model and coach instead of a lecturer.
• They’re also in charge of breaking down knowledge into small parts to help students solve challenges.
• Reflection, discussion, and evaluative thinking must be encouraged in the classroom.
• Even if most of the issues are group activities, students must actively participate in the scenario.
• The information learned through contextual and real-life activities is the “content” of a course, not neat bundles of information delivered by the instructor.

Why is Instructional Design Important in Education?

The goal of instructional design is to specify the fundamental factors that instructors must consider during the development of an educational program. The program will depend on the tools and resources available.

Instructional design is cost-effective

When it comes to establishing the curriculum plan, instructional designers use a thorough approach, zeroing in on the learning requirements that will yield the best results.

As a result, institutions avoid wasting money on training that does not change behavior. The cost of developing these tailored solutions, which are created from the ground up using instructional design principles, is swiftly repaid through effective learning that leads to results.

Instructional design produces measurable results

Instructional designers acquire information on institution objectives and ensure that learning objectives are aligned. It’s a chain reaction that starts at the top with set goals. Because these custom-built, research-backed solutions are designed to engage learners better, they frequently produce the best results.

Other Resources

• How to create an instructional design portfolio
• What is an instructional designer?
• Instructional designer salary guide
• The best instructional design courses online
• Instructional design resume tips
• Common instructional designer interview questions
• Where to find instructional design jobs
• Instructional design job listings
• Instructional design career path
• Instructional design masters programs
• The best instructional design certificate programs
• Top instructional design bootcamps
• How to write an instructional design cover letter

Final Thoughts

Your tool for institutional change is instructional design. You may use it to engage your students, modify their behavior, and change the culture of your classrooms. The days of teaching content that causes student dissatisfaction are long gone.

It’s easier than ever for instructional designers to develop content that learners want to complete, with options ranging from gamification and story to social and microlearning.

If you’re interested in learning more about instructional design or pursuing a career in the field, you should consider enrolling in the Professional Certificate in Instructional Design program from Emeritus. This comprehensive course teaches everything from the basics of instructional design to popular instructional design theories and best practices for implementation in an online learning environment.

You can learn more about the program and request a brochure at this link.

Best Overall

Emeritus Professional Instructional Design Certificate | Online Certificate Course

Gain firsthand expertise in instructional design principles and methodologies through this unique Professional Certificate program. Create impactful learning solutions and improve people's ability to learn.

Learn More!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

The post What is Instructional Design in Education? Everything You Need to Know appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Making the transition from teacher to instructional designer can be intimidating, but with the right preparation and dedication, it is possible. In fact, the career pivot is probably easier than you might think. As someone who’s been in the ID industry for nearly 20 years, I’ve seen countless teachers seamlessly enter the profession and succeed.

In the guide below, I’ll outline the steps you can take to switch from being a teacher to becoming an instructional designer.

Why Change Careers from Teaching to Instructional Design?

Instructional design is a field that focuses on developing instructional materials and learning activities to support effective teaching and learning. Instructional designers use knowledge of instructional theory, technology, and best practices in order to create engaging, effective learning experiences for students, employees, and other members of the public in a range of settings from academic to corporate to nonprofits and more.

As a teacher, you may find yourself looking for new ways to impact education and a switch to instructional design might just be the opportunity you’ve been searching for.

With a focus on creating and implementing effective educational materials and experiences, instructional design offers a unique opportunity to influence the way students learn and retain information.

Another thing I love about this role is how it also allows for creativity and innovation, offering the ability to design lessons that are engaging and interactive.

Additionally, instructional designers have the opportunity to work with a variety of industries and subject matter, providing a chance to expand your knowledge and skill set.

Plus, with the growing need for remote learning opportunities, instructional designers are in high demand, providing an exciting and stable career path for educators looking to make a change.

And of course, the instructional designer salary potential is definitely attractive when compared to teaching.

All in all, if you’re looking for a career that combines your passion for education with ample opportunities for personal and professional growth, instructional design might just be the perfect fit.

Why Teachers Make Good Instructional Designers

Teachers have a unique set of skills that make them valuable in many fields outside of the traditional classroom setting, especially instructional design. They have the unique ability to analyze, plan, and deliver effective lessons to students on a daily basis.

With a deep understanding of how to spur students’ interest and help them understand complex topics, I’ve found that teachers are a natural fit for instructional design.

They know how to tailor their materials to meet the needs of their students while keeping them engaged and motivated.

Additionally, teachers have honed their organizational skills, ensuring their lesson plans are well-structured and their materials are easy to access.

Overall, teachers have excellent organizational skills, the ability to communicate complex ideas clearly, and a natural inclination toward creative problem-solving. Given these traits, teachers can easily transfer their skills into the realm of instructional design, and become highly effective designers in their own right.

How to Transition from Teaching to Instructional Design

If you’re ready to start transitioning into the field of instructional design, there are some important steps you’ll need to take.

Get the right training

Best Overall

Emeritus Professional Instructional Design Certificate | Online Certificate Course

Gain firsthand expertise in instructional design principles and methodologies through this unique Professional Certificate program. Create impactful learning solutions and improve people's ability to learn.

Learn More!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

The first step to transitioning from teaching to instructional design is to complete an ID certificate program or specialized degree program.

This will provide you with a foundation in the basics of designing educational materials as well as a chance to gain hands-on experience.

If you’re thinking about switching from teaching to instructional design, look no further than Emeritus and their Professional Certificate in Instructional Design.

This fully online program offers everything you need to earn a certificate and launch your career in this exciting field.

With knowledgeable instructors covering industry-relevant topics, you’ll gain invaluable insights into analytics and methodologies that will help you create impactful learning solutions for your students or colleagues.

This immersive 5-month program offers a deep dive into both the foundations and cutting-edge approaches of the learning design field, ensuring that you graduate with the skills and knowledge necessary to succeed in your new career.

You can kickstart your journey toward a fulfilling and rewarding career today with Emeritus.

Click here to learn more about the program and request a free brochure.

Find your area of focus

Instructional designers can work in a range of sectors, including corporate, education, healthcare, and government. They can also specialize in certain areas of the process, like content creation, planning, UX design, or technical development.

As a teacher, you may already have a good idea of the sector and area that interests you most. Take some time to research these different areas further and determine which option best suits your strengths and preferences.

It’s important to think about your strengths and interests when deciding which sector you want to specialize in.

You may want to focus on designing materials for the corporate world or developing educational content for K-12 or higher ed institutions.

Whatever area you decide to focus on, you’ll need to have a passion for learning and teaching, as well as an aptitude for technical skills.

Polish your resume

Once you’ve earned a certification or degree in instructional design, it’s time to update your resume.

As a former teacher, your instructional designer resume can really shine.

Highlight your related experience, such as classroom management techniques, lesson plan development, and any relevant projects you’ve completed.

In addition to traditional teaching experience, include any volunteer work or outside activities that showcase your ability to design and deliver effective instructional materials.

It’s also a good idea to create an instructional design portfolio online that you can link to in your resume and include samples of your work.

This will demonstrate your creativity and show potential employers that you bring a unique perspective to the field of instructional design.

Start networking

Networking is an important part of any career transition, so be sure to take full advantage of the contacts and networks you’ve built up over the years as a teacher. A lot of people I’ve come across in instructional design tend to overlook this.

Reach out to colleagues, former students, and other professionals in your field who can provide guidance and advice on how to make the switch from teaching to instructional design.

You’ll also want to start building relationships with employers in the ID field.

Attend industry events, join professional organizations, and connect with recruiters to start networking in the instructional design space.

These connections will be invaluable as you look for available positions or freelance opportunities.

Apply to Relevant Jobs

The field of instructional design is growing rapidly, and there are lots of job opportunities out there.

Be sure to apply to all applicable positions that you find online or are referred to by your contacts in the industry. There are lots of instructional design adjacent jobs out there, so be on the lookout for listings for more than just ID positions. Job listings for curriculum designers, learning and development specialists, and similar positions may also be worth applying to.

When interviewing for an instructional design position, don’t hesitate to share examples of past teaching experiences and relevant projects you’ve completed.

Highlight how your background as a teacher will enable you to make a successful transition into instructional design.

Final Thoughts

If you’re a teacher exploring new career possibilities, the field of instructional design is definitely worth a look. It’s a great way to use your knowledge and experience to design effective learning solutions for any audience.

With the right preparation and dedication, you can make a successful transition from teaching to instructional design and pursue an exciting new career in the field.

Have any questions about making the switch from being a teacher to becoming an instructional designer? Share them by leaving a comment below.

The post How to Make the Transition from Teacher to Instructional Designer appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

From my experience, choosing the right virtual conference platform is crucial for guaranteeing a successful and seamless experience, not only for you as the organizer but also for the participants attending your event. The quality of the virtual events is an important factor to enhance attendee engagement and pull off a successful lecture, meeting, or event. Choose the wrong virtual conference software, and your meeting could turn into a disaster.

As an eLearning professional who’s hosted countless live online events over the years, I’ve reviewed and ranked the best virtual conference platforms available in 2024 — like vFairs, Zoho — and others comparing their features, performance, cost, and other factors (click here to learn about our entire Editorial Process & Methodology for product reviews).

What is the Best Virtual Conference Platform?

1. vFairs
2. Zoho Meeting
3. WebinarJam
4. GoToWebinar
5. Livestorm
6. Eventzilla
7. Demio
8. Airmeet
9. Click Meeting
10. Accelevents
11. Zoom
12. Cisco Webex
13. Hopin
14. Big Marker

1. Best Overall: vFairs

Did you know that vFairs is one of the most highly rated virtual conference platforms on G2? They’ve maintained a 4.7/5 star rating with over 1,500 reviews from happy customers.

It’s not your average video conference tool.

vFairs offers state-of-the-art features and fast-paced technology to take your event to the next level.

We’re talking about 3D virtual events. vFairs is a rare platform allowing us to create 3D immersive environments which make us feel like we’re actually standing inside the event venue.

Intuitive 3D visuals not only allow for easy navigation, but also make the event a whole lot enjoyable. Virtual lobbies give rise to high-impact visibility and better audience engagement.

Moreover, exhibit booths are also designed to enable sponsors and recruiters to design their space with customized branding tools.

vFairs also offers more event management solutions including in-person and hybrid events. Their mobile application & onsite tech offer a full end-to-end event solution to support easy event marketing and registration, user management, badging, check-in, networking, and personalized experiences for attendees onsite.

Top Features & Benefits

• Immersive 3D event environment
• Mobile event application
• Event registration and ticketing
• On-site badge printing and check-in
• Provides value to event exhibitors and sponsors
• In-person event technology & support
• Easy virtual networking through multifunctional chat, roundtables, and even smart matchmaking features
• Access to downloadable presentations, datasheet before or during the event
• Ability to integrate CRM tools
• Customized event landing pages
• AI event marketing modules
• Use multi-lingual support to facilitate a diverse, ethnic audience
• Accessibility support
• In-event gamification
• Conduct breakout sessions
• Organize virtual graduation ceremonies, alumni meetups, orientation days
• Conduct recruitment drives to speed up hiring and attract talent from around the globe

Cost

vFairs offers custom quotes for each client so that they only pay for what they need. For pricing, you can contact the vFairs team.

2. Also Great: Zoho Meeting

Great Choice

Zoho Meeting

Zoho Meeting is a powerful online meeting platform that makes it easy for teams to collaborate online easily and securely.

Try It Free!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Zoho Meeting is a great solution users looking for a single platform to host marketing virtual conferences, webinars, internal team meetings, one-on-one meetings, and more.

As one of the best virtual conference platforms, Zoho includes a ton of features, including interactive elements like audience Q&A, polling, making attendees presenters, and allowing participants to “raise a hand” to talk during the event (I really like this feature).

But where Zoho Meeting really shines in my experience is with its advanced security features. Zoho goes above and beyond to keep your virtual events protected against people who shouldn’t be in there, including encryption, two-factor authentication, notifications for entry requests, and more. I can’t stress how important this is.

Key Features And Benefits

• Advanced security features to keep your meetings safe and private
• Share multiple video feeds with your audience as you present
• Record and share your virtual events
• Download your events for offline viewing
• Get detailed analytics to assess your virtual event’s performance

Pricing

Zoho is one of the most affordable virtual conference platforms, offering a freemium plan and 2 paid plans for professionals:

• Free ($0)
• Meeting (starting at $1/mo & up depending on number of participants)
• Webinar (starting at $8/mo & up depending on number of participants)

Click here to try Zoho Meeting for free.

3. Also Good: WebinarJam

Looking for a virtual conference platform to amplify attendee engagement?

WebinarJam brings you the opportunity to host 4-hour webinars, meetings, and live streaming with a group of up to 5,000 participants and 6 presenters! 

It is a cloud-based virtual event platform providing high accessibility and compatibility with smartphones, laptops, or tablets. Just get a fast broadband internet connection and you’re good to go!

Dynamic business environments call for regular reports on sales, marketing, and demand conditions. You can capture analytics and translate them into actionable business strategies.

Simply put, this is the all-in-one software for virtual conferences and it’s one of the best webinar software tools out there.

WebinarJam comes in pretty handy here as it enables subordinates to participate as presenters by sharing their screens and broadcasting directly.

Top Features & Benefits

• Up to 5,000 attendees for your virtual events
• Great for hosting remote onboardings of new employees
• Up to 6 presenters
• Provides pre-designed templates to create registration pages
• Unlimited free hosting and split testing
• High-quality audio and video streaming in 30 FPS.
• Use the ‘Replica ‘Replay’ button to playback all live sessions with minute details
• Click on the ’Panic Button’ in case an incident occurs during live meeting
• Real-time polls and surveys allow for interaction with participants
• Give presentations by just importing the file and sharing it on your screen
• Annotation, drawings, and notes can be used to convey the message in detail

Cost

WebinarJam offers 4 paid plans:

• Starter Plan: $39 per month for up to 100 Attendees
• Basic Plan: $79 per month for up to 500 Attendees
• Professional Plan: $229 per month for up to 2000 Attendees
• Enterprise Plan: $379 per month for up to 5000 Attendees

There’s also a 30-day money-back guarantee, and they offer a 14-day trial to test things out.

4. Easiest to Use: GoToWebinar

GoToWebinar is another well-integrated virtual event software used by renowned corporations with a maximum of 2,000 attendees at once. It’s a super easy to use, unified communication platform to operate your business from anywhere in the world!

With extensive features and a myriad of engagement tools, I think this is one of the best virtual event platforms is for medium and large organizations. You can integrate it with MS Office, Slack, etc.

As a cherry on top, GoToWebinar allows you to amp up your virtual event promotion through GoToStage.

If your virtual event makes it to the top, you can generate better leads and drive massive traffic.

Top Features & Benefits

• Flexible webinar modes
• Fast, automated communication is possible through timely reminders, emails, and follow-ups
• Easy payments processing through Stripe
• Powerful data encryption and privacy features
• Record webinars with ‘GoToStage’ and allow users to watch at a later date
• Create customized dashboards and registration pages depicting the brand’s logo.
• Enhance your marketing strategy by tracking engagement through an analytics dashboard.

Cost

GoToWebinar offers 4 payment plans:

• Lite Plan costs $49 per month to host webinars that can hold up to 250 participants.
• Standard Plan costs $99 a month for 500 participants.
• Pro Plan is $199/month to host webinars for 1,000 participants
• Enterprise Plan is $399 a month for 3,000 participants.

You can try GoToWebinar free for 7 days — no credit card required.

5. Best for Analytics: Livestorm

Livestorm is a super versatile online video communication platform enabling organizations to host virtual events on a large scale with smooth workflows. It is a browser-based software with the main focus on growth acceleration.

It is ideal for high-pressure working environments where detailed analysis plays an important role in achieving performance objectives.

Whether you prefer simple online meetings or a full-fledged automated webinar, Livestorm has got you covered!

With a streamlined video communication platform and options for customization, you can produce engaging webinars to collaborate internally and leverage your brand.

With Livestorm, you benefit from a multi-language support team and GDPR compliance.

Top Features & Benefits

• Enables end to end engagement
• Provides on-demand, live, and pre-recorded online events
• Requires minimal setup and fewer technical tools
• Allows you to integrate the software with Slack and Zapier
• Supports dashboard analytics
• Schedule on-demand and automated webinars to expand reach
• Evaluate meeting report with intricate details about participants, attendance, deadlines
• Create registration pages, send emails, and chat in real-time with team members

Cost

Livestorm has a limited free plan, and paid plans start from $79 a month and up.

You can try Livestorm free to see if this is the right conference software for your needs.

6. Best for Marketing Your Event: Eventzilla

Eventzilla is an all-in-one registration platform aiming to improvise the way in which virtual and in-person events are marketed. It provides a solution-oriented approach to simplify registration, attendees, payments, and check-ins.

Simply put, event marketing has become a lot easier with Eventzilla.

You can create a mobile-friendly virtual event website in no time. The best part is Eventzilla does not require any coding, so the whole registration process becomes quicker.

From conferences, virtual events to educational training, Eventzilla provides a one-stop solution to organize any event in a systematic manner.

With a targeted marketing campaign, it becomes possible to convert potential visitors into event attendees, increasing your ROI!

Top Features & Benefits

• No coding required for designing registration workflows
• Use event agenda builder to publish agendas in a short span of time
• Schedule multiple guest speaker sessions
• Use discount codes to boost event attendance
• Get real-time feedback through polls and surveys
• Seamless check-ins by scanning barcode or entering attendee’s name

Cost

Eventzilla offers 3 payment plans:

• Basic: $1.50 per registration
• Pro: $1.50+1.9% per registration
• Plus: $1.50+2.9% per registration

Click here to learn more.

7. Best for Easy Customization: Demio

Demio is all about hosting a distraction-free, smooth webinar and virtual event.

This platform is all about creating ‘effective webinars’ with less work.

By following a solid structure of registration, promotion, and marketing, you don’t have to worry about technical glitches on the event day.

Demio offers separate campaigns for each event type: live streaming, live scheduled sessions, or even automated webinars.

Automated webinars are on autopilot which means there is less human intervention required, hence saving time and allowing you to focus on other significant matters.

Attendance management has also become easier with maintaining databases of members, checking their registration status, etc., and exporting them into a CSV file.

Another advantage of Demio is the fact that it supports all web browsers ( Google Chrome, Microsoft Edge, Safari)  which isn’t always the case with other virtual event platforms.

Top Features & Benefits

• Opportunity to network and build long-term relationships with customers and leads.
• Customize your domain with logo and other branding elements
• Vibrant, event platform appeals to the attendees and boosts interaction
• No need to download heavy application software
• Upload presentations and videos directly from Demio

Cost

Demio offers 2 payment plans:

• Starter Plan costs $59/month for a 50-person room
• Growth Plan costs $109/month for a 150-person room with customized branding and has options for more visitors.

You can try Demio free for 14 days.

8. Best for Sponsorships: Airmeet

Airmeet is a platform that supports extensive sponsorships and aims to build sustainable social interactions.

This software enables you to maintain the profile of keynote speakers so attendees can identify those they would like to engage with.

This is called one-to-one networking.

With just one click, you can join networking booths and connect with people of similar interests.

If you’re a virtual event organizer on the lookout for good sponsorships, Airmeet is definitely your go-to option. Additionally, sponsors have the option to sell the tickets directly from Airmeet and gather feedback.

The software also consists of a private virtual backstage so members may rehearse or have discussions right before appearing in front of the audience.

Top Features & Benefits

• User-friendly platform
• Fast, one-to-one networking
• Easily integrates with every MarTech tool
• Stream your events to various platforms ( Facebook, LinkedIn, YouTube)
• Use interactive emojis- ‘raise hand’ button to ask questions
• Use real-time analytics and record sessions
• Connects with Stripe for processing payments for event tickets
• Private virtual backstage

Cost

Airmeet offers a few types of plans, including a free plan for up to 100 participants. All other paid plans have pricing available by request.

Get started for free.

9. Best for Large Events: ClickMeeting

Events like trade shows and career fairs are often massive, and accommodating a huge audience becomes a daunting task. It requires strategic planning relating to networking features, booths, marketing, registration, etc.

All of these issues are resolved with the outstanding ClickMeeting software.

Its ‘Huge Virtual Events’ feature allows you to incorporate 10,000 participants and also include a multi-user account to interact with peers.

On top of that, heavy workflows will run smoothly without having to worry about small technical glitches.

ClickMeeting also gives the option to create webinar rooms when you host virtual events for product demos, recruitment drives, training, etc.

There’s even a waiting room where the host can present the agenda of the virtual event before starting off.

Top Features & Benefits

• Customizable email templates
• Simultaneously live stream on Facebook and YouTube
• Use an address book to record contact details
• Use report analytics for attendance statistics.
• Real-time translation into 52 different languages
• Private chats and Q&A sessions are moderated

Cost

ClickMeeting offers 3 payment plans

• Live: $26/month
• Automated: $42/month
• Enterprise: Custom packages

You can try ClickMeeting free for 30 days.

10. Best Basic Virtual Conference Platform: Accelevents

Want a cost-effective yet interactive platform? Accelevents is your way to go!

Specially designed for small and medium-sized enterprises, Accelevents is a user-friendly software enabling you to create host virtual events and hybrid events.

It is robust and consists of all interactive features necessary to keep your business thriving.

The best part is Accelevents is not just limited to corporations, but can also be used for educational purposes, product launches, trade shows, career fairs, or even fundraisers.

It is an all-in-one effective communication tool to fulfill everyone’s diverse needs.

Top Features & Benefits

• Create customized events
• Integrate with Salesforce and HubSpot
• Segment audience according to demographics
• Active your event hub and monitor regularly
• Create multiple ticket-tiers (paid, free, donation-based)
• Interact with people from different exhibitor booths
• Live sessions can be moderated
• Evaluate the success of the event through exhibitor-led reports

Cost

Accelevents offers multiple payment plans, including the ability to pay per event (starting at $500 per event) or to subscribe for an unlimited events plan at a better value.

Unlimited events plans include:

• Professional- $5000/year
• Business- $12,000/year

11. Most Popular: Zoom

Zoom is one of the most versatile virtual conference software, and it has a huge user base.

It’s super robust, easy to use, and offers all features necessary to conduct meetups, classes, summits, training, etc.

When COVID-19 struck the world, Zoom was one of the most widely used virtual event platforms worldwide.

Now that many advanced software platforms have flooded the market, its customer base has reduced a bit, but it’s still a great option for many.

It may not be the best option for large-scale high-performing virtual events (there are other Zoom alternatives better for this), but it still works well if you prefer something basic yet effective in conveying the message.

Zoom Rooms for Touch is a prominent feature that helps attendees share their desktop or mobile screen.

Whiteboards and annotations are also pretty useful during calculation-based discussions. Other participants can pitch in their ideas with the co-annotate option.

Plus, you can open up to 12 whiteboards at a time and their content would also be saved automatically.

Make sure to check out our guide to the best Zoom microphones for presenting your online event.

Top Features & Benefits

• Multiple breakout rooms for your virtual event
• Detailed report on participants’ entering and leaving time
• Use ‘raise hand’ button to ask questions
• Multi-desktop, wireless sharing
• Ability to record sessions and conduct polls
• Mute/unmute participants to keep virtual events orderly
• Integrates smoothly with Pardot, Salesforce, and Kaltura
• Uses adequate data protection and encryption techniques

Cost

Zoom’s pricing plans for webinars and events includes the following plans:

• Pro: $149.90/year
• Business: $199.90/year
• Enterprise: $250/year

12. Best for Scalability: Cisco Webex

WebEx is all about productivity! Take advantage of this cloud-based suite of productivity and attain your corporate goals with a diversified and well-connected team.

An interactive virtual conference with a collaborative environment and the right communication forms are the basis of conducting a successful webinar.

With WebEx, you can host webinars and virtual events with up to 3,000 participants and get access to many innovative features.

To facilitate users, WebEx offers remote support in case of any technical difficulties pertaining to audio or video quality.

WebEx Training is another brainchild of Cisco. It is specially curated to accommodate training for new and existing employees around the globe.

WebEx mobile app is another convenient solution to eliminate the problem of mobility. Now, you can stay connected whether you are offshore or on a bus.

Top Features & Benefits

• Get access to live and pre-recorded session
• Post-event survey through Q&A, polls and forms
• Visual enhancement tools such as white digital boards
• Smooth broadcasting and screen sharing
• Use Webex Cloud Calling
• Firewall protection to prevent breach of privacy
• Supports Android and iOS
• Crisp, uninterrupted audio system

Cost

WebEx offers 2 payment plans:

• Meet plan: $14.50/month
• Meet + Call plan: $25/month

13. Best for Networking: Hopin

What’s better than getting the opportunity to interact with like-minded individuals during a virtual event?

While this idea may seem vague at first, Hopin has actually made wireless interaction a possibility.

Its high-speed network algorithm drives the software and matches people according to pre-set criteria. Pretty cool, right?

In addition, Hopin accommodates up to 2,000 attendees which is a substantial advantage for large-scale events. A big audience with better engagement ultimately results in yielding higher ROIs.

Top Features & Benefits

• Provides virtual stage and backstage or pre-event preparation
• Sponsor exhibition hall
• Use multiple breakout sessions
• Use flexible branding elements
• Ability to conduct hybrid events to nurture company culture
• Create captivating landing pages
• Consists of powerful data encryption standards.

Cost

Hopin offers 2 different plans

• Free
• Starter – $67/month
• Business – starts at $6,000

Business and enterprise plans require quotations.

14. Best No-Download Platform: Big Marker

Don’t we all despise downloading heavy software only to find our laptops and smartphones hanging afterward? Big Marker solves this problem!

Now, you can conduct value-driven events with this no-download video conference platform compatible with all web browsers.

With this streamlined AI-driven virtual events platform, you can conduct video-based series, summits, expand your customer base and sell products through automated funnels. Overall, it’s a win-win situation!

Big Marker has got its own embeddable video player that can be customized to portray your brand. Whatever content you display will help in generating leads. Besides, other interactive features such as Q&A, polls, and offers provide an unforgettable webinar experience.

Top Features & Benefits

• Automatic and manual pop-ups displays
• Create landing page templates
• Built-in marketing and growth tools
• Automated video marketing and training
• Embedded registration forms on the website
• Gather feedback through Google Forms
• Host multi-media events by connecting to Facebook and YouTube
• No need of special equipment

Cost

Big Markers offers 3 payment plans, all of which require reaching out for a quote:

• Basic
• Enterprise
• Enterprise+

What is Virtual Conference Software?

Virtual conference software is a communication tool that allows two or more parties to conduct real-time face-to-face virtual events and interact through audio and video transmission. It resolves the problem of mobility and enables people around the globe to work and study from anywhere in the world.

With inclusive virtual lobbies, report analytics, and other interactive features, you can easily gauge the feedback on virtual events. All you need is a laptop or smartphone and a fast internet connection to reconnect with the world!

The Pros and Cons of Using Virtual Conference Platforms

If you’re thinking of hosting a virtual conference or meeting, it’s important to understand some of the benefits and drawbacks the various virtual event platforms provide:

Pros

• Inclusive approach to business communication
• Saves time involved in commuting from one place to another
• Saves costs relating to logistics, rent, food, etc
• Facilitates people with disabilities
• Analyze attendance and devise marketing plans accordingly

Cons

• Possibility of the audience getting bored without in-person interactions
• Time zones may lead to ineffective, one-way communication

What Types of Virtual Events Can You Host?

With the right virtual event software, you can host all types of functions online, including:

Webinars

• Communicate ideas, goals, and proposals with an external audience
• Entails registration process
• Broad marketing goals

Virtual conferences

• Completely remote
• Internal virtual events with no marketing functions
• Multiple break-out sessions

Hybrid events

• Most sustainable option
• Combination of in-person and online event
• Convenient for stay-at-home mothers

Educational events

• Lectures
• School functions
• Orientations
• Business trainings

How Much Does a Virtual Conference Platform Cost?

Virtual event platforms come in a wide range of prices. The exact cost of putting on a virtual conference depends on a number of factors, including how many attendees you’ll be hosting, how many presenters there will be, what additional features you might need (e.g. interactive elements like quizzes, live captioning, etc.).

Most virtual events platforms charge by the month and have different packages based on the features you choose.

What To Look For When Choosing The Best Virtual Conference Platform

As someone who’s hosted a number of online events, I’ve learned there’s no one-size-fits-all solution for choosing the right virtual event software.

While all of the options above are great, the right virtual conferencing software for your organization will depend on a number of factors, such as:

What Features Do You Need?

Some common features you may want your virtual event platform to include are:

Breakout rooms

These rooms enable to divide a large meeting into smaller subgroups so that teamwork and brainstorming are made possible with breakout sessions. The whole team can work on their projects separately with any overlapping or distortion of messages.

Networking functions

An engaged audience is a vital part of a successful virtual event.

Although the traditional purpose of a virtual event is to communicate and present information to the attendees, nowadays participants also look for networking opportunities with fellow attendees.

This keeps them engaged, provides variety, and enables them to build valuable connections which continue even after your online events have completed.

Networking sessions help participants regain focus after long presentations and workshops.

Live tech support for event organizers and the attendees.

We all may know how to browse the web but not all of us are capable enough to seamlessly host virtual events.

When deciding on a virtual event platform, don’t underestimate the importance of having on-demand tech support available to the organizer which can assist in setting up your online events in real-time.

Similarly, the presence of live chat support to the attendee can make the experience more eventful as now they would have to spend less time figuring out the tech. Attendee engagement levels can be negatively impacted if guests feel agitated while trying to explore the platform.

Integration capabilities

Regardless of whether your virtual event has simple webinar sessions or full-fledged multi-stream seminars, you will need to make use of some integration systems.

It’s a good idea to create a list of all the other systems you would use alongside the event management platform to keep an eye out when comparing their integration capabilities.

For instance, if you are using an app simultaneously with your virtual event, you would want to know if the data is automatically updated across both systems.

Choosing a virtual event platform that caters to most of your integration needs will make the data transfer processes seamless and also provide an overall pleasant experience.

Event insights and analytics

With all the other benefits that an online events management system provides, access to insights about attendees’ experience is a great tool to plan future virtual events to be more successful and effective.

Data and analytics to help event organizers find improvements to current practices to make future events even more engaging and eventful.

Meaningful data is also the main incentive for sponsors to continue funding your event as they gain highly valuable insights which help them make informed decisions about their products and services. Some conference platforms allow you to view attendee activity such as the documents they download, the different booths they visited and the time spent at each of them, and so on.

Depending on the type of data and reports that you need, you can compare different event platforms. Data protection and privacy should be kept as the topmost priority.

Customizable Features

The most significant customizable feature to consider would be “Branding”. Making the attendees feel like they are in a specific environment will distinguish your brand from others and will also create a sense of belonging.

Branding features should preferably include the ability to integrate your organization’s messaging and infographics to be consistent across all channels of communication (websites, registration forms, and emails).

Concurrently, customization should also be available to the attendee to make the virtual event as accessible as possible.

For example, attendees can be given the option to adjust font size, sound mode depending on room environment, etc.

You could set up an option to make certain sessions visible to specific people, for instance, making breakout sessions within a virtual event exclusive to only those who used a certain voucher code.

Ticket management

Conference ticketing is another handy feature especially when you’re marketing your virtual event on a large scale. Software integrated with end-to-end ticketing services makes registration a lot easier.

How easy is it to use?

The easier your virtual conference platform is to use, the greater the participation will be and the better your results will be.

Making your virtual events easy to attend will increase the number of participants hence enabling a great potential for conversion.

One common problem is that people who register for an online event are unable to locate the registration link or joining details. This eventually leads to either losing the attendee completely or missing out on information due to delays both of which promote loss and inefficiency to the event organizer and the attendee.

A virtual events platform that has built-in ticketing and registration features can make it much easier for your audience to attend your event.

The platform should also have a simple, easy-to-understand interface for both the presenters and the attendees.

How many attendees will you have?

Different platforms and plans allow for different numbers of maximum participants. If you’re hosting a large virtual event with thousands of attendees, make sure you choose a platform and plan that will allow this.

What’s your budget?

Virtual event platforms are available at a wide range of prices, from free plans with limited to robust packages that cost hundreds per month but boast a bevy of features. Know your budget and match that with your needs.

Final Thoughts

The best virtual conference platforms can make all the difference for the success of your online events. Choosing the right platform is critical for the success of your virtual and hybrid events, so take your time and do some research before making a decision.

And remember, many of these online conference platforms offer free trials, so feel free to test a few out before committing to any single one.

Hopefully, this guide has provided you with everything you need to know about the best virtual conference platforms.

To recap, our top 3 picks for virtual event platforms:

• vFairs
• WebinarJam
• GoToWebinar

Let’s not wait for the perfect time when on-ground, physical events are back. Now is the time to scale up your business or improve your teaching capabilities using the best virtual conference software platforms available today!

Have any questions about choosing the right virtual events platform? Leave a comment below and we’ll help you out. 

The post 14 Best Virtual Conference Platforms for Events & Meetings (2024) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Employers in a range of industries — not just instructional design — have started to accept bootcamps as a valid means of training. In fact, a recent report from the University of New Hampshire found that 80% of hiring managers surveyed in the tech industry have offered jobs to bootcamp students within their company, and 99.8% would do it again.

I’m a living, breathing testament to the power of instructional design bootcamps. Ever since the rise of eLearning technology caught my attention some 20 years ago, I’ve taken countless online bootcamps, courses, webinars, and other virtual training programs to gain knowledge and experience in the field. And it hasn’t slowed down my success in the field one bit.

From teaching you essential foundational instructional design principles to covering the latest technological breakthroughs, bootcamps are a great way to get the training you need on a short timeline.

I’ve put together this list of the best instructional design bootcamps online with picks from Emeritus, Devlin Peck,  and more. I’ve taken into consideration factors like program length and cost, curriculum depth, student feedback, and instructor qualifications when ranking these programs (click here to learn about our entire Editorial Process & Methodology for product reviews).

What are the Best Instructional Design Bootcamps Online?

Here are our picks for the top ID bootcamps worth enrolling in right now…

1. Professional Certificate in Instructional Design (Emeritus)

Best Overall

Emeritus Professional Instructional Design Certificate | Online Certificate Course

Gain firsthand expertise in instructional design principles and methodologies through this unique Professional Certificate program. Create impactful learning solutions and improve people's ability to learn.

Learn More!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

$3,500 total (early-bird discounts may be available at certain times during enrollment; flexible payment options also available)

Duration

5 months

Pros

• Details, current instructional design training gets you career-ready fast
• This course is very new and is totally up to date with lessons on the latest technology, tools, and instructional design methods
• Hands-on, interactive instruction helps students learn more effectively
• Cohort-style learning lets you connect with other students for feedback and networking

Cons

• Class is only offered a few times a year

Overview

Want to build all the skills you need to confidently launch a career in instructional design? The Professional Certificate in Instructional Design from Emeritus is the bootcamp course you’re looking for.

This 5-month intensive program goes deeper than I expected into the foundational principles of instructional design, covering topics like learner engagement, developing content and assessments, recognizing learning objectives, accessibility, and more. It’s impressively comprehensive for such a quick program.

Led by experienced instructors teaching current best practices, you’ll gain an in-depth understanding of instructional design theory and application.

Simply put, I really think this is the most comprehensive ID bootcamp out there, covering all aspects of instructional design in a single program.

You’ll learn along with a cohort of like-minded peers and have access to plenty of support throughout your journey.

Another thing I liked is that at the end of the bootcamp, you get to create a portfolio showcasing your instructional design work that you can share with prospective employers to help you land a job in the field.

This bootcamp is great for teachers and educators who are thinking about transitioning into a career in instructional design, recent graduates and early career ID professionals, human resources/learning development teams at businesses, and anyone else looking to expand their skillset and upskill.

Click here to learn more about the program and request a free brochure.

2. The Instructional Design Bootcamp (Devlin Peck)

Price

$7,400

Duration

5 months

Pros

• Get paired with a bootcamp pro for additional 1-on-1 support
• Bootcamp is led by a full team of seasoned pros
• Great networking opportunities

Cons

• The course is more expensive than others on the list
• Some students have said they feel it focuses too much on eLearning development as opposed to purely instructional design

Overview

This instructional design bootcamp from Devlin Peck promises to “help you transition from burnt-out educator to remote instructional designer” and says their graduates “land corporate instructional design roles where they can work from home and earn, on average, $85k per year.”

Devlin and I have both been blogging in this space for several years now. I love his work and can definitely say he’s the real deal.

His bootcamp is designed to make it easy for aspiring instructional designers to get the skills and knowledge they need to enter the industry while also helping them build portfolios that can help them stand out in the job market.

The 5-month program gives students hands-on experience with the tools used most in instructional design.

One of the things I really like about it is the lectures are presented in short, easy-to-follow videos, rather than long, drawn-out hourlong sessions. This makes it easier for busy professionals to stay on top of the course material.

The bootcamp also offers plenty of support throughout with one-on-one mentorship, feedback, and guidance from instructors who are experts in their fields.

They also provide a money-back guarantee that pledges they’ll offer “a full, 100% refund if you’re not able to land paid instructional design work after completing the bootcamp and applying our feedback.”

3. Instructional Design Bootcamp (24/7 Teach)

Price

$1,865.55 for the short 10-week bootcamp or $6,713.55 for the full 10-month program

Duration

10 weeks or 10 months, depending on the program you choose

Pros

• Offers live 1-on-1 mentorship
• Helps you gain experience by doing real projects
• Comes with a job guarantee

Cons

• The short bootcamp probably isn’t comprehensive enough for those just starting out
• On the pricier side

Overview

Are you ready to kickstart your career as a professional instructional designer? Look no further than this bootcamp!

Through this program, you will gain the innovative skills needed to create engaging and effective learning experiences.

You’ll begin by mastering basic Instructional Design theories and frameworks, then move on to Project-Based Learning strategy and design.

With this foundation, you’ll learn how to analyze learning needs, define solid instructional objectives and goals, and create storyboards for your instructional projects.

From there, you’ll delve into writing effective and engaging content and incorporating interactivity and multimedia elements like graphics and video into your work.

And finally, you’ll learn how to evaluate learning and ensure your projects are making a real impact.

In this exciting and dynamic instructional design bootcamp, you will have the opportunity to collaborate and problem-solve with a team of like-minded individuals.

Together, you will put your heads together to complete learner analyses, develop learning goals and objectives, and devise engaging lesson scenarios using popular instructional design models.

Armed with cutting-edge instructional design tools, you will then set out to design compelling storyboards and formulate assessments and discussion questions that will put your learners to the test.

You will also have the chance to work alongside Subject Matter Experts (SMEs), and get hands-on experience working with a variety of authoring tools and Learning Management Systems (LMS).

And when all is said and done, you’ll walk away with a stunning portfolio of real projects that will serve as a powerful testament to your skills and expertise in the field of instructional design.

4. The eLearning Freelancer Bootcamp (IDOL Courses)

Price

$497 or 3 payments of $185

Duration

8 weeks

Pros

• Great advice for those looking to launch an ID business
• Self-paced study offers flexibility
• Lots of helpful resources

Cons

• The community lacks substance

Overview

This instructional design bootcamp is aimed at those who already have ID skills and are looking to start their own freelance business as an eLearning professional.

Across 8 in-depth modules, you’ll learn how to identify your target audience, price your services, find clients, manage contracts and accounts, provide excellent customer service that drives repeat business and referrals, and more.

Led by 3 experienced eLearning professionals, this bootcamp offers 8 weekly workshops, coaching and mentoring from the instructors, and access to a private community (basically a Facebook Group) where you can connect with other freelancers.

At the end of this bootcamp, you’ll have a comprehensive understanding of how to build and run your own successful eLearning freelance business.

Tips for Choosing the Right Instructional Design Bootcamp for Your Needs

While I’ve presented a short, curated list of what I believe are the top ID bootcamp programs available today, I realize that not everyone is the same. What’s best for one person might not be best for someone else.

To help ensure you enroll in the right bootcamp for your specific needs, consider the following:

• What are your goals? Are you looking to learn instructional design from the ground up? Want to land a corporate job in the field? Or do you already have a handle on instructional design theories and need info on how to build your own business? Understanding your specific goals will help you choose the right bootcamp for you.
• How much time and money can you invest? Different bootcamps require different amounts of commitment in terms of both time and money. Make sure to factor these into your decision-making process before committing to a particular program.
• Are there any prerequisites? Some bootcamps may require you to have prior experience with instructional design before enrolling. This is not the case for all bootcamps, but be sure to check each one’s prerequisites before signing up.
• What type of support do they offer? I highly recommend enrolling in a bootcamp that offers plenty of support throughout, such as one-on-one mentoring and feedback from instructors who are knowledgeable in the field. This can go a long way in helping you get the most out of the program.

Useful Resources

• What is Instructional Design?
• Instructional Designer Job Description
• Instructional Design Masters Programs
• Instructional Design Certificate Programs
• How to Write an Instructional Design Cover Letter
• Instructional Design Career Path & Roadmap
• Common Instructional Designer Interview Questions
• Where to Find Instructional Design Jobs
• Instructional Design Salary Statistics
• Instructional Design Resume Tips
• Instructional Design vs Curriculum Development

Final Thoughts

The right ID bootcamp program can help you quickly gain the skills and knowledge you need to become a successful instructional designer.

Before signing up for any program, however, I can’t stress enough how important it is to assess your own goals and needs as well as the program’s prerequisites and support offerings. While I’m a big proponent of bootcamps, they aren’t for everyone, and they’re not always some magic bullet that’s going to propel you to your dream job just because you worked your way through it. Taking all of these factors into consideration will help ensure that you get the most out of your investment in the bootcamp.

By learning from experienced instructors and collaborating with a team of like-minded professionals, you can build a strong foundation for your instructional design career.

Have any questions about our guide to the best instructional design bootcamps online? Let us know by commenting below.

The post The Best Instructional Design Bootcamps Online (2023 Rankings) appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

As someone who’s worked in the industry for nearly 20 years, I can tell you an instructional design career path can go in a lot of different directions. From working in academia to designing corporate training programs, the possibilities are endless. In fact, a current search for instructional design jobs on Indeed finds nearly 10,000 open positions of all types. It’s important to understand your skills, interests, and goals so you can decide which direction is right for you.

In the guide below, I’ll take a look at some of the different career paths and pivots an instructional designer can take and discuss some practical tips to help you reach your goals.

What Sectors Can Instructional Designers Work In?

As an instructional designer, you have the opportunity to work in a variety of sectors, such as:

• Education: Instructional design is often used in education settings to create courses and curriculums for schools, universities, and other learning institutions.
• Corporate Training: Many organizations use instructional design to create training programs for their employees.
• Government: Instructional designers are sought-after in the government sector, where they develop courses and training materials for public servants.
• Nonprofits & Charities: Instructional designers can help nonprofits and charities spread awareness by creating content that expands knowledge or promotes certain causes.
• Medical: Instructional designers are increasingly being used in the medical industry to create things like training modules for healthcare professionals.
• Technology: Instructional design can be used to create technical documents, software tutorials, and other materials related to technology products and services.
• Public Speaking & Consulting: As an instructional designer, you may also have the opportunity to speak at conferences or offer consulting services in your field of expertise.

The type of work you might be tasked with as an instructional designer can vary greatly depending on the organization you work for.

One aspect that plays a big role in dictating your responsibilities is the mission and purpose of the organization. For instance, if you are working in a corporate environment, you may find yourself working on training programs aimed at improving employee performance or growing sales.

On the other hand, if you are working in a university setting, you may be tasked with creating courses and curriculums that help students learn more effectively. This will likely involve collaborating with faculty members to enhance their curriculum, whether it be for classroom or remote learning.

Job Opportunities for Instructional Designers

Now that you have an idea of the different industries you can work in as an instructional designer, let’s take a look at some of the specific types of jobs you can pursue.

• Instructional Designer: An instructional designer oversees the entire design process from conception to implementation. This may involve conducting needs analysis, designing course materials, and developing assessments.
• Course Developer: A course developer is responsible for designing, creating, and delivering educational content in a variety of formats. This may involve developing online courses, creating video tutorials, or writing technical documents.
• eLearning Curriculum Developer: A curriculum developer works with faculty members to create eLearning course curriculums. This may involve designing lesson plans, selecting resources, and developing assessment materials.
• Distance Educational Specialist: A distance education specialist typically works with other university staff members in the development, implementation, and maintenance of the institution’s online learning programs.
• Instructional Technology Specialist: An instructional technology specialist helps organizations develop and implement learning technologies to improve performance and efficiency. They must have an understanding of the organization’s mission and purpose, as well as the ability to create solutions that help them reach their goals.
• Instructional Systems Designer: An instructional systems designer is responsible for designing instructional materials and programs to meet the needs of learners. This may involve developing courses, creating learning activities, or providing instructional support.
• Training & Development Manager: A training and development manager is responsible for creating and managing training programs in an organization. This may involve developing courses, writing job aids, or providing technical support to staff members.
• Learning Experience Designer: A learning experience designer is responsible for creating interactive learning experiences that engage and motivate learners. They must have the ability to create engaging content, utilize multimedia technologies, and apply best practices in instructional design.
• Learning & Development Specialist: A learning and development specialist assists organizations in creating and executing training programs with the goal of enhancing employee productivity and efficiency. The specialist’s responsibilities include identifying training needs, creating training programs, preparing teaching materials, providing training sessions, and assessing training program results.
• Project Manager: As a project manager, you will be responsible for overseeing the instructional design process. This may involve managing budgets, timelines, and personnel in order to ensure that projects are on track and meeting goals.
• Chief Learning Officer: A chief learning officer is responsible for leading the organization’s strategic efforts in education and training. They must be able to create effective learning strategies, manage resources, and develop innovative solutions.

These are just a few of the many job opportunities available to instructional designers. As the demand for educational content continues to grow, so does the need for talented professionals who can create and deliver engaging instruction. With the right skills and qualifications, instructional designers can make a meaningful contribution to any organization in a variety of ways.

Moving Ahead in Your Instructional Design Career Path

If you’re looking to progress in your instructional design career, there are a few steps you can take to stand out from the crowd.

Gain New Skills

Best Overall

Emeritus Professional Instructional Design Certificate | Online Certificate Course

Gain firsthand expertise in instructional design principles and methodologies through this unique Professional Certificate program. Create impactful learning solutions and improve people's ability to learn.

Learn More!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

First, focus on continuing your education and developing your ID skills. Consider taking courses or workshops related to instructional design, as well as learning about new technologies that can make instruction more engaging and effective.

For instructional designers, keeping up with emerging educational technologies and techniques is essential for staying relevant. Over the 20 years I’ve been in the industry, I’ve seen how things evolve over time. What was relevant a few years ago may no longer be relevant today.

Fortunately, Emeritus’ Professional Certificate in Instructional Design program offers a comprehensive solution for those looking to build their skills and progress in their field.

With a curriculum designed to meet the unique needs of instructional designers, this program provides students with cutting-edge insights and practical hands-on experience. Whether you’re a seasoned professional or just starting out in the field, Emeritus’ Professional Certificate in Instructional Design program has everything you need to take your career to the next level.

In just five months, you’ll learn foundational theories, best practices, and practical tips for designing better eLearning experiences.

Click here to learn more about the program and request a free brochure.

Build Your Network

Another way to progress in your instructional design career is to build a strong professional network.

I’ve found that joining industry organizations, attending conferences and events, and connecting with colleagues can help you stay up-to-date on new trends and developments in the field.

Additionally, networking can open the doors to new opportunities for advancement.

By connecting with professionals who are further along in their careers, you can get advice and gain valuable insight into the hiring process.

Create a Portfolio

Don’t forget to share your accomplishments and show off your skills by publishing an instructional design portfolio online. I’m constantly preaching the importance of having a good portfolio to my fellow instructional designers.

Create a portfolio website that showcases your work or make sure to include relevant projects on your resume. This will help demonstrate to potential employers that you have the knowledge and experience necessary to create engaging instruction.

Practice Effective Communication

Develop strong communication skills, both verbal and written, to interact effectively with stakeholders, clients, and learners. This includes being able to explain complex concepts in a clear and concise manner.

Have a Clear Career Goal in Mind

Finally, it’s important to have a clear goal in mind when it comes to your instructional design career.

Do you want to move up in the current organization or look for opportunities outside? Do you plan on specializing in a particular field of instructional design or focus on continuing education?

Having a plan – and the dedication to carry it out – will help you create and follow the ideal instructional design career path for your goals.

Useful Resources

• Instructional Designer Job Description
• Instructional Design Masters Programs
• Instructional Design Certificate Programs
• Instructional Design Bootcamps
• How to Write an Instructional Design Cover Letter
• Instructional Design Career Path & Roadmap
• Common Instructional Designer Interview Questions
• Where to Find Instructional Design Jobs
• Instructional Design Salary Statistics
• Instructional Design Resume Tips

The Bottom Line

Instructional design is a growing field that offers numerous opportunities for professionals to make an impact.

Whether you’re looking for a new job or want to progress in your existing role, following the tips outlined above can help take your career path to the next level.

With the right skills and qualifications, instructional designers can make a fantastic living in a number of different industries.

So, take the time to develop your skills and create a plan for success – and you’ll be sure to find success in the field of instructional design.

Have any questions about this guide to the instructional design career path? Let me know by commenting below.

The post Instructional Design Career Path & Roadmap: Everything You Need to Know appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Teaching someone a new language isn’t easy, and neither is learning one. English is notoriously tricky, too, with more grammatical and spelling exceptions than just about any other language across the globe.

That’s where learning apps like Galaxy Kids can make a world of difference. In this Galaxy Kids review, we’ll take a look at how the AI-powered app works and explore its pros and cons.

How Does Galaxy Kids Work?

Galaxy Kids – A Galaxy of Learning Fun

Galaxy Kids is an innovative app that gives kids 1-on-1 speaking practice and real-time grammar correction through virtual AI tutors, making English learning feel like a game while building their fluency and confidence.

Try a Free Lesson!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Galaxy Kids works by harnessing the power of AI to help young kids learn English naturally.

The app is designed for the preschool set: think ages 2-5.

Little ones using the app are placed on a Learning Path, where they’ll encounter fun English language lessons that gradually increase in complexity as they move forward.

Lessons in the Galaxy Kids program feature conversations and guidance from Learning Buddies.  Though they look like kooky cartoons, these guides are actually in place to provide valuable help for your little learner.

Thanks to powerful AI technology, the Learning Buddies on Galaxy Kids will help your child build essential vocabulary, pronunciation, and fluency skills as they work through their lessons.

Learning Buddies are also able to provide on-the-spot answers and feedback for your child, so they can quickly solve setbacks during learning time.

Galaxy Kids lessons are designed to be quick and entertaining.  Most of the learning activities on the platform feature games and videos to catch your child’s interest.

The games and videos all feature native speakers, to make sure that all Galaxy Kids content includes correctly spoken English.

Instead of pushing repetition and memorization, Galaxy Kids focuses on free-flowing conversations.  Since Learning Buddies can respond in real time to your child, there’s no limit to where their conversations can go!

We’ve all heard someone say (or perhaps even said ourselves) that we’d probably be able to learn x foreign language if only we lived in the country where it was spoken.

That’s the experience Galaxy Kids recreates, in a low-stress way.

Your child has a fun and interactive conversation partner who can keep them engaged in their lessons while making sure they’re speaking correctly.

The idea is that this is a more natural way to learn a language, and encourages a higher level of comfort and confidence that many other programs don’t create.

Now that we’ve covered the basics of how the Galaxy Kids program is designed, let’s take a closer look at some of the pros and cons this unique app presents.

Pros of Galaxy Kids

Galaxy Kids is Fun & Easy

No matter how high-tech or effective an app claims to be, it can’t do its work if kids don’t enjoy using it.

Galaxy Kids makes lessons feel like an exciting game, so most youngsters will probably be asking to spend more time on the app instead of counting down the minutes until practice time is over.

The Learning Buddies on Galaxy Kids are cute and funny, and since they’re powered by AI, they can actually respond to the things your child says.

This is huge when it comes to personally motivating kids to stay on-task and keep trying!

Multiple reviews of Galaxy Kids note how much children really enjoy the time they spend on the app.

Plus, although it’s intended for a young audience, it’s easy enough to use that parents and caregivers probably won’t need to spend a ton of time instructing their child on how to work through their Learning Path.

This makes Galaxy Kids a great option for independent practice, at home or at school.

Galaxy Kids Promotes Confidence

One of the hardest things about learning a language is overcoming the scary feeling of actually speaking it out loud.

In fact, most kids acquiring a second language go through what linguists term “the silent period” as part of the learning process.

The silent period occurs when kids understand a great deal of what is being said, but don’t feel comfortable enough to respond out loud.

This can be an intimidating time for kids, and can also be frustrating for parents and teachers who are sure their little one knows more than they’re letting on.

The Galaxy Kids approach to language learning promotes comfort and confidence when it comes to speaking.

Lessons are straightforward and include plenty of positive feedback, so your child won’t feel overwhelmed by too much, too fast.

Galaxy Kids also minimizes potential shyness, since kids are encouraged to discuss things they’re interested in with their AI-powered Learning Buddies.

There’s no surefire way to prevent kids from feeling nervous when they’re learning a new language, but the fun and relaxing attitude prompted by Galaxy Kids is definitely a good place to start.

Galaxy Kids Utilizes Both Native Speakers and AI

As we’ve already noted, English is spoken by billions of people worldwide.  However, it can be challenging to teach English if you’re not a native speaker.

Shades of meaning and nuanced pronunciations can be overlooked when English is taught by folks who may not be fully confident with the language themselves.

That’s why Galaxy Kids makes a point to use native language speakers for their videos and games.

The app takes footage and recordings of native English speakers and gamifies them using powerful AI technology.

This ensures that the words and grammar your child is learning are correct, while also providing unlimited avenues of conversation.

Almost like having a live tutor on call, Galaxy Kids provides your child with perfectly spoken language guidance as they work through their lessons step-by-step.

Galaxy Kids Isn’t Limited to English

Though its English-learning program is effective and comprehensive, Galaxy Kids also offers users an equally valuable path to learning Chinese.

Chinese is another incredibly useful language to know, as it’s spoken by billions of people across the globe.

If you’re interested in helping your child develop their creativity and critical thinking skills from a young age, letting them start learning Chinese is a great way to get started!

Cons of Galaxy Kids

Galaxy Kids is Only Intended for Preschoolers

While this isn’t necessarily a con, it’s important to remember that the Galaxy Kids app is aimed at the preschool level.

Learners from ages 2-5 will be hooked on the program’s engaging lessons, fun Learning Buddies, and cute songs and videos on topics like colors, foods, or the weather.

Older kids, however, will probably not be as interested in what Galaxy Kids has to offer.

If you’ve got a child in the upper elementary grades who is hoping to learn English (or Chinese), this app will probably seem too juvenile to really be effective.

Galaxy Kids Requires a Paid Subscription

Like most learning programs worth your time, Galaxy Kids requires a paid subscription for continued use of the app.

Thankfully, though, the company does offer users a free trial, so you can check out all of its resources and see if it’s a good fit for your child.

If your little one loves it, don’t feel too bad about paying for the program.  The power of AI makes Galaxy Kids as interactive and attentive as having a real, live tutor on call… for a fraction of the price!

Final Thoughts

Overall, Galaxy Kids is a fun and interactive way to help your young child master the English language.

The appealing lessons walk your child through important vocabulary and speaking skills step by step, while AI powered tutors help your child practice speaking with confidence in real time.

While it may not be ideal for older kids, Galaxy Kids is a great resource for helping the little learners in your life hit the ground running… or in this case, talking.

Click here to try Galaxy Kids today.

Have any questions about our Galaxy Kids review? Share them with us by leaving a comment below.

The post Galaxy Kids Review: An AI-Powered Language Learning App appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Whether you’re working remotely or in an office, communication is key.  The ability to quickly send and receive information across your team is critical to how well your business functions. Strong communication is also essential for building a positive workplace culture.  When everyone stays in the loop, employees are less likely to feel frustrated and confused… and more likely to be productive and engaged.

Communication is also the foundation of a happy customer base.  If customers’ issues can quickly be reported and resolved, they’re more likely to be satisfied with their experience.

Clearly, being able to communicate effectively is essential if your business is going to succeed. Yet with today’s sometimes confusing mix of in-person, hybrid, and fully remote workplaces, it can be difficult to keep all the moving parts together.

There are numerous communication software programs available to help, but these can be overwhelming and expensive, especially for smaller businesses without a huge budget.

Read on while I explore what Cliq can do, how it stacks up against its competitors, and whether or not it’s worth the price.

What is Zoho Cliq?

Zoho Cliq: Team Communication Software | Business & Team Chat App

Zoho Cliq streamlines team communication by offering structured conversations, accessible information, and seamless integration with your favorite tools, enabling collaboration from anywhere.

Try It Free!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Zoho Cliq is a communication software from international tech company Zoho.

Designed to help your organization communicate, Zoho Cliq lets you send messages, start chats, run video and audio calls, and host webinars or conferences with your teammates.

Zoho Cliq functions similarly to its big name competitors, like Slack and Microsoft Teams, by creating clean, easy-to-read chat boxes and threads.

Cliq is user-friendly when it comes to navigation.  Members simply open the app and check in when they start work for the day (almost like with a time card).

Teammates can then adjust their status to indicate their availability, so you can tell at a glance if a coworker is on a call, away, or ready for a chat.

Icons will even indicate whether a teammate is logging in via mobile or desktop, a nice feature for knowing how soon to expect a response.

Employees can also choose to show their geographic location, a big plus for international or remote workplaces where folks might be talking from different time zones.

Cliq includes daily calendars, reminders, and tasks that will appear for each member of your team.  Group calendars as well as personal to-do lists are easily managed in the corner of your desktop, which is helpful for staying organized.

Cliq offers a number of ways for employees to collaborate, whether they’re all in the same building or flung across the globe.

Read on to discover some of Zoho Cliq’s features that stood out to us.

Cool Features of Zoho Cliq

Conversations Made Easy

Zoho Cliq has put a lot of effort into making conversations flow easily among coworkers.

Panels for each conversation will open as chats are initiated, making it easy to keep track of all your different communications.

If you need to separate a topic or item in a chat, Cliq utilizes what they call “forking” – the ability to split a conversation into a new panel, so as not to lose track of an issue, question, or request.

Being able to fork conversations is a great way to ensure that everything gets addressed in a timely manner without getting buried.

Conversations in Cliq also include searchability, so you can quickly locate a conversation via keyword without having to scroll endlessly through each of your chats.

The Personal Touch

Cliq also puts a big emphasis on maintaining a sense of office camaraderie.  

Whether you’re using the software in the same building as your coworkers or not, they focus on little things like being able to meet, greet, and chat face-to-face.

Cliq allows users to hover over any colleague’s name and see a drop-down for a video or audio call.  This fosters easy, casual conversations that happen in real-time.

For webinars and voice calls, Cliq allows up to 1,000 participants to join in, making it possible to connect with your team even if your team is huge. If your participant count is more than 1,000 people, you can create a broadcast to allow up to 10,000 people to view the event.

Interacting with a teammate’s face and voice makes for a more personable (and often much faster) exchange.

Bots & Beyond

Meanwhile, for tasks that don’t require that human connection, Cliq has powerful bot capabilities so that you can automate routine or rote tasks.  This is a great timesaver regardless of your organization’s size and scope.

Cliq’s built-in bot Taz and AI-assistant Zia, are designed to take care of simple workflows so that you don’t have to.  Taz and Zia can send invites, notifications, and reminders to keep things running smoothly.

You’re not limited to these out-of-the-box bots, either.  Cliq users can build customized bots with a relatively low-code bot builder provided by the platform.

Let your bot make suggestions, connect to tools, speed up workflows, or make announcements – so that you can focus on more important collaboration with your coworkers.

Easily Integrated

Cliq also has extensive integration capabilities, making it handy to use in conjunction with pretty much any outside program or platform.

Cliq syncs effortlessly with the entire Zoho suite of 40+ apps, making it especially easy for businesses that use Zoho for all of their needs.

It also pairs with Google Drive, OneDrive, Dropbox, and more for file storage, and Gitlab, Github, and Crashlytics for your development needs.

Cliq integrates with big names in marketing, productivity, sales, project management, and more, so you never have to worry if the software is going to be compatible with other programs that your business uses.

In fact, Cliq can be integrated with any third party application as long as they support REST APIs.

High Power, Low Price

Price is another area where Zoho Cliq shines.

In fact, it’s the most affordable option on the market when compared to similarly powerful alternatives.

Zoho Cliq offers a free version with a surprising number of features, including 100 GB of storage for your entire organization (something most free plans don’t include).

The free version allows users to take advantage of messaging, voice, and video chatting capabilities too, all without costing a penny.

Organizations that want to level up their experience can subscribe to a paid plan from Zoho Cliq for only $3 to $1 per user per month.  The larger your organization is, the less the cost will be per member.

A paid Cliq plan unlocks even more desirable features, such as personalized chatbots and an increased amount of messages, calls, and data you can share with your coworkers.

In fact, paid Zoho members are allotted 100GB of storage per person – a whopping value for the price.

This is especially true when you consider the fact that leading competitors charge around $5 per member a month, or more.

Drawbacks of Zoho Cliq

So, what are the drawbacks of Zoho Cliq?  Well, there aren’t any glaring ones I’ve experienced, at least when it comes to ease of access and navigation.

However, some users may find that Cliq derives too much from its competitors, namely Slack.  The interface is similar, as are many of the features, just under slightly different function names.

Some have said Cliq isn’t quite as robust as Slack, not supporting as many native integrations and requiring a bit more upfront work to set up, but remember, Cliq does have a very solid set of integrations and it can be integrated with any third party application that supports REST APIs.

Aside from that, though, the only thing Zoho Cliq lacks is name recognition which can make adoption from others a bit challenging in some cases. Many organizations end up going with larger and better-known communication platforms simply by default.

Final Thoughts on Zoho Cliq

Zoho Cliq is a thoughtfully designed, user-friendly communication software.

Reminiscent of competitors like Slack and Teams, Cliq makes it easy to manage multiple conversations and highlight important issues and topics so they don’t get overlooked.

Cliq has powerful voice and video call capabilities, and puts a strong emphasis on collaborating in real time with your teammates.

It’s accessible from desktop or mobile and comes with an astounding number of integrations, making Cliq easy to use and adapt with whatever systems your business already uses.

Plus, Cliq offers customizable chatbots to take care of organizational tasks to save you time and make your workflows more efficient.

The platform has strong security, a clean look, and a huge amount of data storage per member.

Most importantly for businesses on a budget, Zoho Cliq costs a fraction of what its competitors charge, while providing almost all of the same helpful features and capabilities.

If you’re looking for a way to streamline your business’s communications without breaking the bank, Zoho Cliq is definitely an option you’ll want to explore.

Click here to try Zoho Cliq for free.

What communication software does your company use?  Do you know have any additional pros, cons, or questions I didn’t mention here?  I’d love to hear from you in the comments below.

The post Everything You Need to Know About Zoho Cliq appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

After extensive hands-on research, I’ve come up with a curated list of what I believe are the very best online fintech courses out there today, ranked based on a variety of factors, including the quality of the curriculum being presented, the credentials and experience of the instructors, reviews from real students, cost, and more (click here to learn about our entire Editorial Process & Methodology for product reviews).

What are the Best Online Fintech Classes?

1. Harvard FinTech Online Short Course (GetSmarter)

Harvard VPAL FinTech Online Course | Financial Technology Certificate - GetSmarter

This course will help you move past the present disruption in FinTech and prepare yourself for the upcoming priorities in financial services.

Learn More!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

$3,080

Duration

6 weeks

Dive deep into the world of FinTech and stay ahead of the curve with this Harvard FinTech Online Short Course. It’s a great course for finance professionals, technologists, and curious individuals.

By the end of this course, you’ll have learned about the FinTech landscape, the tech shaping the future of finance, and how to tackle real-world innovation challenges. You will learn to critically assess its future and come up with creative solutions for real companies.

Designed in collaboration by the faculty from Harvard VPAL and industry experts, Lauren Cohen and Christopher Malloy, you’re in safe hands. Their real-world experience and in-depth knowledge really makes this course not just informative but also engaging.

The course’s comprehensive breakdown helps you understand the drivers and adopters of FinTech innovations. You’ll explore weekly modules that provide a comprehensive view of this ever-evolving field. It’s like unwrapping a series of fascinating presents each week! The live case studies kept things lively and engaging. The international network of classmates added a unique dimension to the learning experience. Learning from each other’s experiences is one of the most valuable aspects of this course.

You can take this class through GetSmarter, one of our favorite online course websites. Check out our GetSmarter review to learn more.

2. The Economist Fintech & the Future of Finance: Blockchain, Cryptocurrencies, Govcoins & the Payments Revolution (GetSmarter)

Fintech and the Future of Finance: Blockchain, Cryptocurrencies, Govcoins and the Payments Revolution | The Economist Online Short Course - GetSmarter

Learn the workings of the financial system, its vulnerability to technological disruption, and the various players who are both competing and collaborating in this competitive arena.

Learn More!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

$1,851

Duration

6 weeks

Are you ready to dive into the exciting world of finance, blockchain, cryptocurrencies, and all things fintech? Designed for those hungry to learn, The Economist Education Fintech and the Future of Finance course is your golden ticket. This one is for anyone curious about the financial system and why it’s ripe for disruption. The programme covers topics that will interest finance enthusiasts and professionals alike.

Once complete, you’ll gain knowledge and a deep understanding of the financial system and why it’s ready for a shake-up. You’ll be exploring blockchain, cryptocurrencies, stablecoins, gov coins, super-apps, and decentralized finance. 

Not only will you be able to build the right skills to identify technologies that influence the provision of fintech and financial services but will also be able to utilize your skills with confidence and effectively. 

You’ll learn from a leading expert like Matthieu Favas, a Finance correspondent at The Economist, you’ll get real-world insights from someone who knows the industry inside out. You’re not just learning theory; you’re getting practical knowledge from the pros.

On successful completion, you’ll receive an official certificate from Economist Education. It’s not just a piece of paper; it’s a symbol of your expertise in the field. You’ll earn it by completing practical assignments online, proving your mastery of the subject. The certificate will be sent to you, making it official.

3. UCT Fintech: Disruption in Finance (GetSmarter)

Fintech: Disruption in Finance | UCT Online Short Course, South Africa - GetSmarter

Prepare for the future of finance by gaining knowledge of today's key fintech innovations, and acquire the skills to finance your own groundbreaking business concept.

Learn More!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

Price

$952

Duration

8 weeks

In this course, with each passing week you unlock a world of diverse Fintech knowledge. Whether you’re a budding entrepreneur, a finance enthusiast, or just someone who’s curious about the fintech universe, UCT Fintech: Disruption in Finance course welcomes all. It’s designed to equip you with a profound understanding of fintech and the game-changing opportunities it offers. 

Your guide on this fintech journey are the experts themselves. Allan Davids, a Lecturer at UCT’s School of Economics, is here to share his wisdom.

What will set you apart? You’ll be armed with insights into blockchain technology, big data, and AI’s impact on financial services, especially in the African context. You’ll be the fintech wizard who can identify opportunities and challenges in this space.

At the finish line, you’ll receive an official certificate from the University of Cape Town. To earn it, you’ll tackle practical assignments online, demonstrating your fintech mastery. Your certificate will be sent to you, officially sealing the deal.

4. What is Fintech? Learn the Skills of FinTech Today (Udemy)

Price

Regularly $34.99 (Udemy pricing often includes sales)

Duration

1h 4m 

This course is your map through the Fintech maze, providing you with the foundation to understand this dynamic world. In the last decade, Fintech has exploded with over $200 billion invested in Fintech startups. Fintech has been reshaping the financial landscape. 

The course “What is Fintech? Learn the skills of FinTech today” is taught by Huy Nguyen Trieu, co-founder of CFTE. He’s a key player in the Fintech world, with a wealth of experience and a background that includes top financial institutions like Citi, Royal Bank of Scotland, and Société Générale. 

This course is ideal for aspiring learners with a curiosity about Fintech. It is divided into three main chapters, each offering unique insights. 

You start by learning the true meaning of Fintech, getting an overview of its technologies, applications, and sectors. Further ahead, you dive into the historical origins of Fintech. Explore the reasons behind its rapid ascent to mainstream adoption. By the end of it, you understand how Fintech is changing the financial services landscape and explore the advantages it brings, its integration into the financial sector, and its transformative effects on the value chain and jobs in finance.

5. Decentralized Finance (DeFi): The Future of Finance Specialization (Coursera)

Price

Free to audit (paid upgrades available with the Coursera pricing model)

Duration 

4 months at 2 hours a week

Want to explore the cutting-edge world of decentralized finance (DeFi)? Taught by the experienced Cam Harvey, this dives deep into DeFi infrastructure and applications, helping you understand how DeFi can revolutionize the finance industry.

This course is designed for intermediate learners. Get ready to acquire a deep understanding of the DeFi infrastructure and its leading applications. From tokenization to entrepreneurial finance, cryptocurrency to smart contracts, this course covers the spectrum of DeFi elements. Upon completing the specialization, you’ll gain a Shareable Certificate that you can proudly add to your LinkedIn profile. Plus, the course is offered with English subtitles and provides content in 20+ languages. 

DeFi is the future of finance, and this course offers you a front-row seat to this transformative technology. You’ll learn about the problems DeFi can solve in traditional finance, like inclusion, efficiency, transparency, and more. It’s a unique opportunity to grasp the potential of DeFi and what it means for the financial world.

6. Algorithmic Trading: Backtest, Optimize & Automate in Python (Udemy)

Price

Regularly $69.99 (often goes on sale)

Duration

9h 58m

Dive right into the exciting world of cryptocurrency trading automation! In the Algorithmic Trading: Backtest, Optimize & Automate in Python you’ll become a pro at using freqtrade, an open-source code for cryptocurrency trading. The course helps you understand how to use it effectively to automate your trading.

Whether you’re a cryptocurrency enthusiast or a trader looking to automate your strategies, this course provides all the tools and knowledge you need to thrive in the world of automated cryptocurrency trading.

Your instructors Mohsen Hassan and Ilyass Tabiai are passionate experts in finance, blockchain and programming. They are here to guide you through the intricacies of cryptocurrency trading.

This course is indeed related to FinTech, as it involves cryptocurrency trading and automation, which falls within the realm of financial technology (FinTech). It combines elements of finance, programming, and technology to teach you how to automate cryptocurrency trading strategies. 

7. Foundations and Applications of Financial Technologies Specialization (Wharton Online)

Price

$79/month

Duration

4-6 weeks

With the pace of technological change, the financial industry is evolving rapidly. This specialization equips you with the knowledge and skills needed to thrive in a technology-driven financial profession. 

As banking CEOs express concern about technological change and the data landscape continues to grow, staying informed and capable in the world of FinTech is a strategic move.

Foundations and Applications of Financial Technologies Specialization offered by Wharton is a specialization that is all about delving into the modern world of investment strategies with a focus on FinTech. 

You’ll explore the intricacies of payment methods, financial regulations, robo-advising, crowdfunding, peer-to-peer lending, cryptocurrency, and blockchain, among other cutting-edge topics. It’s the perfect opportunity to stay ahead in the ever-evolving financial landscape.

Final Thoughts

The fintech industry, with its rapid growth and innovative edge, really offers an exhilarating career landscape for those eager to be at the forefront of financial technology. This sector is reshaping how we handle money, and it’s constantly evolving, offering endless opportunities for creativity, problem-solving, and impact.

The online fintech courses detailed above provide comprehensive, flexible learning paths that cover everything from blockchain and cryptocurrency to digital banking and regulatory technologies. They cater to a range of skill levels, allowing both beginners and seasoned professionals to acquire the knowledge and skills needed to thrive in the fintech space.

Have you taken any fintech classes online? Share your experiences by leaving a comment below.

The post The 7 Best Online Fintech Courses Worth Trying appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

Simply put, an instructional designer is a professional who specializes in creating, designing, and structuring educational content and experiences, often using principles of learning theory and technology to enhance teaching and learning outcomes.

In the guide below, I’ll explain in more depth what an instructional designer is, what they typically do on a daily basis, who they work for and with, and more.

What is an Instructional Designer?

An instructional designer, also called an eLearning designer, is a professional responsible for designing educational content and experiences that are intended to improve the performance of individuals in particular tasks. Instructional designers bring together principles of design, instruction theory, and technology to create effective learning materials.

They use their knowledge of learning theories and instructional design principles to create engaging educational content and activities.

Instructional designers work collaboratively with subject matter experts, instructional technologists, and project managers to ensure that their designs meet the learning objectives and needs of the target audience.

They are skilled in using various technologies and multimedia tools to enhance the learning experience, and they continuously evaluate and revise their designs to improve the quality and effectiveness of their instructional materials. Overall, instructional designers play a crucial role in the education and training of individuals and teams, and they are dedicated to promoting continuous learning and growth in various fields.

Instructional Designer Job Duties

The daily responsibilities of an instructional designer are numerous and include:

• Analyzing the current performance level and learning needs of the target audience
• Developing instructional objectives and assessments to evaluate content efficacy
• Designing engaging learning materials, activities, and resources using various multimedia tools
• Creating interactive media elements such as simulations, games, quizzes, and videos
• Integrating instructional design principles into all aspects of the learning experience
• Collaborating with subject matter experts to ensure content accuracy and relevancy
• Testing and revising instructional material as needed
• Providing feedback on created materials
• Taking user feedback to improve learning programs
• Implementing user-centered design processes such as usability testing
• Monitoring student engagement levels throughout the course
• Managing online learning communities
• Working with other key stakeholders to ensure training programs are meeting organizational goals and objectives
• Training others to deliver learning programs

Key Tools Used by Instructional Designers

As an instructional designer, we use a range of technology-based tools to create and deliver effective educational materials. These can include:

• Learning Management Systems (LMS) – used to organize and manage course content, assignments, tests, quizzes, etc.
• Software such as Photoshop and Adobe Creative Suite – used to design visuals for the learning material
• Video Editing Software – used to create videos and other multimedia materials
• Authoring Tools – used to create interactive activities such as simulations, games, and quizzes
• Analytics tools – used to track and analyze user engagement with the material

Who Does the Instructional Designer Report To?

I’ve worked on a number of instructional design jobs over the years, and the person I’ve reported to for each project sometimes varies.

The instructional designer typically reports to a Learning & Development Manager or Training Supervisor, depending on the size of the organization.

In smaller companies, they may report directly to the CEO or COO. In larger organizations, they often report up through several tiers of management.

They also work closely with subject matter experts and instructional technologists throughout the design process.

The instructional designer acts as the bridge between these stakeholders, ensuring that all components of the training program are properly integrated and working together towards the desired outcomes.

Additionally, they may also work with other departments such as marketing, customer service, or IT to ensure that learning programs align with organizational goals and objectives.

Simply put, the instructional designer’s primary responsibility is to create effective and engaging learning materials that are tailored to meet the needs of the target audience.

Other Resources

• How to create an instructional design portfolio
• Instructional designer salary guide
• The best instructional design courses online
• Instructional design resume tips
• Common instructional designer interview questions
• Where to find instructional design jobs
• Instructional design job listings
• Instructional design career path
• Instructional design masters programs
• Top instructional design bootcamps
• How to write an instructional design cover letter
• Instructional design vs curriculum development

Thinking About Pursuing a Career in Instructional Design?

Now that you know what an instructional designer is and what the job entails, you might be interested in pursuing a career in the field.

Your best bet to get started is to enroll in an online certification program that will give you all the training you need to become an expert in instructional design.

Best Overall

Emeritus Professional Instructional Design Certificate | Online Certificate Course

Gain firsthand expertise in instructional design principles and methodologies through this unique Professional Certificate program. Create impactful learning solutions and improve people's ability to learn.

Learn More!

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

The Professional Certificate in Instructional Design from Emeritus is the gold standard when it comes to online ID certificate programs.

In only 5 months, you’ll learn the fundamentals of ID, including how to set learning objectives and create engaging digital content.

This program offers in-depth instruction on the latest methodologies and analytics to help you craft effective learning solutions for your intended audience. Under the guidance of industry professionals, you’ll gain the knowledge and skills needed to succeed as an instructional designer in today’s fast-paced job market.

In fact, 94% of Emeritus students report a positive impact on their professional development after taking a course on the platform.

Click here to learn more about the program and request a free brochure.

Have any more questions about what an instructional designer is or what they do? Comment below and I’ll help you out.

The post What is an Instructional Designer? Job Description & Duties appeared first on MyeLearningWorld.

If you’re a beginner to recording, it might seem like a good idea just to place your equipment on shelves and go from there. But here’s the thing I’ve learned over the years, doing this compromises the very sound quality you are trying to produce. Every piece of equipment has a vibration signature. Placing them on a shelf magnifies that signature.

Studio equipment also produces considerable heat. Placing them on a solid object of any type creates a barrier that reduces the exhaust of heat. Take it from the professionals: the only way to combat these two critical concerns is to use a recording studio rack mount or studio rack cabinet.

I’ve reviewed and ranked the best rack mounts for studio equipment based on numerous key factors, including quality, size, style, and price (click here to learn about our entire Editorial Process & Methodology for product reviews). This guide has been fully updated for 2023, so you can be sure you’re getting the latest information on the best current products to help you make an informed buying decision.

And if you don’t feel like reading the whole guide, you can see my top pick for a rack mount here:

On-Stage RS7030 Rack Stand

$44.53

This 12-space studio rack can securely hold several pieces of gear of up to 115 pounds. The black powder-coat finish also makes it very durable and prevents it from chipping over time.

Check Price on Amazon

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

01/15/2024 02:07 pm GMT

What are the Best Studio Rack Mounts?

Here are our picks for the best audio racks for a home studio environment:

1. On-Stage RS7030 Rack Stand
2. Odyssey Carpeted Studio Rack
3. Samson SRK-12 Rack Stand
4. StarTech.com Wall Mount Bracket
5. KENUCO Vertical Wall Mountable Rack
6. Procraft Equipment Rack
7. StarTech.com 12U Open Frame Rack

1. On-Stage RS7030 Rack Stand →

On-Stage RS7030 Rack Stand

$44.53

This 12-space studio rack can securely hold several pieces of gear of up to 115 pounds. The black powder-coat finish also makes it very durable and prevents it from chipping over time.

Check Price on Amazon

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

01/15/2024 02:07 pm GMT

What’s Inside: Support bars and braces with screw fasteners and additional rack screws to fasten up to 12 equipment modules.

Top Features: I am choosing the On-Stage RS7030 Rack Stand first because it is an excellent example of the bare-bones or basic approach to the issue of mounting home studio equipment.

The stand offers space for up to 12 units, so all your basic home studio equipment should comfortably fit with a good amount of room to spare.

The steel tubing supports a maximum of 75 pounds of equipment without bending, and its angled style provides easy access for the user to every module.

The rack is usable anywhere in a studio or on stage. It can be placed beside a desk, on a platform, or elevated near musicians on stage for easy access during performance.

One of the things I like is this frame is easy to assemble and can be broken down and reassembled in minutes with each gig stop.

Best Use: This rack mount is best used in a home studio but sees a lot of use on performance stages.

2. Odyssey Carpeted Studio Rack →

Odyssey CRS08 8 Space Carpeted Studio Rack

$169.79

This carpeted studio rack is built from 3/4" Plywood and offers an angled face so you can easily see and access your gear. 

Check Price on Amazon

We earn a commission if you make a purchase, at no additional cost to you.

01/15/2024 12:37 pm GMT

What’s Inside: The rack-mount system is already assembled and ready to receive equipment. Unfortunately, the kit does not include rack screws, so you need to purchase those separately.

Top Features: Rated as a portable system, Odyssey URS08 8 Space Carpeted Studio Rack comes in only one size.

Though the design features a slanted front to allow easy access to equipment controls, the back is vertical, creating an ever-diminishing space for equipment. The bottom of the cubicle allows equipment up to 15.9 inches in depth while the top of the cabinet only allows 12-inches.

You should consider these dimensions while choosing your devices to ensure you have room.

The cabinet is completely enclosed with one-inch thick plywood making a sturdy structure in which to house your equipment.

The structure is 19 inches in height with apertures that accept up to eight devices.

The outside carpeting serves as an insulator and presents an attractive appearance.

The item is portable and wears well when shipped from one place to another. It is priced in the mid-range of the rack mount market.

Best Use: The Odyssey URS08 8 Space Carpeted Studio Rack is best used in a home studio environment and is small enough to be placed on the side of your desk for easy access to the control units. Some traveling musicians use the rack on stage as it has wheels and is portable. With its laptop computer-sized flat top, I have seen this rack used as a multifunctional podium in classrooms and churches.

3. Samson SRK-12 Rack Stand →